Home

WinTCD User Manual

1. Save to File Cancel Figure 2 Checkmark the Footer Comment and or Conclusion checkboxes and type in the desired information Click on Print when done Note The Mean Sys and Dia are calculated in cm sec If a vessel label is marked with a the units are kHz If values have been obtained using manual cursors recalculated values the line is marked with an Viasys WinTCD Diagnostic Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 1 of 2 Patient Name Doe John Q Hospital Hospital X Patient ID 000001 Physician Dr Smith Patient SS 123 45 6758 Technician Smith CSO Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Exam time 19 01 00 10 25 07 Left Depth Vm Vx Vd PI RI Right Depth Vm Vx Vd PI RI 4MHz CW velocities in kHz CCA CW 1 53 H ra 2 MHz Temporal velocities in cm s Comment Line 1 Figure 3 Text report page layout Viasys WinTCD Diagnostic Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 2 of 2 Patient Name Doe John Q Hospital Hospital X Patient ID 000001 Physician Dr Smith Technician Smith CSO t Patient SS 123 45 6758 Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Exam time 19 01 00 10 25 07 Comment Line 1 Figure 4 Conclusion report page layout This page is printed automatically at the end of each report if configured Note The function button Save to File can be used as an al
2. RI M Md OK Cancel Figure 1 Click on checkmark each of the trend curves checkboxes you want displayed and then click on the Show Menu arrow button and choose with which color you want each curve displayed Configure Trend Channel 1 Channel2 TCD Scale Limits External Inputs m Curves p Minimum p Maximum Systole 0 150 4 Diastole 0 150 Mean o 150 H PI 00 2 00 a RI 00 2 00 500 OK Cancel Figure 2 Click on the Up Down Arrow buttons to choose the desired Minimum and Maximum scale ranges with which you want each curve displayed Configure Trend Channel 1 Channel 2 Teo Scale Limits External Inputs m Curves p Colors Minimum Maximum gt Units 7 DES F Vol mmHg U a d o L wee Figure 3 Click on checkmark each of the external inputs you want displayed and then click on OK S8 41 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Trend display options 1 Click on the Display Options menu point in the Trend configuration menu Figure 1 and the Display Trend Options dialog will appear Figure 2 Choose which events will be displayed 2 Click on the events you want displ
3. Save Go Next High Frequency Enhance Same as the Same as the Protocol gt Save Go Next Doppler gt HFE Mode menu function menu function Toggles the Saves running spectral High Frequency Enhance Show Vessel Label List Same as the Doppler gt Vessel Labels menu function Activates the vessel label menu Set Delta Mean Same as the Doppler gt Set Delta Mean menu function Sets the 100 reference value for the delta mean calculation Change Scale Units Same as the Doppler gt Units menu function Toggles the scale units for the spectral display between cm sec and kHz Print Graphics Report Same as the Report gt Graphics Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a graphics report display and jumps to the next protocol step Freeze Spectral Snapshot Same as the Doppler gt Freeze Spectral Snapshot menu function Freezes the running Doppler display in a pop up freeze Mode for the spectral display Select a New Probe Same as the Doppler gt Probe menu function Opens dialog box to allow window selection of new transducer Next Step Same as the Protocol gt Next Step menu function Jumps to next protocol step Switch Displayed Envelopes Same as the Doppler gt Envelope menu function Toggles the envelope curves between above below both and off Print Text Report Same as the Report gt Text Report menu function Opens dialog box to allo
4. 11 6 i Msc esas Figure 1 This example shows two Doppler windows cascaded on the screen display Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically 1 Reviewing monitoring data for test v 2 Acquiring monitoring data Figure 2 Click on Window and then on Tile Vertically WED eve ox Jot D WSTCD vg or Dan domn DJ Ch1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA R h 1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA 4 Figure 3 The two Doppler windows are displayed vertically on the screen display Maximizing a window To more clearly view the window you can maximize it to fill the entire viewing area Method 1 1 Click on the Maximize button Figure 1 Method 2 1 Double click on the window s Title bar Figure 2 Also see Resizing a window and Moving a window in Chapter S2 of this guide WW Multiple Window Screen Displays a ise eT oe Figure 1 Click on the Maximize button to enlarge the window CH1 S1 2MHz Figure 2 Double click on the window s Title bar to enlarge the window 11 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Minimizing a window To return the maximized window to its original size thus allowing you to choose a differen
5. Spectra Envelope F8 Units Display Range Move Vertical Splitter Help Topics Text Report p Move Horizontal Splitter About WinTCD Graphics Report Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Export SoundTrak Next Acquisition or Review Window Exam Info Configure S Keys Export SoundTrak Cau Configure Footswitch enna User Definable Items Tile Horizontally Save Configuration Tile Vertically v1 Acquiring data for Doe John D S3 8 Summaries Summary Monitoring Review Screen Overview Save Channel Socket Probe Vessel Label Shows saved record channel socket probe mode and the selected vessel label Flow Velocity Scale Doppler Window Flow Direction a Indicator Red arrow blood flow toward probe above the Zero Baseline Blue arrow blood flow away from probe above the Zero Baseline To change flow direction press the Direction key on the Remote Control eye X cm s or kHz EAT Minimize Button Reduce WinTCD to an icon on the desktop Click on the WinTCD icon to pee ama I R W AN Zero Baseline Adjust vertical position of the spectral data using the Zero key on the Remote Control Fast Curve Window Displays real time monitoring curves of designated Doppler parameters and or analog information Trend Window Displays long term monitoring cur
6. v Diastole v Mean MI vi v Figure 1 Click on checkmark each of the trend curves checkboxes you want displayed and then click on the Show Menu arrow button and choose which color you want each curve displayed Configure Trend Channel 1 Channel2 TCD Scale Limits External Inputs m Curves Minimum p Maximum Systole 0 150 Diastole 0 Mean 0 7 0 00 Rl 0 00 0 ox cae Figure 2 Click on the Up Down Arrow buttons to choose the desired Minimum and Maximum scale ranges with which you want each curve displayed Configure Trend Channel 1 Channel 2 Teo Scale Limits External Inputs m Curves p Colors 4 Minimum Maximum4 Units gt Ce 10 Vol 150 mmHg T H a A e O LU La 0 0 oF we 0 0 0 Figure 3 Click on checkmark each of the external inputs you want displayed and then click on OK Set the Trend display options 1 Click on the Display Options menu point in the Trend configuration menu Figure 1 and the Display Trend Options dialog will appear Figure 2 Choose which events will be displayed 2 Click o
7. Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol to view the Protocol menu items Enter new name x Po OK Cancel Figure 2 Type in a name for the new Protocol and then click on OK Renaming a Protocol file If you wish you may rename an existing Protocol file using either of the methods on this page The system parameter settings saved in the file will remain unchanged Note Default and Read Only Protocol files cannot be renamed or deleted without confirming the change one additional time Method 1 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 and then on Protocol Man ager Or 1 Click on the Protocol mak Manager button 2 Click on the Protocol file you want to rename and then click on Rename Figure 2 3 Type in the new file name and then click on OK Figure 3 4 Click on Exit Figure 2 Creating Diagnostic Protocols Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol and then click on Protocol Manager Protocol Manager xj Example Protocol EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM Non Protocol Mode EME 03 16 00 09 58 06 AM gt Protocol 1 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM Protocol 2 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 0
8. 8 32 Adjusting the Size and Position of the Spectral Zoom Box This section describes how to alter the size and placement of the Zoom box using hot keys Using Hot Keys The horizontal placement of the Zoom box Figure 1 is adjustable by using the left right arrow keys on the remote control or keyboard when the SoundTrak display is focused The width of the Zoom box Figure 2 is adjustable by using the Sweep key on the remote control when the SoundTrak display is focused You may also use Ctrl F8 to decrease or Shift F8 to increase the width Each time the Zoom box is altered the SoundTrak display is updated with the new data corresponding to the new posi tion Reviewing Data Save 1 manual CH 1A S1 2 Mhz PW MCA Save 1 manual CH 1B S1 2 Mhz PW MCA Figure 2 Adjusting Spectral Zoom Box Width 8 33 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adjusting the Size and Position of the Spectral Zoom Box This section describes how to alter the size and placement of the Zoom box using the mouse Using the Mouse The width and horizontal position of the Zoom box may also be set by clicking the left mouse button in any spectral display window dragging and then releasing the button Figure 1 This is similar to the selection facility in any standard paint program A similar function Figure 2 is also provided in the SoundTrak display window as well to allow z
9. AMPLITUDE GAIN DEPTH SCALE ESCAPE Figure 1 Adjust the Volume knob to select the desired audio volume In addition Ctrl F7 can be used to lower the volume and Shift F7 can be used to raise the volume setting Note The last used audio volume level is saved automatically and recalled the next time the program is run Activating the audio flow separation The separation of the audio signals according to flow direction can be toggled on and off When the flow separation is on toward the probe signals will be heard in the right speaker and away from the probe signals will be heard in the left speaker Use the following control to toggle the function on and off 1 Click on Doppler and then click on Flow Separation Figure 2 0r 2 If one of the softkey functions has been assigned Flow Separation On Off click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the remote control Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Save Spectral Snapshot FI Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PWICW Toggle PWICW F10 Curve Recording SoundTrak SoundTrak Boost Mode Boost Mode Ctri Alt F Flow Separation Ctri Alt F s tion Squelch Squelch Noise Reduction Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctri H Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Filter Down CtrleF
10. Press to scroll through the Fast Curves data Figure 3 Press the Left or Right Arrows to scroll through the Fast Curves data S8 53 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Zooming in on the Fast Curves display You can zoom in on the Fast Curves for closer inspections 1 Left click inside the Fast Curves window and hold down the mouse button Figure 1 2 Drag the mouse to create a box inside the window and then release the mouse button 3 The Fast Curves display expands horizontally 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as desired If the message Selected zoom not supported for Fast Curve data appears on the Status Bar directly above the Softkeys make the box you are drawing longer Unzooming the Fast Curves display To return the Fast Curves data display to its original length Method 1 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Figure 2 2 Click on the desired time scale 2 5 10 20 or 30 seconds Figure 3 Method 2 1 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Figure 4 2 Click on the desired time scale 2 5 10 20 or 30 seconds Figure 5 S8 54 Click and drag to create a box lt Fast Curve Window i Fast Curve Window e 4 Second L Figure 1 Clicking inside the Fast Curve Window and then dragging the mouse to create a box results in zooming in expanding the Fast Curve data as illustrated in the lower figure Cu
11. 13 Click on the 1 button Figure 2 Click on the Socket button corresponding to the probe you want enabled for use during the exam Figure 3 Creating Diagnostic Protocols Common Settings for No Name not saved General Print Layout r Layout Matrix Mode Color Greyscale Text Report Left lt gt Right OK Cancel Figure 1 Click on the Print Layout tab choose the number of columns and rows in the report for the saved spectral displays and whether you want color or grey scale prints Click on OK when finished New Protocol Wizard Select a probe and start the Doppler Change the current settings power depth sweep zero line softkeys etc if necessary Add new steps with the current settings Setup common protocol settings that apply to all steps optional Preferably done first before adding any steps since these settings can influence the properties of the steps Please repeat steps 1 and 2 or just step 2 as many times as needed Select the protocol window and click the right mouse button to edit delete or insert steps Finish Cancel Figure 2 Click on the 1 button Select a new probe Select a new probe x Available probes probe check every second 2 MHz 4 MHz Socket 1 Socket 2 Available probes 2 MHz 4 MHz Socket 1 Socket 2 E al Figure 3 Click on the Socke
12. Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System The microvascular probes have been designed to be as small as possible thereby allowing access to microvessels in very restricted areas Because of the invasive nature of microvascular applica tions the probes are sterilizable Consequently the microvascular probe and the preamplifier pod have been separated lt gt CAUTION Never autoclave the microvascu lar pod preamplifier or immerse the pod in a liquid 1 Connect the microvascular preamplifier to the system as shown in Figure 1 using the same procedure as the standard transducers on the previous page 2 Connect the microvascular probe to the preamplifier as shown in Figure 2 by simply pressing the probe connector onto the preamplifier Pioneer TC8080 System VANS o x gt e z E Red dot E4 Ti fory Red dot Brown for 20 MHz Preamplifier 20 MHz Preamplifier 20 MHz Probe Figure 1 Four channel Pioneer TC8080 main unit showing the 20 MHz microvascular pod and the 20 MHz probe connected to Channel 4 Figure 2 Connecting the microvascular probe to the preamplifier Note The Strain Relief is WHITE on the 16 MHz preamp and BROWN on the 20 MHz preamp H4 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Assembling the System Refer to the Front and Back Panel diagrams and legend for socket connector and other locations 1 Carefully unpa
13. Shift F3 S7 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the filter Filtering refers to a wall filter designed to remove low frequency signals turbulence caused by the vessel walls thus reducing zero baseline noise Note When observing a stenosis the wall filter may need to be turned up to filter out the strong low velocity signals The filter is always on and is the same for all channels Raising the filter If one of the softkeys Figure 1 was assigned Filter Up 1 Either click on the Filter Up softkey Or 2 Press the corresponding S key on the remote control Lowering the filter If one of the softkeys Figure 1 was assigned Filter Down 1 Either click on the Filter Down softkey Or 2 Press the corresponding S key on the remote control Note You may also use Ctrl F9 to decrease or Shift F9 to increase the filter S7 14 Set the direction of blood flow The direction of blood flow with respect to the transducer is identified by the Blood Flow icon Figure 2 Use the Direction key Figure 3 to change the displayed blood flow direction You may also use the F4 key on the keyboard or simply click on the Blood Flow icon itself When the arrow is red blood flow above the zero line is toward the transducer When the arrow is blue blood flow above the zero line is away from the transducer
14. 2 Click on Spectral Palette 3 Click on either Color Grayscale or on Color Mode 2 as desired Figure 2 S6 14 v Toolbar Spectral Palette Figure 1 Click on View and then on Spectral Palette Spectral Palette Lm Color Grayscale Color Mode 2 Figure 2 Click on Color Grayscale or on Color Mode 2 as desired The current selection will appear grayed on the menu Display the Toolbar You can choose to display Figure 1 or not display Figure 2 the Toolbar which provides another way to execute commands to the system Turning the Toolbar off provides more space for the spectral display Most users will display the Toolbar 1 Click on View Figure 3 2 Click on Toolbar A check mark Enabled Preparing the System for Diagnostics Exam aan Y EEEN igut m w eade ReH A D tep Vessel Label Probe Depth _ SV__ Power Report Pos Saved Comment lal Event Description Time AStart M Nic Vue I WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M Figure 1 Example display with Toolbar turned on Exam Protocol View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help p p Vessel Label _ Probe Depth _ SV__ Power Report Pos Saved Comment Event Description Time Astart Nic Vue H WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M Figure 2 Example display with Toolbar turned off v Toolbar Spectral Palette Figure
15. 2 Select the External Connec tions menu point out of the Configuration menu Figure 1 3 Click on the analog outputs tab to configure the output channels for the correct curve Figure 2 or click on the analog inputs tab to configure the input channels for an analog curve Figure 3 Refer to the explanation on the next page Note The external connections dialog box is only available in the acquire mode and only before any data has been saved 17 10 Configuration Configure Event List Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Configure External Connections Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on the Configuration menu and then on the External Connections menu point diagnostic and monitoring examples Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Outputs Channel 1 Audio CHIA f Channel 2 Audio CHIA f gt Channel 3 AudioCHiB fY Channel 4 AudioCHiB fY Channel 5 Env CH1A__ PA Channel6 Env CHiB _fr Channel 7 Channel 8 Env CH2B _Jr ox Configure External Connections Cancel Figure 2 External Connections dialog box analog output tab Analog Inputs Analog Outputs pigiai Outputs Channel 1 c02 H Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Ch
16. 256 Load M Mode M Mode L Enabled O64 0128 256 L Display Enabled Cancel Note Refer to Chapter S17 in this guide for additional information on creating special settings to record or playback audio data from a DAT tape or to use the Continuous SoundTrak option which records all the audio data in digital format Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 1 Click on Settings and then on Create a New Setting ix Create a New Setting Result of settings and probe check Setting OK Channels 1 Current assignment of available probes FFT Resolution Load Figure 2 Assign the connected probes to the desired channels or select the number of depths each and then click on Load Companion HI and Pioneer TC8080 examples shown Spectral display window layout Depending on whether a unilateral or bilateral M Mode setting was loaded the area of the screen where the spectral windows are usually displayed will now appear as shown in either Figure 1 or Figure 2 The size and position of the normal spectral display windows have been changed All eight spectral channels are now displayed in a column as small control spectral windows to the left of the window The active focussed spectral display is displayed as a large window above the M Mode display The active channel has the title bar highlighted in both the large display and the control display
17. By looking in the About WinTCD dialog you can determine the version of hardware in your system The systems without the noise reduction toggle have a PCI Board Type 1 The systems with the noise reduction toggle have a PCI Board Type 2 When the noise reduction function is toggled on the menu point is checked and the icon is shown as pressed The electronics for the noise reduction are switched on removing the background hiss When the function is toggled off the menu point is not checked and the icon is shown as not pressed The electronics for the noise reduction are switched off allowing the background hiss S7 18 Use one of the following methods to toggle the function on and off Method 1 1 Click on the Noise Reduction On Off button Method 2 1 Click on Doppler and then on Noise Reduction Figure 1 Method 3 1 If one of the softkeys was assigned the Noise Reduction function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Note It is recommended to turn the noise reduction circuitry off when measuring high velocity signals These jets often sound like background noise and can get filtered out from the audio signal The spectral signal is not affected by the noise reduction Note If your system does not support the noise reduction toggle the Noise Reduction functions will not be available Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2
18. SV Sample Volume Length The SV Parameter Box shows the sample volume which is the axial length of the area from which the Doppler signals are obtained The larger the sample volume the longer the duration of the pulse bursts and consequently the higher the ultrasound output power See Technical Description of the Sample Volume in Chapter S7 Gain The Gain Parameter Box shows the amplification of the received Doppler signal HW gain Filter The Filter box shows the current high pass filter cutoff frequency in Hz S6 12 Ampl Amplitude The Ampl Parameter Box shows the current amplitude as a percentage of the maximum system output of the ultrasound signal Power The Power box shows the current ultrasound output as a percentage of maximum TIC TIS Depending on which type of transducer is active the TIC TIS box will display either the TIC or TIS index automatically These indexes are used to provide information to clinical operators at the time of the patient examina tion such that ultrasound exposure to the patient may be reasonably minimized The TIC box displays the current Cranial Bone Thermal Index This Index which is based on a model where the bone is located close to the surface of the skin is displayed for the 1 6 MHz and 2 MHz transcranial transducers The TIS box displays the current Soft Tissue Thermal Index This Index which is based on a model where the ultrasound travels
19. User Maintenance Companion III If the Companion III system does not power up If the pointing device mouse trackball does not work If the keyboard does not work If the printer does not work If there is no sound from the loudspeakers User Maintenance Pioneer TC8080 If the Pioneer TC8080 system does not power up If the monitor is blank with yellow Power Saving LED On If the color on the screen is not uniform If the picture is fuzzy If the mouse does not work If the keyboard does not work Servicing the Instrument H5 3 H5 3 H5 3 H5 3 H5 3 H5 3 H5 4 H5 4 H5 4 H5 4 H5 4 H5 4 H5 4 H5 5 H5 5 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 6 H5 7 H5 7 H5 7 H5 7 H5 7 H5 8 Chapter H6 Technical Specification This chapter provides technical specifications for both the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion HI systems PC Specifications Doppler Specifications Inputs Outputs Specifications Analog Audio I O Specifications System Feature Specifications Regulatory Compliance Specifications Environmental Requirements Specifications Measurements and Weights Specifications Mains Supply Specifications Fuse Rating Specifications Acoustic Output Specifications Measurement Uncertainties 1 6 MHz 15mm PW Output Table 2 MHz 10mm PW Output Table 2 MHz 15mm PW Output Table 4 MHz PW Output Table 4 MHz CW Output Table 8 MHz PW Output Table 8 MHz CW Output Table 16 MHz 1 5mm PW Output Table
20. Boosymodo Ctrl Alt F Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean 1 2MhZPW VA Pr Configuration Indicators Report Configure Event List Settings Graphics Report Move Vertical Splitter Help Topics Move Horizontal Splitter lt Export SoundTrak Oronak About WinTCD Configure Fast Curves Enable Configure Trend Reset Count Next Acquisition or Review Window Exam Info Cascade Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch Tile Horizontally External Connections Tile Vertically User Definable Items System v 1 Acquiring data for Doe John D S3 6 Summaries Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Overview Probe Vessel Label Shows probe mode and the selected vessel label used during the exam Doppler Window Flow Direction Indicator Red arrow blood flow toward probe above the Zero Baseline Blue arrow blood flow away from probe above the Zero Baseline To change flow direction press the Direction key on the Remote Control Zero Baseline Adjust vertical position of the spectral data using the Zero key on the Remote Control Minimize Button Window Size Button Reduce WinTCD to an Reduce the size of the icon on the desktop Click window Resto
21. Closing a Frozen window You can remove a Frozen window from the screen display at any time by using any one of the methods below 1 Press the Freeze key on the Remote Control again or press Save N Click on the small X in the upper right corner of the Frozen window s title bar W Press the F2 key on the keyboard 4 Click on Doppler and then on Freeze Spectral Snapshot to remove the check mark Nn Click on the Freeze Spectral Snapshot button Performing an Exam CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L em B om meen 5m Freeze Protocol Step 1 CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L is B Figure 1 Click on any corner of the Frozen window and drag it until the window is the desired size Freeze Protocol Step 1 P Figure 2 Click on the Title Bar and drag the window until it is at the desired location on the screen display S7 25 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Reading calculations from the Parameter boxes Following is a description of the Parameter boxes that display the results of measurements obtained at the completion of every cardiac cycle or every second Each signal calculation is made from the envelope of the Doppler signal Regardless of the Direc tion setting all calculated param eters related to blood flowing toward the transducer are dis played as positive values while those related to blood flowing away from the transducer are displayed as
22. Deleting a Settings file Creating a new protocol Choose the common global protocol settings Choose the probe Create the protocol step Editing a protocol Selecting a different probe Adding new steps Inserting a new step Editing a step Deleting a step Adding inserting editing a step Editing the common global protocol settings Saving the edited protocol Overwriting the original protocol Creating a new protocol Creating a new default protocol Loading the default protocol Renaming a protocol file Deleting a protocol file S9 3 S9 3 S9 4 S9 5 S9 6 S9 7 S10 3 S10 4 S10 5 S10 6 S10 8 S10 8 S10 9 S10 9 S10 9 S10 9 S10 10 S10 11 S10 13 S10 13 S10 13 S10 14 S10 14 S10 15 S10 16 Chapter S11 Viewing Multiple Window Screen Displays This chapter describes how to view multiple windows on the screen display Chapter S12 Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files This chapter describes how to print reports export data and back up files Cascading multiple windows Selecting a cascaded window for viewing Tiling multiple windows horizontally Tiling multiple windows vertically Maximizing a window Minimizing a window Backing up files Legends Printing the spectral window Printing the trend curves window Printing the fast curves window Printing a text report Printing a graphics report with defined print positions without defined print positions Exporti
23. Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 3 Click on the desired time scale Figure 2 Right click inside the Trend window Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Configuration Go to Exam End Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend Figure 5 Click on the desired time scale Mon Reviewing Fast Curve data The Fast Curve window displays the Envelope Toward and Envelope Away data collected for each of the channels during Monitoring acquisitions Note The procedures in this section of the chapter are for the Monitoring Mode only not the Diagnostic Mode The Fast Curve window has fixed selectable time scales of 2 5 10 20 and 30 seconds Saving the Fast Curve configuration You can save the present Trend and Fast Curve display settings with the present file so the next time you review the data the settings will be selected automati cally by the system The Fast Curve settings that will be saved include e Curves Curve colors Value scales Tim
24. Flow Towards Only S16 13 Flow Towards or Away S16 13 flow velocity scale units S7 7 Footer Comment checkbox 12 5 12 7 S12 9 Footswitch H2 4 Index footswitch H3 6 H3 7 H4 6 H4 7 S2 9 S5 6 S6 7 free drive space S17 18 free harddisk space 17 19 Freeze S8 28 S16 16 freeze 7 28 Freeze key 7 24 Freeze Spectral Snapshot 7 24 S7 25 S16 16 Freeze Window S2 9 S5 6 S6 7 freeze window S5 5 S6 6 Freezing the display S7 24 S7 28 Freezing the spectral M Mode display S16 16 frequency resolution 9 3 S10 4 S10 12 S16 4 Front Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 H4 5 Front Quarter View of the Companion II H3 5 Fujita Sucker S15 3 Full Harddisk 17 19 Function And Intended Application PR iv Fuse Drawer H5 6 Fuse Rating Specifications H6 7 fuses H5 6 H5 7 G Gain S5 11 S6 12 S7 24 S8 25 S16 12 gain S7 28 Gain box S7 13 Gainkey 7 13 S8 25 gainkey S17 8 General Cursor Mode Curve Displays S8 57 General Cursor Mode Spectral Displays S8 9 General Cursors S8 57 Go to Exam Begin S8 44 Go to Exam End S8 44 Go to Trend Beginning S8 52 Go to Trend End S8 52 Gosling s Pulsatility Index S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 Graphics report without defined print positions 12 6 12 8 gray area S8 27 green arrow S17 8 green play symbol S17 6 green text S17 6 Greyscale 5 22 S6 14 S10 5 S10 12 S12 9 grounding reliability H1 4 GUID S12 10 12 12 H H LT S 5 11 S5 12 S5 18 S6 12 S6 13 S7 30
25. Method 2 1 Click on Doppler and then on SoundTrak Figure 2 A checkmark shows SoundTrak is enabled Method 3 1 If one of the S keys Figure 3 at the bottom of the screen display is assigned the SoundTrak On Off function click on the button or press the corresponding S key on the remote control Note The ability to record the digital audio data for the whole examination is also available as an option called Continuous SoundTrak A special software license is required for this feature Please refer to Sections S8 and S17 for more information on this topic Performing an Exam Ej SS DW da SS Mal Nl US nlf Figure 1 Click on the SoundTrak On Off button Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 2 Click on Doppler and then on SoundTrak Ear Seige Vion Doppler Contguration jndicators Report Window Help EEI mrep Figure 3 Click on the SoundTrak button or press the corresponding S key on the remote control S7 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III U
26. OK Figure 2 File Size at Limit Dialog Confirm Override Overriding will create a file size that will exceed limits of selected backup media Are you sure Figure 3 Confirm Override Dialog Index Symbols indicator 17 19 da3 S10 13 da5 S10 13 da7 S10 13 da8 S10 13 ST3 S9 4 STS S9 4 ST7 S9 4 ST8 S9 4 brackets 3 16 100 Reference Level S7 26 16 MHz S15 3 16 MHzPW S15 1 1x8 S16 3 20 MHz S15 3 20 MHz PW S15 1 2x4 S16 3 A About WinTCD 5813 3 abrasive cleansers H1 7 Accessories H2 8 H2 9 H2 10 Accuracy of Values Specifications H6 23 Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 format H6 20 Acoustic Output Specifications H6 8 acoustic power H1 9 acquisition parameters 7 6 Activate the probe s S6 4 Activating the audio flow separation 7 18 Activating the audio squelch function 7 17 Activating the Calculate VMR Mode 88 63 Activating the General Cursor Mode S8 9 S8 36 S8 57 Activating the Recalculate Values Mode S8 16 Activating the SoundTrak display S 8 30 Active Step Before Step S10 9 Active Step indicator S6 19 Add S5 15 S 17 12 Add New Step 10 9 Adding New Steps S10 9 Adding inserting editing a step S10 10 Additional Copies PR i Adjust Size Position of Spectral Zoom Box S8 33 8 34 Adjust the gain 7 13 Adjust the M Mode color display range S16 12 Adjust the M Mode display gain S 16 12 Adjust the sample volume depth S7 9 S16 10 Adjust the sample volume
27. S8 48 Figure 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 3 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 2 Click on Curve Configuration Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Curve Configuration Choose the Fast Curves for display and curve colors 1 Choose the Fast Curve you want displayed by clicking on checkmarking its associated checkbox and then choose with which color you want the curve displayed Figure 1 Click on the next Channel tab and repeat as necessary Set the Fast Curve scales 2 Click on the TCD Scale Limits tab and set the Mini mum and Maximum Y scale ranges Figure 2 Choose the external inputs to be displayed 3 Click on the External Inputs Configuration tab if available and then checkmark the curves to be displayed their colors and their scale limits Figure 3 When finished making your selections click on OK Reviewing Da
28. Text On Off Figure 1 Note Depending on the country of distribution the term H I T S may be replaced in the menus by the word Emboli Viewing the Advanced H I T S Information The advanced H I T S informa tion contains the values of the different parameters in the indicator algorithm To view the information 1 Right click on the event in the spectral display and select Show Advanced H I T S Information Figure 2 The information is displayed in a pop up window Figure 3 2 Right click on the event in the event list and select Show Advanced H I T S Informa tion Figure 4 The informa tion is displayed in a pop up window Figure 3 Show Event List Statistics A statistical listing of the H I T S events is available To view 1 Right click on the event list and select Show Event List Statistics Figure 4 The information is displayed in a pop up window Figure 5 Note For more information concerning the algorithm param eters please refer to the special writeup Manual of Doppler Embolic Signal Detection Reviewing Data Show Advanced H I T S Information E17 t 1 976 Display H I T S Text On Off Figure 1 Right click on the event and select Display H I T S Text On Off Show Advanced H I T S Information E17 t 1 976 Display H I T S Text On Off Figure 2 Right click on the event in the spectral display and select Show Advanced H I T S Information Advanced H I T S
29. The Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems have been certified and tested by Intertek Testing Services ETL SEMKO to comply with the General Requirements for Safety UL2601 1 1997 CAN CSA C22 2 No 601 1 M90 ETL listed and labeled EN60601 1 1990 Al 93 A11 93 A12 93 A2 95 A13 96 Corrigendum 94 and TEC 601 1 1998 Al 91 A2 95 Corrigendum 95 The Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems have been certified and tested by TRL Compliance Services Ltd to comply with the Medical Collat eral Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility IEC 60601 1 2 2001 and IEC 60601 1 2 AM1 2004 The Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems have been certified and tested by Intertek Testing Services ETL SEMKO to comply with the Collateral Standard Safety requirements for medical electri cal systems EN 60601 1 1 2001 and IEC 60601 1 1 2000 The Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems are class Ila products that have been CE approved to the Medical Devices Directive 93 42 EEC by Lloyds Register Quality Assurance LRQA in the United Kingdom Notified Body no 0088 The degree of protection in the system against electric shock conforms to EN60601 1 1990 Safety Summary Precautions IMPORTANT Please read this manual care fully before setting up the system or before connecting other instruments Read and follow all WARNINGS CAU TIONS and NOTES provided in this user manual To avoid the po
30. 0 967 0 248 0 967 0 248 0 967 0 248 0 081 cm sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds H6 26 Chapter S1 Introduction to WinTCD What is WinTCD Performing Doppler Examinations This chapter provides a basic introduction to the WinTCD software package which is used on both the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems O WARNING In all cases the original data must be reviewed if a clinical decision is involved 4 gt WARNING WinTCD is not intended for data acquisition on any non medical device such as a standard PC that comes in direct electrical contact with a patient Information in this chapter is subject to change without notice S1 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 1 2 What is WinTCD WinTCD is a TransCranial Doppler ultrasound software package which runs on either the Pioneer TC8080 system or the Companion III system The following non invasive method ologies are included e Diagnostic cerebrovascular and extracranial investigation e Extended term unilateral bilateral and multilateral cerebrovascular monitoring e Microvascular studies Additional features include e Handheld transducers 1 6 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz and 8 MHz can be applied to insonnate either intracranial or extracranial blood vessels so that a record of vascular blood flow velocity can be generated In routine diagnostic inv
31. 309 All Figure 1 Screen display with saved spectral snapshots in the Copy window JExam Setings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help west Tle e l Dill Figure 2 Right click anywhere inside the Event List window Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 3 Click on the Configure event list button Event List Configuration Mode Change Event Markers Indicators Curve Recording etc Doppler Parameter Changes Depth PW CW Scale etc Save Event Markers Auto and Manual Save events H LT S z User Defined Event Markers OK Cancel Figure 4 Make your choices by clicking on checkmarking the desired option s Configure the User Defined Event Marker Lists There are two types of user defined event markers which are supported in the WinTCD software package The first type of marker is intended for single events S Markers These events are one shot markers which describe events that only happen at one moment in time The second type of marker is intended for interval events I Markers These events are start stop type markers which describe events that happen over an interval of time Before the S Markers or I Markers can be used they must be preconfigured with the User Definable Items configuration dialog The two markers lists can be configured using
32. Choose by clicking on one of the three radio buttons The FFT resolution defines the number Creating Diagnostic Protocols esa Post Pow Bop 3 E es HE R Dal Weve Rc ema Figure 1 Right click anywhere in the Protocol List window Add New Step Insert New Step Before Step Delete Step Edit Active Step Common Protocol Settings Figure 2 Click on Common Protocol Settings Common Settings for No Name not saved General Print Layout Comments Description Startup Conditions X SoundTrak On when protocol is started L Search probe at any available socket Figure 3 Click on checkmark the checkboxes for those options you want to enable for the protocol S10 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual of vertical points bins in the Common Settings for No Name not saved spectral display The higher the FFT resolution the finer General Print Layout the frequency resolution of each bin will be r Layout Matrix Mode Color Greyscale 5 Click on the Print Layout tab Figure 1 6 Click on the Layout Matrix ONG I radio button that corresponds Left lt gt Right with the desired number of Columns and Rows for the report in which you want to place the Saved Spectral displays Figure 1 Click on the Print Layout tab choose the number of columns and rows in the
33. Delete Selected Cursor S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Delete snapshot 8 20 Delete Step S10 9 Deleting a Protocol file S10 16 Deleting a Settings file S9 7 S10 16 Deleting a Spectral snapshot S8 20 Deleting a step S10 9 Deleting All Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Deleting Event Markers S7 34 S8 56 Deleting Individual Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 DeltaMean 5 10 S5 12 S6 11 S6 13 S7 26 S7 27 Depth S5 11 S6 12 S7 9 S16 10 depth S7 11 Depth box 7 9 Depth column S6 18 Depth key S7 9 depth scale S16 12 depth scale settings S16 9 Description of Audio Inputs and Outputs S 17 3 Description of Calculate VMR Mode S8 66 detergent solution H1 7 DG S12 10 DIA S5 18 S7 27 Dia Diastolic S5 12 S6 13 Diabox 7 27 Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Control Buttons S3 11 Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Menus 83 4 Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Overview 3 3 Diagnostic Review Screen Control Buttons 3 13 Diagnostic Review Screen Menus S 3 8 Diagnostic Review Screen Overview 3 7 Diamond prefix S5 3 S7 4 Diamond symbol S6 17 Diastole 5 18 Diastolic S5 12 S6 13 S8 16 diathermy equipment H1 10 differential time cursor 8 36 Differential Time cursors S8 14 S8 37 S8 59 Differential Velocity cursors S8 13 Digital Outputs 17 17 Direction S16 12 direction H3 7 H4 7 Directionkey 7 14 S8 25 Disconnecting a transducer H3 8 H4 8 display S2 4 Display Cursor Background S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Display Cursor Units S8 15 S8 38
34. Figure 1 Click on Settings and then click on Settings Manager Settings Manager x 1 Channel EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 1 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 1x2 MD HITS EME 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 1x4 MD HITS EME 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM gt 2 Channel EME 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 2 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 08 AM 2x2 MD HITS EME 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 4 Channel EME 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM Load Save Rename Delete Figure 2 Click on the Settings file you want to rename and then click on Rename Enter new name Figure 3 Type in the new name and then click on OK Return to Figure 2 and click on Exit Deleting a Settings file If you no longer need a Settings file and wish to delete it you can use either of the following methods to delete that Settings file lt gt CAUTION Make sure you choose the correct Settings file for deletion Once it has been deleted it can not be recovered unless it was backed up on a separate storage device Note You cannot delete factory supplied settings Read Only Settings or Default Settings files without confirming the action one additional time Note Refer to Chapter S12 in this guide for information on backing up and restoring configuration files Method 1 1 Click on Settings Figure 1 and then on Settings Man ager Or 1 Click on the Settings Maa Manager button 2 Click on the Settings file you want to delete and then cl
35. Information H LT S 22 48 01 099 Duration 41 0 ms Probability 97 Peak Intensity 27 1dB Velocity 68 7 cm s Velocity Range 14 6 cm s Positive Intensity Volume 25 6 dB cm Negative Intensity Volume 18 3 dB em oK Figure 3 Advanced H 1 T S Information window Edit Event Delete Event Show Advanced H I T S Information Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 4 Right click on the event in the event list and select Show Advanced H I T S Information Event List Statistics Total Number of H I T S Ch 1A 23 I Total Number of H I T S Ch 1B 21 Total Number of Artifacts Ch 1A 14 Total Number of Artifacts Ch 1B 14 OK Figure 5 Event List Statistics Information window 8 29 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual The SoundTrak Display This section describes how to review the SoundTrak audio data which can be saved together with the spectral snapshot data Note The SoundTrak window is available in the Review mode only for both Diagnostic and Monitoring exams It is mainly intended to be used to see time delay information with multidepth H I T S events Activating the SoundTrak display The SoundTrak display Figure 1 can be switched on and off by 1 Left clicking on the softkey labeled SoundTrak Display 2 Pressing the softkey S1 S5 labeled SoundTrak Display When the SoundTrak display is active the spectral window will divide up into t
36. Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Diagnostic Doppler Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Cirl Alt F Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Monitoring Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on Noise Reduction to toggle the Noise Reduction Toggling the Boost mode level The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system each have two versions of the Doppler electronics The original version contained a boost function which was independent of the sample volume control and had three Boost levels available Off Low and High The present version contains a boost function which is tied together with the sample volume control and has two Boost levels available Off and On By looking in the About WinTCD dialog you can determine the version of hardware in your system The original systems say either Companion III hardware or Pioneer II
37. Protocol 3 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 03 17 00 08 56 Load Save Rename Delete Figure 1 Click on the Protocol file you want to load and then click on Load Load Protocol 32 Steps r Comment E Default Protocol Graphics Reports 3 X 2 r Requested probes 2 MHz 4 MHz r Currently available probes amz amz fo fo r Status Probe check every second Load Cancel Figure 2 If this panel appears insert the correct transducers and click on Load IV Autoload if check is successful Use probes at any socket Method 2 1 Click on the Protocol menu Figure 3 2 Click on Protocol Manager 3 Click on the desired file click on Load Figure 1 4 If Figure 2 appears insert the correct transducers and then click on Load Protocol Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 3 Click on the Protocol menu and then click on Protocol Manager S6 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual ane Activate the Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 tran sd uce r s Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW To manually activate the probe al transducer s when multiple ee transducers are connected to the Flow Separation Ctrl
38. S17 16 sweep S8 25 Sweep button 7 12 sweep speed S7 12 S17 16 Switch Displayed Envelopes 7 12 SYS S5 18 Sys Systolic S5 11 S5 12 S6 12 S6 13 Sys box S7 27 System Comparison PR v System Design PR v System Feature Specifications H6 6 System warranty PR ii Systole 5 18 Systolic 5 12 S6 13 S8 16 7 T 0 S8 11 S8 12 Tab 2 7 TC2020 S17 8 TC4040 S17 8 Index TCD D S4 4 TCD M S4 4 Technical description of the sample volume S7 11 text and graphics reports 12 10 Text edit command keys S2 7 Text Report 12 5 TFT H1 7 S2 4 Thermal Circuit Breaker H5 7 Thermal Index H1 8 H1 9 S5 11 S6 12 TIC H1 9 H6 8 TIC TIS S5 11 S6 12 Tick S5 17 Tile Horizontally S11 5 Tile Vertically S11 6 Tiling multiple windows horizontally S11 5 Tiling multiple windows vertically S11 6 Time 0 S8 11 S8 12 time display S8 24 time scale S8 43 S8 51 time scale display S8 43 time domain Doppler data S8 31 TIS H1 9 H6 8 title bar S16 8 Toggle background grid 5 21 8 42 S8 50 Toggle PW CW S7 6 S7 17 Toggle scale sharing 5 21 S8 42 S8 50 Toggling the audio noise reduction 7 18 Toggling the Boost mode level 7 19 Toggling the Fast Curves Window S17 13 Toggling the High Frequency Enhance S7 20 Toggling the M Mode Display Enhancement S16 7 Toggling the M Mode display enhancement S16 15 Toggling the M Mode Flow Direction Coding S16 6 Toggling the M Mode flow direction coding 16 13 tone lines H1 10
39. S6 12 Power S6 12 TIC TIS S6 12 Mean Mean Velocity S6 13 Sys Systolic S6 13 Dia Diastolic S6 13 PI Pulsatility Index S6 13 RI Resistance Index S6 13 D Mean Delta Mean S6 13 Choose the Doppler colors S6 14 Display the Toolbar S6 15 Set the Copy Window S6 16 Continued on the next page S6 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont S6 2 Loading a Protocol The Protocol List window Step and Flow Direction Vessel label Transducer column Depth column Sample Volume S V column Power column Report Position column Saved column Comment column Cursor bar Active Step indicator Saving Doppler DSP changes to the active Protocol step S6 17 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 20 Choose the diagnostic mode protocol The system parameters can be set up quickly for diagnostics by selecting a previously created protocol file H If you want to create your own protocol see Chapter S10 in this guide WW Use either of the following methods to choose a protocol Preparing the System for Diagnostics Method 1 1 Click on the Protocol Manager button 2 Click on the desired file click on Load Figure 1 3 If Figure 2 appears insert the correct transducers and then click on Load Protocol Manager Example Protocol EME Non Protocol Mode EME gt Protocol 1 Protocol 2
40. S7 32 H LT S counter 7 32 H LT S data S8 29 S8 36 H LT S detection Monitoring Mode only 7 30 H LT S Events S5 14 5 21 S8 42 S8 50 H LT S events 8 35 Harddisk is full S17 19 Headphones H2 8 Index 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual headphones H3 7 H4 7 Help S 13 3 S13 4 HFE Breakpoint 7 20 HFE Mode S7 20 Hide Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Hiding Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 High Frequency Boost filter S7 20 High Frequency Enhance 7 20 high intensity events S8 31 High Intensity Transient Signals 5 12 Highlighting the appropriate window 16 8 Horizontal Curve cursors S8 58 S8 59 Horizontal curve cursors S8 63 Horizontal Scale Accuracy H6 24 Horizontal Velocity 88 16 Horizontal Velocity cursors S8 10 hospital grade plug H1 4 humidity H1 5 hypercapnia 8 63 hypocapnia 8 63 I Markers S5 15 S7 33 S8 55 IEC 1157 H6 20 image processing 16 15 Imaging 12 14 Inc TX Pulse Width 7 10 Indicator Settings 7 31 Indicators On Off button S7 30 Infrared Remote Control H2 3 Infrared remote control 14 4 input amplification 17 8 Inputs Outputs Specifications H6 5 Insert S5 15 S17 12 Insert I Marker 7 33 S8 55 Insert S Marker S7 33 S8 55 Inserting anew step S10 9 inserting editing a step S10 10 Intended Application PR iv Intended operator PR viii intensity scale S7 28 S16 7 interference HI1 10 intermittent S17 18 Intermittent Curve Recording 7 29 interpolated 16 7 S
41. SoundTrak display toggled on a Zoom box SoundTrak Data Position Indicator is drawn over the spectral data which indicates the section of the spectral display lt Zoom Box which corresponds to the audio data in SoundTrak display window The data inside the box Save 1 manual CH 1B S1 2 Mhz PW MCA corresponds one to one with the SoundTrak window In other words the SoundTrak window displays the audio data used to calculate the spectral data inside the boundaries of the Zoom box The Zoom box is a white line box f lt Zoom Box similar to the box you get when drawing a rectangle in a paint program This box always covers the complete height of the spectral display window Figure 1 Spectral Display Window with SoundTrak Zoom Box When more than one spectral channel is present a Zoom box is drawn in each of the spectral display windows The time position and width of the Zoom box is the same in each spectral display window It is not possible to move the position of an individual Zoom box without altering the other Zoom boxes Note When more than one spectral display is present the Zoom boxes are all tied together so they always have the same size and position in each spectral display Each time the Zoom box is altered in one spectral display the other Zoom boxes readjust to the new position automati cally This is needed to ensure that the time delay measurements are accurate in the SoundTrak display
42. Toolbar S5 13 S6 15 total power mode S16 6 S16 13 Touch Screen Monitor H5 4 Touchscreen Display S2 1 touchscreen display H1 7 H2 5 touchscreen TFT display S2 4 track ball H3 6 H4 6 trackball H2 5 H5 6 2 3 trackball pointing device H2 4 Trademarks PR i transducer H3 8 H4 8 Transducer column S6 18 Transducers H2 6 transmit pulse length TX S7 10 transorbital examinations H1 6 Trend curves display S8 40 Trend curves for display S5 20 S8 41 Trend curves scales S5 20 S8 41 Trend Curves time scale S8 43 Trend data S8 45 Trend window S5 16 S5 21 S8 42 Index 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual turbulence 7 14 Turn on the envelope S7 12 Turning Curve recordings on off 7 29 Turning Intermittent Curve recordings off S7 29 Turning SoundTrak on off 7 15 Turning the Boost mode on off S7 19 Turning the Labelling text off S8 29 Turning the speaker on off S7 16 TX RX Linkage S7 10 Tx Rx Linkage H1 8 U ultrasonic power H6 8 Itrasound intensities goes above 100 H1 8 Itrasound intensity H6 8 Itrasound Power Output H1 8 Itrasound Safety H1 8 nderlined letter commands 2 5 nidirectional Total Power 16 13 nilateral S16 5 nits 7 7 nzooming the Fast Curves display S 8 54 nzooming the Trend display S8 46 p down arrows 2 7 pper scale 17 15 PS H1 6 SB Peripherals H3 7 H4 7 se Separate Scales S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 ser Definable Items S5 15 er defined event markers
43. displays and remote control key functions used with your system Detailed descriptions follow in later chapters Chapter S4 Starting WinTCD This chapter describes how to start the WinTCD software Table of Contents Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Overview Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Menus Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Overview Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Menus Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Overview Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Menus Summary Monitoring Review Screen Overview Summary Monitoring Review Screen Menus Summary Screen Control Buttons Diagnostic Acquisition Mode Monitoring Acquisition Mode Diagnostic Review Mode Monitoring Review Mode Continuous SoundTrak Summary Remote Control Functions Log on to the system Start the program and open create a file Summary of steps S3 3 S3 4 S3 5 S3 6 S3 8 S3 9 S3 10 S3 11 S3 11 S3 12 S3 13 S3 14 S3 15 S3 16 S4 3 S4 4 S4 4 TOC vii Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S5 Preparing the System for Monitoring This chapter describes how to set up the basic screen displays for Monitoring acquisitions TOC viii Choose the monitoring mode settings Set the screen display Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions Set the Footswitch functions Choose the Vessel Labels Customizing the window sizes Splitting the windows horizontally Splitting the window
44. output Proper use of these instrument settings can minimize patient exposure and optimize the results and efficiency of the equipment Note Always apply the ALARA principle use power levels that are As Low As Reasonably Achievable S7 8 Adjust the amplitude The current amplitude level is displayed in the Parameter box labeled Ampl This value is displayed as a percentage of maximum Use the Amplitude key Figure 2 to adjust the amplitude of the ultrasound signal You may also use Ctrl F5 to decrease or Shift F5 to increase the ampli tude Increasing the amplitude setting increases the voltage amplitude resulting in a higher ultrasound output at the transducer The amplitude or power rating is restricted to guard against exceeding the recommended FDA Guidelines The amplitude setting directly influences the power of the pulse burst A higher setting increases the amplitude resulting in a higher ultrasound output at the transducer Note Always apply the ALARA principle use power levels that are As Low As Reasonably Achievable Note The amplitude setting and the power setting are displayed in parenthesis for multi depth receiver channels Figure 1 Scale key Ctrl F2 Shift F2 0 0 0 Figure 2 Amplitude key Ctrl F5 Shift F5 Adjust the sample volume depth The Depth b
45. remove the Save label creating a look just like in the original acquire mode The time display in the Continu ous SoundTrak Toolbar shows the actual recording time of the data While continuous SoundTrak data is being played back a blue play symbol appears next to the speaker symbols in a similar way to the green arrow which is used in the normal external audio playback mode As the system sweeps each time the Doppler parameters change in the recorded file the screen is updated with the new values as if a movie was made of the original examination 8 24 Ch1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA lt gt 52 56 3 Depth Power 10 49 Figure 2 Continuous SoundTrak Playback Spectral Display Note While continuous SoundTrak data is being played back if the system encounters a Doppler adjustment event like a depth setting change etc the audio sound will be briefly muted to removed the popping sound as is done in the acquire mode This can be confusing during playback since no keys are being pressed but the system has recorded all of the original adjustments and recalls these at the appropriate times Note While continuous SoundTrak data is being played back if the system encounters the end of a data saving segment Recording Stop marker the playback stops at that point Note An important clarification to mention is that the curve data is not regenerated even if the examination is played b
46. there are five types of cursors available for the spectral displays These are Horizontal Velocity Vertical Time Dual Crosshair Differential Velocity and Differential Time The following pages describe these Note The General Cursor Mode is only available in the freeze and review spectral display windows It is not available in the real time sweeping spectral display win dow Note When multichannel spectral records are present the General Cursor Mode must be activated on an individual channel basis Activating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for the spectral displays can be switched on by 1 Right clicking in the spectral display window 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Figure 1 Recognizing the General Cursor Mode When the General Cursor Mode for a spectral display window is active the mouse pointer will change into a special cursor type pointer when the mouse is positioned in the data section of the spectral display window Depending on the type of cursor active a different mouse pointer Figure 2 will be active Selecting the Cursor Type The type of cursor can be selected by 1 Right clicking in the spectral display window 2 Clicking on the function Select Cursor Type Figure 3 3 Selecting the cursor type from the submenu Figure 4 Deactivating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for the spectral displays can be switched off
47. x ak nC OA elop Spectra Onon Astart I Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM Figure 2 Right click inside the Trend window Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 3 Click on Curve Configuration S5 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Choose the Trend curves for display and curve colors 1 Choose the trend curve you want displayed by clicking on checkmark its associated check box and then choose with which color you want the curve displayed Figure 1 Click on the next Channel tab and repeat as necessary Set the Trend curves scales 2 Click on the TCD Scale Limits tab and set the Mini mum and Maximum Y scale ranges Figure 2 Choose the external inputs to be displayed 3 Click on the External Inputs Configuration tab if available on the system and then checkmark the curves to be displayed their colors and their scale limits Figure 3 4 When finished making your selections click on OK Note Refer to section S17 in this manual for more information on using and configuring the external inputs for display in the fast curves window 5 20 Configure Trend Channel 1 Channel 2 TCD Seale Limits External Inputs r Curves p Toward p Away Systole M E
48. you have no control over the order of the prints 1 Click on Report Figure 1 and then on Graphics Report Or 1 If one of the softkeys was assigned the Graphics Report function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Or 1 Click on the Graphics Report button O00 ooo 2 On the Selection tab Figure 2 highlight the records you want to include in the report To select a string of records click on the first record hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and then click on the last record in the string The first last and all records between will be highlighted 12 8 Report Text Report Graphics Report Export SoundTrak Figure 1 Click on Report and then on Graphics Report Graphics Report Configuration Selection Print Layout Comments Snapshot Label Time Save 1 Manual 15 46 42 15 47 12 15 48 09 15 48 22 15 48 31 15 49 11 15 50 20 15 50 32 15 50 44 15 51 50 Save 3 Manual Save 4 Manual FEVER ULEULE Save 6 Manual EACE ave 6 Manual Save 9 Manual Save 10 Manual Print Save to File Cancel Figure 2 Highlight the records that you want included in the report To highlight an assortment of records hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired records Only those records you click on will be high lighted Click on the Print Layout tab Figure 1 Cli
49. 1 Position the mouse pointer inside the Doppler Parameter Box area and then click the Right mouse button Figure 2 2 Click on the Doppler Param eter Box you want to view or remove from the display and then click the Left or Right mouse button A checkmark means that Doppler parameter is currently being displayed 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as necessary Preparing the System for Diagnostics EEE 5 Sco Wo ea dR a Nessaiane rose foes et r Sanpere H WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M asin Wen Figure 1 This figure illustrates an example screen with six Doppler Parameter Boxes selected for display e kam Prooco View DoprlerGonfguaton Report Window Heb ELLENE EA 1 Vessel Label _ Probe Depth SV Power Report Pos 7 event Description Time I WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M CAstart I Nic Vue Figure 2 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair anywhere inside the Doppler Parameter Box area and then click the Right mouse button Figure 3 Using the mouse highlight the parameter you want to add to or remove from the Doppler Parameter Boxes and then click either the Left or Right mouse button S6 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Depth The Depth Parameter Box shows the distance in millimeters of the axial center sample volume from the face of the transducer
50. 2 0 Jump to Carotid Sip rather the loading the next or 27 VAPr L 2 MHzPW S1 68mm 10mm 10mm 39 Page 6 1 1 1 Start Suboccipital L gt 28 VA Di L A 6 mm n c n c Page 6 2 1 2 Follow Vertebral previous step using any of these 10mm 10mm 39 0 methods This feature lets you 130 VADLR C c Page 6 2 2 0 Follow Vertebral dreload 431 BA Pr re iC c Page 6 3 1 0 Jump to Basilar return to and reload a step or i 32 BA Di K c c Page 6 3 2 0 Follow Basilar bypass several steps See the cape Figure 1 The blue highlight was moved up two steps by pressing the examples in Figures and 2 Up Arrow button twice Method A 1 Press the Up Down Arrow Protocol List Example Protocol EME keys on the Remote Control Step Vessel Label Probe Depth SV Tx Rx Power Report Pos Saved Comment s 7 25 Ophth Pr R 2MHzPW S1 54mm 10mm 10mm 9 Page 5 1 2 Start Orbital Right until the desired step is 1 26SiphonR 16 mmn c n c Page 5 2 2 Jump to Carotid Sip highli ghted in blue 27 VAPr L 2 MHz PW S1 68mm 10mm 10mm 39 Start Suboccipital L 28 VA Di L M 6 mm n c n c Page 6 2 1 Follow Vertebral 29 VA Pr R 2 MHz PW S1 68mm 10mm 10mm 39 Page 6 1 2 Angle to Right Side 30 VA Di R y 6mm n c n c Page 6 2 2 Follow Vertebral 2 Press the Enter button The i 31 BAPr a 6mm n c n c Page 6 3 1 Jump to Basilar selected step is now the active i 32 BA Di ki 6 mm n c n c Page 6 3 2 Follow Basilar
51. Additional information about Protocols can also be found in Chapter S10 WW Loading a Protocol The Protocol Manager panel lets you choose from a list of Proto cols that can be quickly loaded onto the system for immediate use Note When the Diagnostic Acquisition mode is selected the system loads the Default Protocol automatically If the Default Protocol is the one you want to use you can skip to the next page 1 Click on the Protocol ia Manager button or Click on Protocol Figure 1 and then click on Protocol Manager 2 Either click on the desired Protocol and then click on Load or double click on the Protocol you want to load Figure 2 The Diamond symbol identi fies the current default protocol and the right pointing Arrow identifies which protocol is currently loaded on the system 3 Go to the next page Performing an Exam Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol and then on Protocol Manager Protocol Manager Example Protocol EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM Non Protocol Mode EME 03 16 00 09 58 06 AM gt Protocol 1 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM Protocol 2 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM Protocol 3 Figure 2 Click on highlight the desired Protocol and then click on Load or ju
52. AlteF system use either of the following Squelch Noise Reduction methods HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Method 1 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes i Spectra 1 Press the Probe key Figure 1 Envelope Units Display Range Meth d 2 Set Delta Mean etno Figure 1 Press the Probe key Figure 2 Click on Doppler and 1 Click on the Doppler menu then on Probe and then on Probe Figure 2 Select a new probe Select a new probe xi Method 3 probes probe check every second Available probes 2 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz Socket 1 Socket 2 Socket 1 Socket 2 button Figure 3 Click on the Socket button associated with the transducer you want to use Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III examples 1 Click on the Probe Shows the current transducer For each method continue by E EA clicking on the desired transducer s Socket button Figure 3 The currently selected transducer SS appears above the Doppler window Figure 4 Sister ME Mie Vue ME WinTCO Acquiring eoan Figure 4 The currently selected transducer is identified towards the top of the window Note This is not the preferred method of activating the transducers The efficient way is to preconfigure the various transducers in a protocol file and then select the probes by loading steps out of the protocol list The Probe key should be used only when defin
53. C Operating Conditions wwa data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt 1 H6 14 Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 8 MHz Index Label Global Maximum Index Value Assoc Acoustic Parameter Dim of Aaprt pr PllImax deq PlIImax Other Information unfocused Focal Length z IpA 3 MImax Operating Control Conditions data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 16 MHz 1 5mm diameter fone Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Aaprt lt Aaprt gt l oran aaO a a Zs E E ls pomama fo S Acoustic a a eooo oe ee Dim of Aaprt O See jo feo e EEE ESS eer f e pene ol Eere aa Other Information Focal Length o oom e C Operating Conditions wwa data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt 1 H6 16 Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Tabl
54. Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 2 Trend Window Right Click Menu XX Figure 3 Calculate VMR Cursor Mouse Pointers Roy Note There are special factory default settings files Unilateral VMR EME and Bilateral VMR EME which can be used for VMR examinations Note While the Calculate VMR mode is active the configuration functions for the trend display are disabled Note The vasomotor reactivity VMR can only be calculated from mean curves S8 63 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Using Horizontal Curve Cursors to Calculate VMR This section explains how Horizontal Curve cursors may be used to calculate the VMR Once the Calculate VMR Hori zontal Cursors Mode is activated it is possible to set either two or three cursors in one or more mean sections of the trend in a similar way to the general cursor mode explained previously The system constantly inspects the trend display to see if either 2 or 3 valid cursors for a mean curve have been set in the presently displayed trend time segment As soon as two valid Horizontal curve cursors are found in a mean curve section of the trend display the system automatically calcu lates the VMR value for the curve with the following formula VMR 100 Vhyper Vnorm Vnorm The first cursor value is the Vnorm phase baseline value The second cursor value is the Vhyper phase value The starting
55. Delete Event Figure 3 Right click Trend window menu lower section 7 33 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Ry Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Saving Custom Markers At any point when one of the event marker lists is on the screen the user has the option to enter a custom marker by selecting this choice from the list Custom markers are to be used for unexpected events which have not been preconfigured in the lists When Custom Marker is selected a pop up menu will appear Figure 1 allowing the user to type in a custom name and or marker state Once a custom marker has been saved it will appear in the list for the remainder of the examination to allow it to be used more than once Editing Event Markers It is possible to edit any saved user defined event in the event list by right clicking on the event and selecting Edit Event out of the menu Figure 2 An edit marker list will appear Figure 3 from which the user can choose a different marker or use the Edit Marker function to enter a custom marker name S7 34 It is also possible to edit any saved user defined event by right clicking on the event in a curve window Figure 4 and selecting Edit Event out of the menu Figure 5 Deleting Event Markers It is possible to delete any saved user defined event in the event list by highlighting the event and pressing the delete key or right clicking on th
56. EMC regulation standards as stated in the Regulatory Compliance H1 section of this manual This instruction manual must be adhered to in order to ensure compliance to these standards The following points are espe cially important e Only equipment supplied or recommended by the manufac turer or their authorized distributors can be connected to the system e Ensure all external connections to the non medical equipment are securely fixed paying particular attention to any securing screws or clips on the connectors e In certain circumstances e g in the vicinity of surgical di athermy equipment interfer ence signals may be heard and observed This will be obvious to the user This is common to all Doppler equipment and it is the responsibility of the user to discriminate between normal and noise signals and to ignore or delete these erroneous signals This does not represent a safety hazard and the system will recover without any operator intervention once the source of the interference has been removed H1 10 e When using the Doppler probes near to monitors keyboards etc tone lines may be observed or heard due to emissions from these devices This is not a fault with the system If this occurs move the probes away from items to avoid these problems e Ensure no mobile telephones are used near the system e If interference is a continuing problem the system should be moved to a different location
57. ES Sl aE aa SS al Figure 1 If one of the softkeys is labeled Filter Up or Filter Down click on that button or press the corresponding S key on the remote control In addition Ctrl F9 can be used to lower the filter and Shift F9 can be used to raise the filter setting Flow Flow Toward Awav ree Figure 2 Blood flow icons ease 0 FY Figure 3 Direction F4 key Turning SoundTrak on off SoundTrak allows the system to record both audio Doppler data and spectral data when snapshots are saved If SoundTrak was turned on while collecting the Doppler data the audio will be played back in sync with the spectral data You can choose to turn SoundTrak on and off at any time during the exam When SoundTrak is turned on and a Doppler display is saved to the Copy window a yellow marker is placed in the Event List and the Trend window if turned off the marker is colored green Note Turning SoundTrak on will take up more memory space for recording the audio data Make sure you have sufficient memory space available before you begin the exam and enable SoundTrak You can use any of these methods to turn SoundTrak on or off Note When the Indicator algorithm is running the SoundTrak function is turned on automatically and cannot be turned off Method 1 1 Click on the SoundTrak button Figure 1 SoundTrak is enabled when the button is depressed
58. Exact digital sound reproduction critical in evaluating suspected embolic events for all active channels simulta neously even in MDD Mode operation Now also available with the Continuous SoundTrak option enabling the recording of complete examinations eliminating the need for an external DAT recorder For complete records and sophisticated research protocols Extremely flexible with analog input amp output capabilities For more precise automated indicator of embolic signals Clinically demonstrated to be on par with the human observer Advanced multi segment vessel interrogation improved emboli indication All control functions are at the user s fingertips Improved convenience and fewer cords to tangle For convenience and flexibility Suited to individual users Preface Features and Benefits continued Features Benefits NicVue Patient administration and Allows for complete patient management from appointment schedul scheduling software ing to data archiving in an efficient flexible package One touch text and graphics e Allows fast review interpretation and documentation reports On line signal post processing e Quick on the fly adjustment for optimum signal recording for improved data presentation Powerful PC Base e Simple upgrades and Windows 2000 Windows XP compatibility Extensive user configuration e Set the system up to meet your preferences options PR vii Pioneer TC8080 and Compani
59. Figure 2 Position the mouse pointer over the displayed softkey you want to define and then click the Right mouse button Envelope Spectra On Off Units Vessel Labels Text Report Graphics Report Parameter Boxes SoundTrak Display Export SoundTrak M Mode Display Options Display Range Play SoundTrak Calculate VMR H Cursors Calculate VMR A Cursors Recal Values 2 Cursors Recal Values 3 Cursors HFE Breakpoint Noise Reduction Fast Curve Window Review Mode Figure 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected key Reviewing saved spectral snapshots Note The examples in this section mostly use the Diagnostic Review screen displays The same principles also apply for the Monitoring Review screens To select saved data for viewing Method A 1 Double click on the snapshot you want to view Figure 1 Method B 1 Double click on the desired event in the Event List Figure 2 Mon Method C 1 Double click on the desired event vertical event marker text near the top of the trend window displayed on the Monitoring Review Mode Trend Window Figure 3 Method D 1 Use the Arrow keys to select a snapshot in the Event List and then press the Enter key Note The ordering sorting of the event list can be changed by clicking on one of the column headers under its title bar Reviewing Data mesial E Bdh CH 1 S1 2 MHz PW VA Pr L Figure 1 Doub
60. Gain 17 8 Audio I O Specifications H6 6 Index 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual audio playback 17 8 Audio Playback Scale Set 17 8 audio signals 7 18 audio squelch function 7 17 audio volume S7 17 S8 25 Auto PDF Graphics Report S12 11 Auto PDF Text Report 12 11 Autoclave H5 5 automatic scale reductions 16 10 Automatically Saving PDF Reports 12 11 Average Curve cursors S8 61 Average curve cursors S8 63 average power values S16 7 axiallength S7 11 S16 10 axially centered 7 11 Back Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 H4 4 background grid S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 backgroundhiss S7 18 S8 25 background of the M Mode display S16 6 Backspace 2 7 backup media S 17 19 S17 20 baseline S 7 13 batteries H2 3 battery H1 6 Begin Logon prompt S4 3 bilateral S16 5 blood flow S7 14 Blood Flow icon S7 14 bluedot S 17 17 S17 18 blue play symbol S8 24 Boost Mode 7 19 boost mode 7 10 Boost Mode On Off 7 19 break frequency S 7 20 C C Nicolet WinTCD Settings S9 4 cable H2 6 Calculate VMR A Cursors S8 63 S8 67 Calculate VMR Average Cursors S 8 63 Calculate VMR H Cursors S8 63 S8 67 Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors S8 63 Calculating the Vasomotor Reactivity VMR 8 63 Calibrate S17 15 Calibrate the external inputs 17 15 Calibration S17 16 calibration H1 7 Capturing Screens 12 14 Care of Transducers H5 4 Cart System H5 4 Cascade S11 3 Index 2 Cascade Windows S11 3 Cas
61. III User Manual Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions You can select from a menu of options the functions of the five keys S1 S5 on the Remote Control Figure 1 These five keys allow you to quickly execute the chosen function by simply pressing the corresponding key S1 S5 on the Remote Control or by clicking on the displayed softkey Example If for example the S1 key is currently assigned to the Vessel label list function and you want to change it to Units use the Right mouse key and click on the Vessel Labels softkey and then click on Units from the options menu The first softkey S1 will now read Units and pressing the S1 key on the Remote Control will alternate the Flow Velocity Scale between cm s and kHz Note A function can not be assigned to more than one key at a time S8 6 1 Position the mouse pointer over the softkey displayed towards the bottom of the Review window Figure 2 2 Click the Right mouse button 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected softkey Figure 3 4 Repeat until all five S keys have been assigned a specific function These 5 keys correspond to the 5 softkeys on the screen display Figure 1 The softkeys displayed on the screen can be clicked on to execute the action or the corresponding S key on the remote control can be pressed to execute the action
62. If neces sary a small amount of detergent may be used e Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent Cart System e Using a soft lint free cloth moistened with a mild deter gent solution wipe all of the surfaces to remove any dust smudges or stains H5 4 Care of Transducers Transducers are particularly sensitive Please observe the following points e Do not drop or knock against a hard surface e Regularly clean off remains of contact gel e Do not immerse in fluids e Do not pull on the transducer cable lt I gt CAUTION Rough handling of the transducers probes can cause severe damage to the ceramic crystals Cleaning Standard Transducers The 1 6 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz and 8 MHz probes should be cleaned using the following procedure 1 Clean the Doppler Transducers Probes using a soft lint free cloth moistened with a mild cleaning agent Do not use solvents or alcohol Do not immerse the probes or sensors lt I gt CAUTION Do not heat or autoclave any of the standard transducers Cleaning the Microvascular Transducers The 16 MHz and 20 MHz probes should be cleaned using the following procedure 1 Clean the Microvascular Transducers Probes using a soft lint free cloth moistened with a mild cleaning agent Isopropyl alcohol and or a mild disinfectant solution may also be used to clean these transducers Cleaning the Microv
63. If you are not familiar with the Nicolet NicVue software which is used to launch various Nicolet Biomedi cal Inc software programs make sure you have the Nicolet Nic Vue User Guide on hand S4 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank page S4 2 Log on to the system Each time power is applied to the system you have to log on to the system Usually this is an auto matic process if the system is not protected by a password In the case that the system requires a password please refer to the instructions on this page to help you log on to the system These instructions have been written for the Windows 2000 operating system but the Win dows XP operating system is very similar 1 After the system finishes booting up the Begin Logon prompt appears Figure 1 2 If required simultaneously press the Ctrl Alt and Delete keys Figure 2 and then release the keys 3 After a short wait the Logon Information window appears Figure 3 Note If no password is required the system may bypass the log on procedure or if the log on window appears simply click on OK to continue and go to the next page If a password is necessary continue with step 4 Default Password is either scimed or Nicolet for the admin istrator user 4 If necessary type your name password case sensitive i e you must type your password exactly in the same upper lower case letters as when the
64. Keyboard H3 6 H4 6 Connecting the Microvascular Probes H3 9 H4 9 Connecting the Optional Analog Connection Box H3 7 H4 7 Connecting the Optional Footswitch H3 6 H3 7 H4 6 H4 7 Connecting the Pioneer TC8080 to a Network H4 7 Connecting the Pointing Device H3 6 H4 6 Connecting the Remote Hand Controller H3 6 H4 6 Connecting the Standard Transducers H3 8 H4 8 Connecting USB Peripherals H3 7 H4 7 connectors H2 7 Consumables H2 8 Continuous SoundTrak S9 3 S9 4 S16 4 S17 17 S17 20 continuous SoundTrak 8 23 14 5 17 18 S17 19 Continuous SoundTrak option PR vi continuous SoundTrak playback S8 25 Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar S8 23 S8 24 S8 26 S8 28 Control Buttons 3 1 convolution S7 11 copy backup files 12 1 Copy Config 12 1 Copy Window S5 14 S6 16 S7 23 Copyright protection PR iii COS S8 31 Cranial Bone Thermal Index TIC H1 9 S5 11 S6 12 Create a New Protocol 10 3 Index Create a New Setting S9 3 S16 4 Create the protocol step S10 6 Creating a new color M Mode Settings file S16 4 Creating a new default Protocol S10 14 Creating a new default Settings file S9 5 Creating a new Protocol 10 3 Creating a new Settings file S9 3 S9 4 Creating Audio I O Settings S17 4 Creating Continuous SoundTrak Settings Files 17 17 Creating Curve I O Settings 17 10 Creating Files Containing Continuous SoundTrak Dat 17 18 crystal H2 6 Ctrl Fl S7 9 S7 14 S16 10 Ctrl F11l S16 12 Ctrl F2 S7 8 S8 3
65. Mean Ctrl D Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on Vessel Labels EENI iw Dopplr Contiguration indenters Report Window Holp PS FE a dda oS SS al Sl Vessel Labels Figure 2 If for example the S1 key is labeled Vessel Label you can either click on the Vessel labels key or press the S1 Key on the remote control MCA R MCA ACA R ACA R PCA R PCA P1 R PCA P2 R PCoA R ICAR ACoA Ophth Pr R Ophth Di R Siphon R Vertebral R PICA R BA Pr BA Di Genu R Supraclinoid R Parasellar R Edit Label Unknown MCA L MCA ACA L ACAL PCAL PCA P1 L PCA P2 L PCoA L ICAL ACoA Ophth Pr L Ophth Di L Siphon L Vertebral L PICA L BA Pr BA Di Genu L Supraclinoid L Parasellar L Figure 3 Vessel Labels Ch 1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA R ese eM ara __SoundTrak wot aan ven a a Figure 4 The selected vessel label appears on the screen Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Customizing the window sizes You can resize the various windows on the screen display by using the mouse and the Splitter Bars This allows you to increase the display area of a particular window to enhance your ability to inspect it s contents 1 Click on and hold down the mouse button on the Splitter Bar 2 Drag the mouse until the desired window size is reached and then rel
66. Move Down 8 When the list s is finished press OK to save the changes Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on Configuration and then on User Definable Items User Definable Items ix S Event Markers l Event Markers Analog Curve Inputs Curve Name Units Min Scale Max Scale co2 Vol 0 10 Remove BP mmHg 0 1000 Add Edi Move Up Move Down Pek Ok Figure 2 User Definable Items dialog box analog curve input tab Analog Curve Inputs Curve Name and Units Min Scale Max Scale bP hm Figure 3 Analog Curve Inputs Toggling the Fast Curves Window In order to configure and calibrate the analog curve inputs the Fast Curves window must be displayed in the acquire mode In order to activate the fast curves window in the acquire mode the following methods can be used Method 1 1 Click on the View menu Figure 1 2 Click on Fast Curve Window When this function is selected it will be checked in the menu and the Fast Curves window should be shown When this function is not selected it will not be checked in the menu and the Fast Curves window should not be shown Method 2 1 Configure an S key with the function Fast Curve Window 2 Click o
67. S5 15 S7 33 S8 55 ser Defined Events S5 14 ser Defnable Items 17 12 ser Maintenance Companion IM H5 6 ser Maintenance Pioneer TC8080 H5 6 ser Defined Settings button S5 3 S5 7 sing Average Curve Cursors to Calculate VMR S8 65 sing Horizontal Curve Cursors to Calculate VMR S8 64 sing the External Inputs and Outputs S 17 1 sing the General Cursor Mode Curve Displays S8 57 sing the Playback Mode S17 8 sing the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors Mode S8 17 sing the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors Mode S8 18 sing the Record Mode S17 7 sing the remote control S 2 8 S2 9 sing the touchscreen display S 2 4 ac Facacseaqadcad a Cee Ce Ga Gee Gee ee ers Eee es V V 0 S8 12 vasomotor reactivity 8 63 velocity S8 10 S8 11 S8 12 S8 58 S8 60 Vertical Curve cursors S8 60 vertical height S16 9 Vertical Scale Accuracy H6 23 Index 12 Vertical Time cursors S8 11 Vessel label S6 18 Vessel Labels 5 7 S6 10 Vesselname S10 6 Vessel name show S10 6 Vesselonly 10 6 VGA monitor H3 7 H4 7 Viewing Multiple Window Screen Displays S11 1 Viewing the Advanced H LT S Information 8 29 Viewing the Spectra S7 21 S7 26 VMR S8 63 voltage S17 16 voltage outputs 17 7 Voltage Selector Switch H5 6 volume 7 17 Volumeknob S7 17 S8 25 W wall filter S7 14 Warranty PR ii WAV files S12 12 12 13 Weights Specifications H6 7 What is WinTCD S1 3 window key S16 8 Working With Curve Cursors 8 62 Wor
68. Scale key Figure 1 to adjust the displayed depth scale range You may also use Ctrl F2 to decrease or Shift F2 to increase the scale setting Increasing the scale setting increases the range of depths shown in the display Decreasing the scale setting decreases the range of depths shown in the display The depth range scale for the M Mode display is adjustable in steps of 1 mm The minimum scale range is 10 mm The maximum scale range is 100 mm Using the Color M Mode Display Set the M Mode depth scale offset zero The starting depth upper display limit in the M Mode display is adjustable You can change the offset to shift the M Mode data up and down in the display When the M Mode display is highlighted focussed use the Zero key Figure 2 to adjust the displayed depth scale offset You may also use Ctrl F3 to decrease or Shift F3 to increase the scale offset Increasing the zero setting moves the M Mode data up in the display Decreasing the zero setting moves the M Mode data down in the display The depth scale offset for the M Mode display is adjustable in steps of 1 mm The upper display minimum depth value in the scale is 10 mm The lower display maximum depth value in the scale is 160 mm gt amp amp amp E g g g g D Gb SNE pant MUTE amp PROBE DRECTON DELETE WnOOW MENU i lt gt DEPTH SCALE ESCAPE ENTER y S
69. Size Limitation v Auto PDF Text Report v Auto PDF Graphics Report Software License Upgrade Figure 1 Click on Configuration System and then on Software License Upgrade Software License Upgrade Menu Currently Licensed Options New License Options Options Standard Diagnostic One Channel Monitoring Two Channel Monitoring Four Channel Monitoring Advanced HITS Detection Microvascular Option M Mode Display Continuous SoundTrak US Version Manufacturing Mode System Volume Number 68bc7b11 System Type Pioneer Ill Permanent Not Available pam 4 a 6FCBD182CF74BJ45 00000 A 00A A 0000 00000 Time Remaining License Date License String License Valid _Cancel_ Figure 2 Enter the new license code and when finished click on Load Pioneer III system example 14 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Use the Infrared Remote Control There are two types of remote control options for the system The standard version is a hardwired remote The second version is an infrared model If the infrared remote control is used it needs to be activated by using the procedure below 1 Click on Configuration and move to System Figure 1 2 Click on Use Internal IR Remote A checkmark should appear indicating that the infrared remote has been activated Online Probe Test There is an extra function built into the system to consistently check if the transducer
70. Spectral data is easier to inspect Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically v 1 Acquiring data for Doe John D Figure 3 Click on Window and then on Move Horizontal Splitter or Move Vertical Splitter S6 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Choose the Vessel Labels You can label the Doppler window with the corresponding vessel label which then will remain permanently with the spectral display Method 1 1 Click on Doppler Figure 1 2 Click on Vessel Labels 3 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 Method 2 1 If a softkey is labeled Vessel Labels click on that softkey Figure 2 or press the corre sponding S key on the remote control 2 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 Method 3 1 Click on the Show Vessel Labels List button 2 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 S6 10 Save Spectral Snapshot FA Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on Vessel Labels Vessel Labels MCAR MC
71. The individual functions are the same Note The infrared remote control should be pointed toward the IR receiver window at the top center of the front of the Companion III system or next to the Pioneer label on the TC8080 system in order for it to work effectively Common Hardware Components S1 2 3 s4 5 dD ae B SAVE FREEZE PRINT MUTE PROBE DIRECTION DELETE WINDOW SAMPLE AMPLITUDE DEPTH SCALE ESCAPE ENTER Figure 1 The remote control Note Please refer to the Safety Summary Chapter H1 concerning precautions using the infrared remote Note With normal use the batteries for the infrared remote should last for about one year When the remote no longer operates the system or operating range reduces replace both batteries with new IEC LR03 AAA Alkaline Manganese batteries To replace the batteries remove the four screws at the back of the remote remove the batteries from the holder and replace with new batteries Be sure to fit the batteries the correct way around Refit the rear cover and tighten the four screws e Don t leave flat batteries in the remote control e Always replace both batteries at the same time e In the case of battery leakage clean the battery holder and replace the old batteries with new e Dispose of batteries carefully in accordance with local regulations e Remove batteries if equipment is not likely to be used for a
72. The touchscreen display H2 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Available Transducers The following optional transduc ers are supported by the systems e 1 6 MHz PW Monitoring e 2 MHz PW Monitoring e 2 MHz PW Handheld e 4 MHz PW CW Extracranial e 8 MHz PW CW Extracranial e 16 MHz PW Microvascular e 20 MHz PW Microvascular These are shown in the Figures on this page Note Only the 2 MHz transduc ers are available with two differ ent sizes of crystals 10mm and 15mm The part descriptions contain the crystal width Please keep in mind that the crystal width is not the same as the probe housing diameter The probe housing diameter will always be greater Note The microvascular trans ducers are available with two different diameters 1 5 and 2 mm In this case the diameter refers to the probe housing diameter and not the crystal size H2 6 Figure 1 Transcranial Monitoring Transducer 1 6 or 2 MHz PW Figure 2 Transcranial Handheld Transducer 2 MHz PW Figure 3 Extracranial Transducer 4 MHz PW CW Figure 4 Extracranial Transducer 8 MHz PW CW Figure 5 Microvascular Transducer 16 or 20 MHz PW Note The transcranial monitoring transducers have a removable handle which can be used to simulate a standard diagnostic handheld transducer Note Certain transducers are also available with a longer 4 8 m cable instead of the standard 2 5 m cable Refer to the Optional Acces
73. Thermal Circuit Breaker 6 Isolated Power Output Voltage Selector Switch H4 4 7 Pointing Device Socket amp Keyboard Socket 9 RJ 45 Network Socket 10 2 USB Sockets ll 25 Way Parallel Printer Socket 12 VGA Monitor Signal Socket 13 RS 232 Serial Port Socket 14 Line In Socket 15 Line Audio Out Socket connect to 17 only 16 Microphone In Socket 17 Line Audio In Socket connect to 15 only 18 Line Audio Out Socket 19 Analog Inputs Socket 20 Analog Outputs Socket 2 Cooling Fan Exhaust Vents Pioneer TC8080 System Figure 2 Front Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 22 Stereo Headphone Socket 23 Hard Disk Activity Indicator 24 IrDA Window 25 Loudspeakers 26 Transducer Probe Sockets 27 Spare 514 Drive Bays 28 CD Writer Rewriter 29 3 2 Floppy Disk Drive 30 Power Mains Switch H4 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Connecting Accessories To guarantee the highest level of safety only accessories that have approval to EN 60601 1 and are CE marked in accordance with the Medical Devices Directive 93 42 EEC should be connected to the Pioneer TC8080 Connection of the Pioneer TC8080 to any mains powered electrical accessories must be in accordance with IEC 601 1 1 2000 This standard describes the safety requirements for medical electrical systems to provide protection to the patient the operator and the surroundings For safety reasons accessories must not be
74. To set the softkey functions see Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions in Chapter SS NY Performing an Exam BEE anoe View Doppler Contguraton n Indicators Report Window ae Triste it IT CAstart M Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM sel Lab _SoundTrakOwon Envelope Spectraonon CAstart I Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring o Figure 2 Position the mouse button over the Units softkey and then click the Left mouse button or press the corresponding S Key on the remote control S7 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the flow velocity scale Multiple scale settings are available In Multichannel Monitoring all spectral channels must have the same scale setting You can change the scale to adjust the displayed velocity range of the Doppler signal It is recommended the lowest scale setting is used to accommodate the full velocity range of the signal Use the Scale key Figure 1 to adjust the displayed velocity scale You may also use Ctrl F2 to decrease or Shift F2 to increase the scale setting The current power level is displayed in the Doppler box labeled Power The higher the scale setting the higher the pulse repetition frequency number of pulses per second and conse quently the higher the ultrasound output More pulses per second is equivalent to a higher power
75. Toggle scale sharing Continued on the next page S8 26 S8 27 S8 28 S8 29 S8 29 S8 29 S8 29 S8 30 S8 30 S8 31 S8 32 S8 33 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 36 S8 36 S8 37 S8 37 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 39 S8 39 S8 40 S8 41 S8 41 S8 41 S8 42 S8 42 S8 42 Table of Contents cont Reviewing Data Toggle background grid Choosing the trend curves time scale display Jumping to the end start of the trend data Scrolling through the trend data Zooming in on the trend data Unzooming the trend display eo fast curve data Monitoring Mode Only Saving the fast curve configuration Configure the fast curve display Choose the fast curves for display and curve colors Set the fast curve scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the fast curve display options Choose which events will be displayed Toggle scale sharing Toggle background grid Choosing the fast curves time scale display Moving fast curve data to end start of the trend data Scrolling through the fast curves data Zooming in on the fast curves display Unzooming the fast curves display Mon Bala Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Saving Custom Markers Editing Event Markers Deleting Event Markers mon leg the general cursor mode curve displays Activating the general cursor mode Recognizing the general cursor mode Selecting the cu
76. Vertical Curve Cursors Vertical Curve cursors are multiple value cursors which display the value for each of the curves in the display at the particular time point of interest The measurements are made with respect to the 0 scale references as was done with the Horizontal Curve cursors Figure 1 The Vertical Curve cursors may be set by Method 1 1 Selecting the Vertical Curve cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Positioning the mouse pointer on the time position and then clicking the Left mouse button Method 2 1 Selecting the Vertical Curve cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Clicking and holding down the Left mouse button over the curve data then dragging the vertical cursor line to a new position and releasing the button on the point of interest The line is drawn at the particular time point and the values are displayed using the curve colors Figure 2 S8 60 13 00 00 13 06 00 Figure 1 Vertical Curve cursor measurements are made with respect to the 0 references Trend Window 13 06 00 Figure 2 This example shows a single Vertical Curve cursor Setting Average Curve Cursors Average Curve cursors are multiple value cursors which display an average value for each of the curves in the display between two time points of interest The measurements are made with respect to the 0 scale r
77. a f a perform the following steps to r Select for save 7 Print step in report complete the task All Params Page Row Column ORel Depth a al 1 Click on the Vessel name and O Vessel only side dialog box to view a list of Save Step Cancel Vessel names and then click on the desired vessel Figure 1 Figure 1 Make your selections on the Add Insert New Step panel and then click on Save Step 2 Select the side Left Right or Viasys WinTCD Diagnostic Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 1 of 2 Viasys WinTCD Monitoring Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 1 of 2 Patient Name Doe John Q Hospital Hospital X Patient Name Doe John Q Hospital Hospital X None o ag Sa E Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Exam time 19 01 00 10 25 07 Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Exam time 19 01 00 10 25 07 3 If desired type in any com ToL Column 1 Column 2 ments CCA CW 1 53 Row 1 Row 1 Wia 2 MHz Temporal velocities in cm s 4 If you want to include the step Column 1 Column 2 in your report Figure 3 click Row 2 Row 2 on checkmark the Print step in report check window Column 1 Column 2 i Row 3 Row 3 5 Choose whether you want to Comment tres Comment tet save All Parameters Relative the line Depth or Vessel only by clicking on the option s radio Figure 2 Text report page Figure 3 Gr
78. all three can be used for certain operations For example alphanumeric entries must by typed in via the keyboard and certain softkey commands can only be entered via the keyboard or remote control S2 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 2 2 Mouse commands Your system can be controlled using a mouse There are however some functions which can only be accessed by the remote control or the keyboard Note If you use the mouse you still must use the keyboard to type in characters and numbers Moving the mouse pointer Lay the mouse on the mouse pad or your work station When directed to move the mouse pointer to a specific object on the screen this action is often referred to as click on simply drag the mouse in the appropriate direction to steer the pointer on the screen Figure 1 Example To move the pointer upwards on the screen slide the mouse away from you To move it toward the left side of the screen slide the mouse towards your left Note On certain systems a trackball built into the keyboard may be provided as a pointing device instead of a mouse In order to steer the pointer on the screen just roll the ball with your finger in the desired direction The two keys next to the trackball are the equivalent of the left and right mouse buttons Selecting an option with the mouse 1 Move the mouse pointer over the desired function Click means to quic
79. and or away from the transducer The Envelope option cycles the display of the envelope curve between the following options e Upper envelope curve on e Lower envelope curve on e Both envelope curves on e Both envelope curves off The calculations displayed in the Parameter boxes change accord ingly while they are calculated from the envelope curves Use any of these methods to turn on or off the envelope option a Press the F6 key on the keyboard b Click on the softkey labeled Envelope at the bottom of the screen display c Press the softkey S1 S5 on the remote control which corresponds with the softkey labeled Envelope d Click on Doppler and then on Envelope e Click on the Switch Displayed Envelopes Ea button Figure 1 Sweep key Ctrl F8 Shift F8 sf Te leale eka S Pf aa Figure 2 Click on the softkey labeled Envelope press the corresponding remote control S Key or press the F6 key Note If both envelope curves are switched off for a particular record the system will display and print a for all envelope related values Adjust the gain The Gain box shows the amplifi cation of the received Doppler signal Use the Gain key Figure 1 to change the amplification of the received Doppler signal to obtain a more clearly defined spectrum Set the gain so that
80. and the PRF scale set is also saved See Using the Play back Mode later in this chapter g Settings Manager x 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 1 Channel EME 1 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 1x2 MD HITS EME gt 1x4 MD HITS EME 2 Channel EME 2 Channel HITS EME 2 Channel Record 2x2 MD HITS EME 4 Channel EME 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM Load Save Delete Figure 1 Settings Manager with color coded record and playback files Protocol Manager Name Time Example Protocol EME 03 16 00 09 Non Protocol Mode EME 03 16 00 gt Protocol 1 03 17 00 Protocol 2 03 17 00 Protocol 3 Temporal Record Occipital Record Load Save Rename Delete Figure 2 Protocol Manager with color coded record files Using the Record Mode When a record configuration file is loaded the program sets up the system to route the appropriate audio signals to the configured output channels on the analog connection box This is indicated to the user through the use of a small indication symbol red dot next to speaker added to the spectral displays which are being recorded Figure 1 Note Since it is not a requirement to always record all Doppler channels some spectral displays may not have the record symbol In the record mode all Doppler functions maintain the same functionality The user can perform a standard acquisition examination and all the Doppler activity for the configured channe
81. and then firmly insert the connector until it is properly seated lt gt CAUTION To avoid damage to the trans ducer grasp the connector by the Red Dot and pull straight out when disconnecting a transducer from the system Connect Pioneer transducer s Up to four transducer s can be connected to the ports on the front of the processor Match the Red Dots on the transducer and system connec tor Figure 2 and then firmly insert the connector until it is properly seated lt gt CAUTION To avoid damage to the trans ducer grasp the connector by the Red Dot and pull straight out when disconnecting a transducer from the system Performing an Exam Red dot Figure 1 Align the Red Dots before inserting the connector into the Companion III system Figure 2 Align the Red Dots before inserting the connector into the Pioneer TC8080 system S7 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Ry Load the channel settings Monitoring mode only Note The procedures on this page are for the Monitoring Mode only not the Diagnostic Mode When switching into the monitor ing acquire mode the system automatically loads a default setting If the default Settings file is not the file you wish to use during the examination perform either of the following procedures to select a different Settings file To Create a New Settings file create a New Default Settings file De
82. be displayed This lets you in effect compress the data thus allowing you to view a longer record of the Trend data Figure 1 The time scale options offered on the menu depends on the record length of the Trend data If e g there is less than 20 minutes of data then the 20 minutes or greater options will not appear on the menu Method 1 1 Right click inside the Trend window Figure 2 2 Click on the desired time scale Figure 3 Method 2 1 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend Figure 4 2 Click on the desired time scale Figure 5 Reviewing Data Trend Window j TE Figure 1 The effects of increasing the time scale from 5 minutes to 10 minutes The lower example now displays a record length of Curve data two times longer than the upper example NA Figure 2 Right click inside the Trend window Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 3 Click on the desired time scale Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 4 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam
83. by 1 Right clicking in the spectral display window 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Off Figure 3 Reviewing Data Recal Values 2 Cursors Recal Values 3 Cursors General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 1 Spectral Window Right Click Menu O OR RR Rey Figure 2 Various Spectral Cursor Mouse Pointers General Cursors Off Select Cursor Type gt Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Figure 3 General Cursor Mode Right Click Menu Horizontal Velocity Cursor Vertical Time Cursor Dual Crosshair Cursor Differential Velocity Cursor Differential Time Cursor Figure 4 Cursor Type Menu Note See also the sections on Recalculating Values which follow the General Cursor Mode sections for information on a special type of cursor mode which allows the automatically calcu lated Mean Sys Dia PI and RI values in the parameter boxes to be manually calculated by setting horizontal cursors S8 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Setting Horizontal Velocity Cursors Jaj am Vow Dormer Coniguraten Report Window Pep EAA E bH Horizontal Velocity cursors are P AP single line measurements which i are made with respect to the V 0 reference Figure 1 The Spectral Horizontal Velocity cursors may be set to measu
84. connected to the same mains socket e g via a multi socket adapter as the Pioneer TC8080 Connection to mains powered electrical accessories that are not approved to EN 60601 1 will require additional protective earthing An isolation transformer may also be required IEC 601 1 1 provides examples for various combinations of medical electrical equipment and non medical electrical equipment When accessory devices have been connected another safety check of the device combination will be necessary H4 6 Connecting the Keyboard The keyboard should be con nected to the 6 way miniature DIN socket on the rear panel of the Pioneer TC8080 socket 8 Connecting the Pointing Device The pointing device mouse or track ball should be connected to the 6 way miniature DIN socket on the rear panel of the Pioneer TC8080 socket 7 Connecting an External Printer The printer interface connector is a Centronics SPP 25 way standard D type socket fitted to the rear panel connector 11 Connection to the external printer is via a 25 way parallel cable Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance The printer should be powered from one of the power outlets 3 on the TC8080 Connecting the Optional Footswitch An optional footswitch may be connected to the Pioneer TC8080 Connect the footswitch to the RS
85. display window 2 Clicking on the function Recal Values 2 Cursors Off Figure 1 Method B 1 Clicking on the s key function Recal Values 2 Cursors Recal Values 2 Cursors Off Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Reviewing Data Deactivating the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors Mode The Recalculate Values 3 Cursors Mode for the spectral display can be switched off by Method A 1 Right clicking in the spectral display window 2 Clicking on the function Recal Values 3 Cursors Off Figure 2 Method B 1 Clicking on the s key function Recal Values 3 Cursors Recal Values 3 Cursors Off Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Figure 1 Recalculate Values 2 Cursors Mode Right Click Menu Figure 2 Recalculate Values 3 Cursors Mode Right Click Menu S8 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Deleting a Spectral snapshot If you no longer need a Spectral snapshot it can be deleted from the hard drive O CAUTION Deleted Spectral snapshots cannot be recovered after they have been deleted Make sure you select the correct snapshot before it is deleted Method 1 1 Using the Right mouse button click in either the Copy Window or the Event List on the Spectral snapshot you want to delete Figure 1 2 Click on Delete Event Figure
86. fault in the instrument then Servicing will be required Service must be exclusively carried out by the authorised distributor Nicolet Vascular Inc A Subsidiary of VIASYS Healthcare 5225 Verona Road Building 2 Madison WI 53711 USA US Toll Free 1 800 525 2519 US Toll 1 608 441 2266 US FAX 1608 441 2232 Or the manufacturer SciMed Ltd Unit 5 Avon Business Park Lodge Causeway Fishponds Bristol BS16 3JP United Kingdom Tel 44 0 117 958 3754 Fax 44 0 117 958 4089 or persons explicitly authorized by the above If unauthorized persons attempt service then all responsibility passes to the customer and all warranties become void H5 8 Chapter H6 Technical Specification PC Specifications H6 3 This chapter provides technical specifications for both the Pioneer Doppler Specifications H6 3 TC8080 and Companion II systems Inputs Outputs Specifications H6 5 Analog Audio I O Specifications H6 6 System Feature Specifications H6 6 Regulatory Compliance Specifications H6 6 Environmental Requirements Specifications H6 7 Measurements and Weights Specifications H6 7 Mains Supply Specifications H6 7 Fuse Rating Specifications H6 7 Acoustic Output Specifications H6 8 Measurement Uncertainties H6 8 1 6 MHz 15mm PW Output Table H6 9 2 MHz 10mm PW Output Table H6 10 2 MHz 15mm PW Output Table H6 11 4 MHz PW Output Table H6 12 4 MHz CW Output Table H6 13 8 MHz PW Output Table
87. few extra capabilities and more room for expansion The Companion III system provides the portability but is subsequently limited in capabili ties and future expansion The following sections describe the individual system features providing information on the system specific features Companion Ill System Design The Nicolet EME Companion III is a completely self contained truly portable Transcranial TCD extracranial and peripheral vascular Doppler system that quickly goes where your practice needs it Office Clinic Hospital or Home System Specific Features e Portable system with integrated TFT Display for mobile applications e Touchscreen display for faster simpler on the spot operation e Two integrated transducer sockets allowing up to two probes to be used simulta neously e Integrated medical grade power supply to allow portable examinations to save the data without the need for an additional isolation trans former Preface Pioneer TC8080 System Design The Nicolet EME Pioneer TC8080 is the flagship Transcranial TCD extracranial and peripheral vascular Doppler system that is intended for the non portable vascular lab or clinical environment looking for high end performance System Specific Features e Desktop system with external high resolution monitor or TFT Display e Optional laboratory cart e Four integrated transducer sockets allowing up to four pro
88. inputs refer to the next section Defining Analog Curve Input Signals c02 BP Off Figure 1 User defined analog curve inputs Env CH1A Env CH1B Env CH1C Env CH1D Env CH1A Env CH1B Env CH1C Env CH1D Off Figure 2 Available analog curve output signals 1x4 MD Monitoring S17 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Defining Analog Curve Input Signals In order to create the list of available signals for the analog inputs the following steps should be used 1 Select the User Definable Items menu point out of the Configuration menu Figure 1 2 Click on the analog curve inputs tab Figure 2 3 Click on the Add button to add a new analog curve name to the bottom of the list The Analog Curve Inputs dialog Figure 3 will pop up allowing a new curve name units minimum scale and maximum scale to be entered Type in a new name select the units type in the scale limits and then press OK 4 In order to insert a curve name click on a line in the list and then select the Insert function to insert a new curve name below the selected line 5 In order to edit a curve name click on the line in the list and then select the Edit function 6 In order to delete a curve name click on the line in the list and then select the Remove function 17 12 7 In order to move a curve name up or down click on the line in the list and then select either Move Up or
89. is measured for TIB Z is axial distance at which TIB is a maximum G e A p cm d Equivalent beam diameter as a function of axial distance z and is equal to A IT CW I RCD where L Di is the temporal average intensity as a function of z cm f Center frequency MHz PD Pulse Duration us PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency p PII Peak rarefactional pressure where free field spatial peal pulse intensity integral is a maximum megapascals spa Derated spatial peak pulse average intensity W cm FL Focal Length or aximuthal and elevational lengths if different cm ROC Radius Of Curvature cm d PIr Equivalent beam diameter where free field spatial peak pulse intensity integral is maximum cm Figure 1 Symbols Used and Their Definitions Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 1 6 MHz 15mm diameter Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW non scan non scan Aaprt lt 1 Aaprt gt l Nn ioe STE I Index Label z scan Global Maximum Index Value q Acoustic en o Dim of Aaprt fe Information Focal Length ny unfocused unfocused Operating Conditions data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 100 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pioneer TC8080 an
90. of the transducer The data shown in the spectral display is a mix of all the signals coming from inside the sample volume e g If the depth is set to 40 mm and the total sample volume length is 16 mm then the signals seen in the display are coming from the depth range 32 48 mm The sample volume is axially centered at the depth setting The total sample volume length is equal to the sum of the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time The signals coming from depths closer to the displayed depth setting are weighted stronger than those near the edges of the sample volume In our example signals near 40 mm depth will be strong in the display but those near 32 or 48 mm depth will be weak Figure 1 graphically shows this weight ing Performing an Exam S Rx S y O Signal Strength in Sample Volume Depth 0 8 16 24 32 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 Figure 1 Normal Mode Example TX RX Linkage On TX 8mm RX 8mm and Depth 40mm oo Rx ee O Depth 0 8 16 24 32 Signal Strength in Sample Volume 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 Figure 2 TX RX Linkage Off TX 4mm RX 8mm and Depth 40mm In the linked mode of operation Figure 1 the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time are set to equal lengths 8 mm each for optimal Doppler signal noise ratio The true axial length of the sample volume is a convo lution of these two times As one can see the axial sample volume length ranges from 32 48
91. on the arrow and choosing them out of the list Figure 1 4 Choose the curve scale limits by setting the Minimum and Maximum Y scale ranges Figure 1 5 Calibrate the curves if neces sary using the procedure on this page 6 When finished making your selections click on OK lt T gt CAUTION Always ensure that the analog curve input signals have been properly calibrated before saving examination data Do not ignore the warning messages whioh occur when proper calibration values do not exist for the curves Using the External Inputs and Outputs Calibrate the external inputs 1 Click on the Calibrate button Figure 1 for the curve input to be calibrated 2 A pop up dialog box as shown in Figure 2 appears Set the external device to output a known value usually the minimum scale value and then select the corresponding true scale value in the lower scale section of the dialog box Click on the Assign Lower Value button to set the value 3 Set the external device to output a known value usually the maximum scale value and then select the corresponding true scale value in the upper scale section of the dialog box Click on the Assign Upper Value button to set the value 4 Confirm this dialog by clicking on the OK button The software will automatically calibrate the input by calculat ing the gain and offset needed so the analog input matches the scale appropriately Note The calibr
92. only the speci fied fuses are used IEC 127 Sheet III Refer to the Techni cal Specification in Chapter H6 for the correct rating The system is not designed for use in areas with high relative humidity Because of the restricted protection against drops and splashes of water the system should not be set up where this is likely to occur e g under infusion stands etc H1 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual I WARNING When using an Isobox isolation Transformer ensure that the voltage selector on the Isobox is set to the correct voltage before connection If an Isobox isolation trans former is not available for connecting a mains powered accessory the system may NOT be used The system is designed for use in medical areas only It must not be used in areas where there is a danger of explosion such as near flammable anaesthetic gases This equipment is not protected against defibrillation Remove the patient to system connection prior to defibrillation If defibrillation is applied to the patient while connected to the system damage may occur Test system leakage current after defibrillation The system should never be placed directly on the floor H1 6 D WARNING When using the 16 and 20 MHz microvascular probes with the system refer to chapter H5 for important safety and cleansing sterilizing procedures The 16 and 20 MHz probes are not sterile as supplied Before usin
93. or keyboard and then press the Enter button when finished Splitting the windows vertically 1 Click on Window and then on Move Vertical Splitter Figure 3 Either a drag the mouse until the windows are sized as desired and then click the mouse button or b press the Left Right Arrow buttons on either the Remote Control or keyboard and then press the Enter button when finished Preparing the System for Monitoring ajx Exam ee View en ese TET Report Window Help 14 WE eA CH1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA R Splitter Bar Cursor E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M CAstart M Nic Vue Figure 1 Example screen display before resizing the Trend or Doe John D e x m TE jew Jer onfiguration Indicators Report Window Help Eea aa ace E hal Vaal Window Splitter Bar Cursor Envelope Umts Specta e Parameter Boxe E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M CAstart M Nic Vue Figure 2 Example screen display after the Trend was enlarged Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically v 1 Acquiring data for Doe John D Figure 3 Click on Window and then on Move Horizontal Splitter S5 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manua
94. or analog information Trend Window Displays long term monitoring curves of designated Doppler parameters and or analog information Window Size Button Exit Window Button Reduce the size of the Close the window Exit the window Restore the window winTCD program to its original size Speaker Mute Click on to mute speaker shows mute status Copy Window Displays the saved Doppler screens captured when the Save key on the Remote Control or F1 on the key board is pressed to resave Parameter Boxes Shows the current Doppler parameters To choose from a menu of 13 options click the Right mouse button anywhere inside this area Event List Lists events saved records etc that occurred during the exam Softkey Status Bar Identifies the function of the softkeys on the remote control To change softkey functions click the Right mouse button on the soft key to view a menu Message Bar Provides information to the user Intensity Scale dB Signal intensity can range from 0 to 64 dBs 3 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Menus Exam Doppler Patient Database Ctrl D Create a New Setting v Toolbar a ie create i z reeze Spectral Snapsho Exit ae A pocel sea D Print Spectral Window Ctrl P aye SS Color M Mode Palette Toggle PW CW Petaun v Fast Curve Window Settings Manager Curve Recording SoundTrak
95. or measures should be under taken to resolve the source of the interference by the user If none of these measures resolve the problem contact the manufacturer or their autho rized distributors Chapter H2 Common Hardware Components Remote Hand Controller H2 3 This chapter provides information concerning the various compo Infrared Remote Control H2 3 nents and accessories available as standard or optional with the Footswitch H2 4 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems Keyboard H2 4 Pointing Devices H2 5 Transducers H2 6 Analog Connection Box H2 7 Printers H2 8 Headphones H2 8 Consumables H2 8 Standard Pioneer Accessories H2 8 Standard Companion Accessories H2 8 Optional Accessories H2 9 Information in this chapter is subject to change without notice H2 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H2 2 Remote Hand Controller The system may be supplied with a multifunctional remote hand controller See Figure 1 The hand controller has five user assignable function keys S1 to S5 All of the other functions of the hand controller are marked on the hand controller itself The individual functions of the hand controller are described in chapters S2 and S3 in this manual Infrared Remote Control The system is also supplied Infrared remote control ready The optional infrared remote control looks and works in the same manner as the plug in type
96. point will not be functional Please consult your local Nicolet distributor for information on upgrading your system hardware Figure 1 Analog Connection Box lt gt WARNING On both systems when a DAT recorder is used to record or playback Doppler audio data it must be powered through the main system s isolated power sockets Pioneer only or via the portable Isobox isolation Transformer both systems The DAT recorder must meet the standard relevant to your country IEC 60065 2001 BS EN 60065 2002 UL 60065 2003 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60065 03 IEC 60950 1 2002 BSEN 60950 2002 UL 60950 1 2002 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60950 1 03 On the Pioneer TC8080 sytem the total power consumption from both mains outlets should not exceed 150VA When using an Isobox isolation Transformer ensure that the voltage selector on the Isobox is set to the correct voltage before connection If an Isobox isolation trans former is not available for connecting a mains powered accessory the system may NOT be used 17 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Creating Audio I O Settings Before the audio inputs and outputs can be used special record and playback settings need to be created There are no sample factory default settings since most likely users will want to convert their own customized settings into either record or playback settings Use the following steps to create either record or pl
97. points you want to measure and then holding down the Left mouse button Figure 1 3 Dragging the mouse until the highlighted box is over the second point and then releasing the mouse button Figure 1 A sideways H Bar appears between the two points and the differential velocity V1 V2 value is displayed Figure 2 Reviewing Data D R g diagnostic data for Jo Sx View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help Cursor N Or e Units _vessettabets J CAMStart M Nic Vue ted I WinTCD Reviewing 9 09 AM Figure 1 Click on the first point and hold down the mouse button while dragging the cursor over the second point and then release the mouse button V1 Velocity v1 v2 v2 Freeze Protocol Step 1 CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PY VA Pr L E 50 aL Bios i i Bin a JE 1 SV SYS 50 1 2 18 PI DIA SES eS eS Se See Vessel Labels a Spectra On Off Figure 2 This example illustrates a differential velocity cursor S8 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Setting Differential Time Hea for fon Corks Rope coe fo Cursors Differential Time cursors are single value cursors which measure the time difference Cursor L between any two points on the Spectra This method is very l N 25 useful when making duration measurements The Spectral Differential Time cursors may be set to measure the relative time differenc
98. press the corresponding soft key S1 S5 on the Remote Control To set the softkey func tions see Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions in Chapter S5 WY Intermittent Curve recordings You can set up the system to record Curve data at predeter mined intervals automatically This feature helps reduce the size of your Curve data files 1 Click on Configuration Figure 2 2 Click on Intermittent Curve Recording 3 Select how long a duration you want recordings to last Figure 3 4 Select how long you want the system to wait between recordings 5 Click on OK The system automatically begins the intermittent recordings and Curve Recording Auto is entered in the Event List Turning Intermittent Curve recordings off 1 If the system is in the BRE recording interval click REC on the Curve Recording on off button Curve record ing off appears in the Event List 2 Ifthe system is in the BRE nonrecording interval REC click on the Curve Recording on off button two times Curve recording on and then Curve recording off appear in the Event List Performing an Exam Note When Curve saving is on all curves for each channel are saved not just those displayed In the Review mode the other curves can be configured for display and then they will appear Doppler Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Tog
99. probes Be aware of the Depth and Image gate settings at all times for optimum and accurate results 6 If you are unfamiliar with microvascular Doppler and the benefits of the Pulsed Wave Doppler Modality Nicolet recommends the text Intraop erative Doppler Sonography in Neurosurgery by Joachim M Gilsbach Published by Springer Verlag Wien New York ISBN 3 213 81768 9 and ISBN 0 387 81768 9 7 Although the 16 and 20 MHz probes are small flexible and durable to allow use with common surgical tools care should be taken not to pinch or severely bend the probe cable damage can result Some users have found it convenient to thread the transducer into a suction device e g 9 Fujita Sucker adhering the tip with bone wax Microvascular Option Note The microvascular trans ducers are only supported in the software when there is a valid Microvascular license installed in the system New systems sold with the microvascular probes and preamps will contain the license If a system is later upgraded with the microvascular probes and preamps a new license will be needed In the case where the probes are tried without a license an error message will appear and not allow the probes to be activated Contact Nicolet or your local Nicolet distributor for a new license containing the microvas cular option 15 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 15 4 Chapter S16 Using the Col
100. recalculate values 2 cursors mode Deactivating the recalculate values 3 cursors mode Deleting a spectral snapshot Editing a spectral snapshot Replaying SoundTrak data Continued on the next page S8 5 S8 6 S8 7 S8 8 88 9 88 9 88 9 S8 9 88 9 S8 10 S8 11 S8 12 S8 13 S8 14 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 16 S8 16 S8 16 S8 17 S8 18 S8 19 S8 19 S8 19 S8 20 S8 21 S8 22 This chapter describes how to review data which was collected during an exam e Saved Spectra Snapshots Trend Data e Fast Curve Data H I T S Data e Continuous SoundTrak Data Note Some information in this chapter applies to reviewing Monitoring data only These topics will be identified with the Mon Only flag shown in the legend below Likewise subjects that apply only to Diagnostic data will be identified with the Dia Only flag Also for subjects that apply to both the Diagnostic and Monitoring Review modes one or the other will be used for the illustrations Both will be shown only if necessary for clarity E If you need help using the keyboard commands Alt letter see Chapter S2 in this guide Legends Mey Designates Diagnostic UNE Mode only Designates Monitoring Mode only S8 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont S8 2 Reviewing Continuous SoundTrak Data Replaying Continuous SoundTrak Data S8 23 S8 24 Al
101. report for the saved spectral displays and whether you 7 Click on the Color or want color or gray scale prints Click on OK when finished Grayscale radio button accordingly for the type of printout you want 8 Checkmark the Left Right exchange box in the text report section of the display to configure the text report to print left side vessels on the right side of the report printout and visa versa Leaving this box unchecked will print left side vessels on the left side of the report printout and right side vessels on the right side of the report printout 9 Click on OK 10 12 Saving the edited Protocol After you have finished editing the Protocol you can choose to overwrite the original Protocol with the edited one or create an entirely new Protocol and leave the original Protocol intact Protocol files are appended with da3 da7 Pioneer or da5 da8 Companion automatically Table 1 shows which elements are Overwriting the original Protocol 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Save Creating a new Protocol 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Save As Creating Diagnostic Protocols Note If the existing protocol file is a Read Only file you cannot overwrite the file The system will force you to save the protocol under another name 3 Type in the new Protocol file name Figure 2 4 Click on OK saved to the Common Settings Complete Steps Relative
102. soft key to view a menu Protocol List Displays a list of protocol steps from which you can choose by clicking on the Next Step Previous Step SaveGoNext PrintGoNext buttons on the Softkey Status Bar You can also quickly choose a step by double clicking on the desired step Intensity Scale dB Signal intensity can range from 0 to 64 dBs Exit Window Button Close the window Exit the WinTCD program Speaker Mute Click on to mute speaker SS mute status SS copy Window ERT S1 2e Pw r Displays the saved Doppler screens captured when the Save key on the Remote Control or F1 on the key board is pressed Parameter Boxes Shows the current Doppler parameters To choose from a menu of 12 options click the Right mouse button anywhere inside this area Event List Lists events that occurred during the exam Message Bar Provides information to the user 3 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Menus Exam View Patient Database Ctrl D Create a New Protocol v Toolbar Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Save Spectral Palette Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Exit Save As Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Set as Default Probe F10 Load Default SoundTrak Save Step Settings Boost Mode Next Step Flow Separation Ctri Alt F Previous Step Squelch Save Go Next Noise Reduction Print Go Next HFE Mode Ctrl H Protocol
103. specific autoclave unit being used Remove the transducer from the autoclave and cool to room temperature lt T gt CAUTION Refer to the documentation and instructions that accompany the microvascular pod and transduc ers for additional cleaning and sterilising information Durability of Probes The sterilization procedures recommended will not affect the performance of the probes However the frequent washing and handling will increase the likelihood of damage Conse quently the recommendation is a maximum of 20 washing steriliza tion cycles after which the probe must be replaced lt gt WARNING Any transducer that shows signs of damage should be replaced immediately DO NOT USE transducers with cracked or exposed parts or bare wires Patient safety will be compro mised lt I gt CAUTION Use only Nicolet approved supplied electrodes and transduc ers See your Nicolet distributor or call in the USA Use of non approved electrodes or transduc ers might adversely affect the function of your system D WARNING The preceding instructions are subject to change without notice Always follow the specific procedures that accom panied the parts e g microvas cular probes your institution s guidelines for cleaning disin fecting and sterilizing parts and the instructions from the manufacturer of the sterilizing unit However the probe sterilization temperature must NEVER exceed the va
104. step Figure 2 After pressing the Enter key the step that was selected in Figure I became the Active step Method B 1 Press the Up Down Arrow keys on the keyboard until the desired step is highlighted in blue 2 Press the Enter button The selected step is now the active step Method C 1 Double click on the desired step The selected step is now the active step S7 37 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page S7 38 Chapter S8 Reviewing the Data Start the program and open a file for review Set the remote control S1 S5 key functions Reviewing saved spectral snapshots Resizing the windows Using the general cursor mode spectral displays Activating the general cursor mode Recognizing the general cursor mode Selecting the cursor type Deactivating the general cursor mode Setting horizontal velocity cursors Setting vertical time cursors Setting dual crosshair cursors Setting differential velocity cursors Setting differential time cursors Working with spectral cursors Moving cursors Resizing cursors Deleting individual cursors Deleting all cursors Saving cursors Displaying cursor units Clearing cursor background Hiding cursors Manually recalculating values Activating the recalculate values mode Recognizing the recalculate values mode Using the recalculate values 2 cursors mode Using the recalculate values 3 cursors mode Saving recalculated values Deactivating the
105. system Table of Contents Labels and Symbols Back Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 Front Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 Connecting Accessories Connecting the Keyboard Connecting the Pointing Device Connecting an External Printer Connecting the Optional Footswitch Connecting the Remote Hand Controller Connecting a Set of Headphones Connecting USB Peripherals Connecting the Companion II to a Network Connecting an External VGA Monitor Connecting Serial Devices Connecting Optional Analog Connection Box Connecting an External DAT Recorder Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System Assembling the System Mains Power Supply Apply Power to the Pioneer TC8080 System H4 3 H4 4 H4 5 H4 6 H4 6 H4 6 H4 6 H4 6 H4 6 H4 7 H4 7 H4 7 H4 7 H4 7 H4 7 H4 7 H4 8 H4 9 H4 10 H4 12 H4 12 TOC iii Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter H5 Care and Maintenance of the Equipment This chapter provides information concerning the care and mainte nance of the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems TOC iv Cleaning the Equipment Keyboard Mouse SVGA Monitor Printer Pioneer TC8080 Base Unit Companion III Systen Box Touch Screen Monitor Cart System Care of Transducers Cleaning Standard Transducers Cleaning the Microvascular Transducers Cleaning the Microvascular Pods Sterilizing 16 MHz and 20 MHz Probes Durability of Probes
106. the Doppler color You can choose to view the displayed Doppler spectrum either in color or grayscale 1 Click on View Figure 1 2 Click on Spectral Palette 3 Click on either Color Grayscale or on Color Mode 2 as desired Figure 2 5 22 v Toolbar Spectral Palette gt Color M Mode Palette p v Fast Curve Window Figure 1 Click on View and then on Spectral Palette Spectral Palette La Color Color M Mode Palette gt Grayscale v Fast Curve Window Color Mode 2 Figure 2 Click on Color Grayscale or on Color Mode 2 as desired The current selection will appear grayed on the menu Chapter S6 Preparing the System for Diagnostics Choose the diagnostic mode protocol S6 3 This chapter describes how to Activate the transducer s S6 4 setup the basic screen displays for Diagnostic acquisitions For Set the screen display S6 5 Monitoring preparations please Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions S6 6 return to the previous chapter Set the Footswitch functions S6 7 Customizing the window sizes S6 8 Also included in this chapter are Splitting the windows horizontally S6 9 instructions for saving parameter Splitting the windows vertically S6 9 setting changes permanently with Choose the Vessel Labels S6 10 the active step in the protocol Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display S6 11 Depth S6 12 SV Sample Volume Length S6 12 Gain S6 12 Filter S6 12 Ampl Amplitude
107. the bearings and rubber rollers e Refitting is the reverse of removal SVGA Monitor e Clean the cabinet panel and controls with a soft cloth moistened with a mild deter gent solution e Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent Printer e Use a soft cloth moistened with water to wipe dust smudges and stains off the exterior case e Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent Pioneer TC8080 Base Unit e Using a soft lint free cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution gently wipe the exterior surfaces of the base unit Take great care to allow no liquid ingress into any of the connectors on the rear panel or the disk drive CD RW connectors and power switch on the front panel e Using a soft brush remove any dust from the fan grilles located on the rear panel H5 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Companion III System Box e Using a soft lint free cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution gently wipe the exterior surfaces of the base unit excluding the touch screen monitor Take great care to allow no liquid ingress into any of the connectors or power socket switch on the rear panel or the disk drive CD RW and connectors on the side panel e Using a soft brush remove any dust from the fan grilles located on the rear panel Touch Screen Monitor e Wipe the screen lightly with a soft lint free cloth
108. the envelope curve closely outlines the Doppler waveform Figure 2 When the gain is correctly adjusted there should be no extreme peaks or troughs in the envelopes The gain can range from 5 to 255 As you change the gain the current gain is displayed in the Doppler box labeled Gain if selected for display O g FREEZE ETON WINDOW MENU Figure 1 Gain key Ctrl F4 Shift F4 Gain set properly Gain too low Gain too high Figure 2 Examples of Gain settings Note In the freeze and review windows the gain key adjusts the software gain setting which shifts the signal strength up and down the color scale to allow fine adjustments in a post processing mode The dB values in the color scale are adjusted appropriately Performing an Exam Adjust the zero baseline Sometimes when the Doppler signal has a high peak it will be cut off and a portion of the peak will appear at the bottom of the Doppler window known as aliasing Signals below the Zero line will be cut off and displayed at the top of the screen Use the Zero key Figure 3 to display the entire Doppler signal You may also use Ctrl F3 to lower or Shift F3 to raise the zero baseline on the screen display The zero baseline will move towards the top or bottom of the window Figure 3 Zero key Ctrl F3
109. the procedure on this page Note The event markers lists are used for all examinations and cannot be configured differently for different user defined settings Preparing the System for Monitoring Method 1 1 Click on Configuration Figure 1 N Click on User Definable Items Figure 1 W Click on either S Event Markers or I Event Mark ers Figures 2 and 3 4 Click on the Add button to add a new marker name to the bottom of the list The User Defined Marker dialog Figure 4 will pop up allowing a new marker name and or state to be entered Type in a new name and for the I Markers select the state and then press OK Nn In order to insert a marker click on a line in the list and then select the Insert function to insert a new marker below the selected line Oo In order to edit a marker click on the line in the list and then select the Edit function In order to delete a marker click on the line in the list and then select the Remove function co In order to move a marker up or down click on the line in the list and then select either Move Up or Move Down Ke When the list s is finished press OK to save the changes Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on Configur
110. the sample volume depth Adjust the sample volume length Sample volume clarification Original hardware MK2 hardware Technical description of the sample volume Adjust the sweep speed Turn on the envelope Adjust the gain Adjust the zero baseline Set the filter Set the direction of blood flow Turning SoundTrak on off Turning the speaker on off Adjusting the audio volume Activating the audio flow separation Activating the audio squelch function Toggling the audio noise reduction Toggling the Boost mode level Toggling the high frequency enhance Setting the HFE breakpoint Viewing the Spectra Continued on next page S7 3 S7 4 S7 5 S7 6 S7 6 S7 6 S7 7 S7 8 S7 8 S7 9 S7 9 S7 10 S7 10 S7 10 S7 11 S7 12 S7 12 S7 13 S7 13 S7 14 S7 14 S7 15 S7 16 S7 17 S7 17 S7 17 S7 18 S7 19 S7 20 S7 20 S7 21 Chapter S7 Performing an Exam continued Table of Contents Saving spectral snapshots The copy window Freezing the display Enlarging a Frozen window Moving a Frozen window Reading calculations from the Parameter boxes Setting the Delta Mean 100 reference level Mean Mean Velocity Sys Systolic RI Resistance Index Dia Diastolic PI Pulsatility Index D Mean Delta Mean Reading the intensity scale Adjusting the intensity scale Turning Curve recordings on off Monitoring Mode only Intermittent Curve recordings Turning Intermittent Curve recordings o
111. time point of the cursors is used to decide which cursor is first If a third valid Horizontal cursor is set in a mean curve section of the trend display the system calculates the VMR value with the following formula VMR 100 Vhyper Vhypo Vnorm The first cursor value is the Vnorm phase baseline value The second cursor value is the Vhyper phase value The third cursor value is S8 64 Trend Window 13 00 00 Figure 1 Calculating VMR using three Horizontal Curve cursors for each mean curve the Vhypo phase value The system displays the VMR values for each mean curve in the top left of the trend display as a percent as shown in Figure using the same color as the curve Depending on whether the 2 or 3 cursor method was used the text is VMR2 or VMR3 Note For information on how to set Horizontal Curve cursors please refer to the section Setting Horizontal Curve Cursors Note See Section Description of Calculate VMR Mode for more detailed information on the functionality of the Calculate VMR mode Note The Horizontal Curve cursors do not take into account the actual curve values These cursors are purely display level values which the user eyeballs to the correct position The Horizon tal Curve cursors are saved along with the individual display curve and therefore can only be set when the curve display is config ured for separate scales See Configuring Separate Scales Using A
112. to indicate that it is the active channel The M Mode display window s is not a stand alone window and therefore its size cannot be adjusted independently from the spectral windows The small spectral control windows only have depth and mean parameter boxes and cannot be configured Only the parameter boxes in the large spectral display s can be configured and these are saved in the settings file Using the Color M Mode Display A R CH 1A 51 2 Mhz PW MCA R CH 1D 61 2 Mhz PW MCA K Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 52mm 84mm Depth q 30 1A 0 a 1B 50 0 30 bea tim teas et 1 Color Doppler M Mode Display 4 Chan Depth Range 62mm 74mm Dept T 50 60 Color Doppler M Mode Display 4 Chan Depth Range 60mm 72mm Deptt 50 60 Figure 2 Bilateral Setting with Color M Mode display S16 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Color M Mode display window The scale on the left side of the display is a depth scale to show the ranges of the different M Mode channel bands The bands are defined with their associated depth setting in the middle of the band e g If the first spectral display has a depth of 50mm with a sample volume length of 10mm the first band starts at 45mm and ends at 55mm The M Mode data is color coded and displayed to the right of the depth scale using a dB scale See section Color M Mode Image To the right
113. to the snapshot Alternatively you can click on Doppler and then on Save Spectral Snapshot or click on the Save Snapshot button nha KA Method 2 1 Double click on the next snapshot you want to edit You will be asked if you want to save the changes you made to the edited snapshot Click on Yes Figure 3 Method 3 1 In the Event List double click or click on and then press Enter on the event you want to edit Figure 4 You will be asked if you want to save the changes you made to the edited snapshot Click on Yes Figure 3 Reviewing Data Figure 1 Right click on the Snapshot you want to edit Edit Event Delete Event Show Advanced H I T S Information Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 2 Click Edit Event WinTCD J The current snapshot has been modified save changes Yes No Cancel Figure 3 If you used method 2 click on Yes when the above query appears on the screen display E n Asen Ene vo ea Woo eero Figure 4 Double click on the desired event S8 21 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Replaying SoundTrak data If spectral snapshots are saved with the SoundTrak function turned on then the audio data for the spectral sweep can be listened to in the post processing mode Each time a spectral snapshot is read in the SoundTrak data will be played back and a sweeping line will indicate the position in the spectra
114. type of signal the calibration often needs to be done for each device Create different settings for each type of external device and properly save tha calibration in the setting At the beginning of each examination select the appro priate setting which corre sponds with the device S17 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual External Curve Output Calibration The external analog curve outputs are calibrated in a fixed way Every 100 cm sec 1 V on the output signal An envelope point at 50 cm sec would therefore produce an output voltage of 0 5V If the flow is toward the probe the voltage is positive If the flow is away from the probe the voltage is negative When the system has curve signals assigned to analog outputs the signals are sent from the analog in out board to the assigned channels on the analog connection box at the sample rate of the spectral columns The faster the spectral sweep speed the higher the sample rate on the outputs S17 16 Sample Rates Analog Outputs The sample rate for the external analog curve outputs is dependent on the spectral sweep speed This can be adjusted using the Sweep key on the remote control The sample rate can be calculated by taking the number of full seconds in the sweep time and dividing this number by 500 to get the column rate in ms Then divide 1 by the column rate to get the sample rate The highest sample rate is obtained
115. up in the M Mode display Decreasing the software gain weakens the signal readjust the colors down in the M Mode display The dB numbers in the scales are adjusted accordingly The upper and lower limits for the dB values are approximately the same as the spectral displays When adjustments are made to the M Mode GB scale this does not affect the spectral displays m Sa o SAVE FREEZE PRINT e amp e PROBE DIRECTION DELETE SAMPLE ZERO 5 AMPLITUDE SWEEP DEPTH A Figure 1 Gain key Ctrl F4 Shift F4 ce 16 12 Adjust the M Mode color display range When the M Mode display is highlighted focussed it is possible to adjust the color display range software gain range for the M Mode display by using the Display Range s key There are six hard coded ranges available to toggle through similar to the Display Range function for the spectral displays The upper and lower limits dB values for the color scale are altered each time the display range is toggled Depending on the signal strength and noise level of the Doppler spectral channels the different ranges will provide different results for the display quality In addition you may also use Ctrl F11 to decrease or Shift F11 to increase the display range in 1 dB steps Inverting the color M Mode velocity scale When the M Mode display is highlight
116. 0 S8 50 S8 50 S8 50 S8 51 S8 52 S8 53 S8 54 S8 54 S8 55 S8 56 S8 56 S8 56 S8 56 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 58 S8 59 S8 60 S8 61 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 Table of Contents Saving cursors S8 62 Chapter S 8 Clearing cursor background S8 62 Hiding cursors S8 62 Reviewing the Data Calculating the vasomotor reactivity VMR M Only S8 63 ulati v vity Only continued Activating the calculate VMR mode S8 63 Recognizing the calculate VMR mode S8 63 Using horizontal curve cursors to calculate VMR S8 64 Using average curve cursors to calculate VMR S8 65 Description of calculate VMR mode S8 66 Documenting the VMR results S8 67 Deactivating the calculate VMR horiz cursors mode S8 67 Deactivating the calculate VMR average cursors mode S8 67 TOC xv Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S9 Creating Monitoring Settings Files This chapter describes how to create a new Settings file delete an existing Settings file create a new default Settings file and rename a Settings file Chapter S10 Creating Diagnostic Protocols This chapter describes how to create new Diagnostic protocols which then can be selected to quickly set up your system for Diagnostic acquisitions TOC xvi Creating a new Settings file Assign the probe s and channel s Set the parameters and window sizes Creating a new default Settings file Renaming a Settings file
117. 0 08 56 11 AM Protocol 3 Load Rename Figure 2 Click on the Protocol file you want to rename and then click on Rename Enter new name Figure 3 Type in the new name and then click on OK Return to Figure 2 and click on Exit 10 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Deleting a Protocol file If you no longer need a Protocol file and wish to delete it you can use either of the following methods to delete that Protocol file lt gt CAUTION Make sure you choose the correct Protocol file for deletion Once it has been deleted it can not be recovered unless it was backed up on a separate storage device Note You cannot delete factory supplied Protocols Read Only Protocols or Default Protocol files without confirming the action one additional time Note Refer to Chapter S12 in this guide for information on backing up and restoring configuration files S10 16 Method 1 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 and then on Protocol Man ager Or 1 Click on the Protocol Manager button 2 Click on the Protocol file you want to delete and then click on Delete Figure 2 3 Click on OK Figure 3 4 Click on Exit Figure 2 Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol and then
118. 0 references Trend Window 13 00 00 Figure 2 This example shows a single Horizontal Curve cursor Note The Horizontal Curve cursors do not take into account the actual curve values These cursors are purely display level values which the user eyeballs to the correct position The Horizontal Curve cursors are saved along with the individual display curve and therefore can only be set when the curve display is configured for separate scales See Config uring Separate Scales Setting Differential Time Cursors Differential Time cursors are single value cursors which measure the time difference between any two points in either the trend or fast curves window Figure 2 This method is very useful when making time delay or duration measurements The Differential Time cursors may be set by 1 Clicking on the first of two points you want to measure and then holding down the Left mouse button Figure 1 2 Dragging the mouse until the highlighted box is over the second point and then releasing the mouse button Figure 1 An H Bar appears between the two points and the differential time value is displayed Figure 2 The units of measure for the differential time values are in minutes for the trend display and seconds for the fast curves display Reviewing Data Click and drag to create a box Figure 2 Trend Display Differential Time Cursor S8 59 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Setting
119. 1 S5 11 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 13 S5 14 S5 14 S5 15 This chapter describes how to set up the basic screen displays for Monitoring acquisitions For Diagnostic acquisition prepara tions see the next Chapter For more detailed information concerning the creation of new custom settings files which take advantage of audio inputs and outputs Continuous SoundTrak MDD Mode and FFT resolution issues refer to sections S9 S16 and S17 in this manual S5 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont 5 2 Set the Trend window Choose the Trend window curves Systole Diastole Mean PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index H LT S Choose the Trend curves for display and curve colors Set the Trend curves scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the Trend display options Choose which events will be displayed Toggle scale sharing Toggle background grid Set the Doppler color S5 16 S5 17 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 20 S5 20 S5 20 S5 21 S5 21 S5 21 S5 21 S5 22 Choose the monitoring mode settings When switching into the monitor ing acquire mode the system automatically loads a default setting If the default Settings file is not the file you wish to use during the examination perform either of the following procedures to select a different Settings file Note If the current Settings file is t
120. 1 S8 33 S16 9 Ctrl F3 S7 13 S8 25 S16 9 Ctrl F4 S8 25 S16 12 Ctrl F5 S7 8 Ctrl F6 S7 9 S16 10 Ctrl F8 S7 12 S8 25 S8 33 Ctrl F9 S7 14 Ctrl Alt and Delete keys 84 3 Cursor bar S6 19 cursors S8 9 S8 57 curvecolors S5 20 S8 41 S8 49 S17 15 Curve Configuration S5 19 S8 40 S8 48 S17 13 S17 14 Curve Cursor Mouse Pointers S8 57 curve cursors S8 62 curve inputs S17 10 Curve Recording 7 29 Curve Recording On Off 7 29 S7 31 Curve Recording on off S7 29 curve saving S17 18 curve signals S17 9 Custom Marker S7 34 S8 56 CustomerResponsibility PR iv PR viii Customizing the window sizes S5 8 S6 8 D D Mean S5 10 S5 12 S6 11 S6 13 S7 27 dark gray S16 6 DAT Digital Audio Tape 17 3 DATrecorder H2 7 H3 7 H4 7 S8 26 data saving off S17 19 dB numbers S16 12 dB values S7 13 S7 28 S8 25 Deactivate Calculate VMR Average Cursors Mode S8 67 Deactivate Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Mode S8 67 Deactivating the General Cursor Mode S8 9 S8 38 S8 57 Deactivating the Recal Values 2 Cursor Mode S8 19 Deactivating the Recal Values 3 Cursor Mode S8 19 Dec TX Pulse Width S7 10 default Protocol S10 14 default Settings file S9 5 Index 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Default Zoom Box Positions 8 35 defibrillation H1 6 Defining Analog Curve Input Signals 17 12 S17 13 Delete S9 7 S10 16 Delete All Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Delete Event 7 34 S8 20 S8 56
121. 1 S8 42 S8 50 Save Go Next 7 36 Save key 7 22 Save Snapshot S8 21 Save Spectral Snapshot S8 21 S16 17 Save Step Settings S6 20 S10 8 Save the active spectral display load next step S 7 36 Save to File 12 5 12 7 12 9 12 10 Savedcolumn S6 19 saved spectral record S 8 28 saved spectral snapshots S8 7 Saving Cursors S8 15 S8 62 Saving Custom Markers S7 34 S8 56 Saving Default Zoom Box Position for Saved Record S8 35 Saving Differential Time Cursors S8 37 S8 59 Saving Doppler DSP changes to the active Protocol S6 20 Saving Event Markers S7 33 S8 55 Saving Recalculated Values S8 18 S8 19 Saving Spectral Snapshots 7 22 7 23 Saving the Fast Curve configuration S8 47 Saving the spectral M Mode display 16 17 Index 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Saving the Trend configuration S 8 30 S8 31 S8 39 Scale H1 8 S7 8 S8 31 S16 9 scale S17 8 Scale Flow Velocity Scale 7 8 Scale key S7 8 Scale Limits 5 20 S8 41 S8 49 Scale Sharing S5 21 8 42 S8 50 SciMed Ltd H1 3 H5 8 Screen S3 1 Screen Control Buttons S3 1 Screen dumps 12 14 Scrolling through the Trend data S8 45 S8 53 Search probe at any available port S10 4 S10 11 Select Cursor Type S8 57 Select for save S10 6 select the probes S6 4 select the spectral channel S 16 8 Selected zoom not supported for Trend data S8 46 Selecting a cascaded window for viewing S11 4 Selecting a different probe 10 8 Selecting a
122. 1 1 1 2000 This standard describes the safety requirements for medical electri cal systems to provide protection to the patient the operator and the surroundings For safety reasons accessories must not be connected to the same mains socket e g via a multi socket adapter as the Compan ion III Connection to mains powered electrical accessories that are not approved to EN 60601 1 will require additional protective earthing An isolation transformer may also be required IEC 601 1 1 provides examples for various combinations of medical electrical equipment and non medical electrical equipment When accessory devices have been connected another safety check of the device combination will be necessary H3 6 Connecting the Keyboard The keyboard should be con nected to the 6 way miniature DIN socket on the rear panel of the Companion III socket 2 Connecting the Pointing Device The pointing device mouse or track ball should be connected to the 6 way miniature DIN socket on the rear panel of the Compan ion III socket 1 Connecting an External Printer The printer interface connector is a Centronics SPP 25 way standard D type socket fitted to the rear panel connector 7 Connection to the external printer is via a 25 way parallel cable Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance C
123. 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Go to Exam Begin or Go to Exam End Scrolling through the Trend data When the Trend data record is longer than the width of the Trend window some of the data can not be viewed If this happens use either of the methods below to scroll the off screen data back into view Note When scrolling through the Trend data think of the window as sliding left or right while the data remains stationary Figure 1 Note You can also scroll through the Trend data while recording Doppler during an exam Method 1 1 Click on the Left Scroll button Figure 2 to move the Trend window to the left or click on the Right Scroll button to move the Trend window to the right Method 2 1 Focus the Trend window 2 Press the Left or Right Arrow button on the remote control to scroll through the Trend data Figure 3 Method 3 1 Press the Left or Right Arrow button on the keyboard to scroll through the Trend data Reviewing Data Texan View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help EEE EEEN E EET start MI Nic Vue I WinTCD Reviewing SOAM Figure 1 Use the Scroll buttons to bring off screen Trend data back into view Left Right Figure 2 Click on the Left Scroll or Right Scroll button
124. 12 Envelope option 7 12 Environmental Requirements Specifications H6 7 Esckey S2 5 Event List box 5 14 Event Marker Configuration 5 20 S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 event markers S5 15 S7 33 S8 55 Eventtypes S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 events S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 Exam Info S 13 4 S17 18 Exam Information S13 4 examination file sizes 814 5 S17 19 examination techniques S1 3 Export 12 13 Export SoundTrak 12 12 Exporting Reports to PDF 12 10 Exporting SoundTrak data S 12 12 S12 13 12 14 External Connections 17 4 S17 10 S17 17 external connections 17 5 External Curve Output Calibration 17 16 External Inputs S5 20 S17 15 external inputs S8 41 S8 49 F Fl S7 22 S16 17 F2 S16 16 F2key S7 24 S7 25 F4 S16 12 F6 S16 13 Fokey S7 12 F8key S7 7 Fast Curve data S8 47 Fast Curve display S8 48 Fast Curve Window S17 13 Fast Curves for display S8 49 Fast Curves scales S8 49 Fast Curves time scale display 8 51 fast forward gt gt symbol S8 26 faster spectral sweep speeds S9 3 S16 4 features S1 3 Features and Benefits PR vi fetaluse H1 6 FFT Resolution 10 4 S10 11 FFT resolution H6 23 S9 3 S16 4 File size S17 20 file size S17 19 file size indicator S17 19 File Size Limitation Menu S14 5 Filter S5 11 S6 11 S6 12 filter S7 14 Filter Down S7 14 Filter Up S7 14 finger S2 4 Flow Away Only S16 13 flow direction H3 7 H4 7 S16 16 S17 5 flow direction coding 16 13 Flow Separation 7 17
125. 16 15 Introduction S1 1 invert S17 5 Inverting the color M Mode velocity scale S16 12 IR Remote S14 4 Isobox H1 4 Items not covered by warranty PR ii Index 6 J jets S7 18 JPG S12 14 Jumping the Time Position for C S Playback S8 27 Jumping to the end start of the Trend data S8 44 K Keeping Track of File Size 17 19 Keyboard H2 4 H5 3 keyboard H2 5 H3 6 H4 6 H5 6 Keyboard commands S2 5 keyboard does not work H5 7 kHz S7 7 kilohertz S7 7 L Labels and Symbols H3 3 H4 3 Layout Matrix S10 5 S10 12 S12 9 leakage current H1 6 leakage currents H1 5 LED Light Emitting Diode H1 4 Left Scroll S8 45 S8 53 Left right arrows S2 7 levels of protection H1 9 license 87 30 S15 3 license code 814 3 light blue color line S8 23 Limit of warranty PR ii Link Channels in MD Mode S7 6 linked mode S7 11 Load S9 3 S16 4 Load Default S10 14 Load the channel settings Monitoring mode S7 4 Load the next previous step S7 36 Loading a Protocol S6 17 S7 35 Loading a step manually 7 37 Loading color M Mode settings S16 3 Loading Settings and Protocols 17 6 Loading the default Protocol S10 14 Log on to the system S4 3 low level signals S7 14 lower scale 17 15 Lowering the filter 7 14 M M Mode S7 4 S8 5 M Mode Color Display Range S16 16 16 18 M Mode color scale S16 6 M Mode Depth Range Scale 16 16 S16 18 M Mode Depth Scale Offset S16 16 S16 18 M Mode display S8 30 M Mode Display Enh
126. 16 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Creating a new color M Mode Settings file A Settings file contains various default settings which when selected automatically sets the previously defined system parameters This helps reduce the amount of setup time Note Transducers must be attached to the system in order to create settings Assign the probe s and channel s Use this procedure to assign connected probes to the intended channel s 1 Click on Settings Figure 1 2 Click on Create a New Setting 3 Select 8 depths for one probe or four depths for two probes Figure 2 accordingly by clicking the small up down arrows S16 4 4 Choose the FFT resolution Figure 2 by clicking on one of the three radio buttons The FFT resolution defines the number of vertical points bins in the spectral display The higher the FFT resolution the finer the frequency resolution of each bin will be In multi channel applications a lower FFT resolution will allow faster spectral sweep speeds 5 Ensure that the M Mode display is enabled by checking the box Figure 2 6 Click on Load Figure 2 Note A channel selection can be deselected by clicking on the Disable button Create a New Setting Result of settings and probe check Setting OK Channels 1 Current assignment of available probes b Ch 2 Ch 1 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 Depths H Disable FFT Resolution O64 O128
127. 16 MHz 2 0mm PW Output Table 20 MHz 1 5mm PW Output Table 20 MHz 2 0mm PW Output Table Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 Format Accuracy of Values Specifications Vertical Scale Accuracy Horizontal Scale Accuracy Accuracy of Values Tables Table of Contents H6 3 H6 3 H6 5 H6 6 H6 6 H6 6 H6 7 H6 7 H6 7 H6 7 H6 8 H6 8 H6 9 H6 10 H6 11 H6 12 H6 13 H6 14 H6 15 H6 16 H6 17 H6 18 H6 19 H6 20 H6 23 H6 23 H6 24 H6 25 TOC v Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S1 Introduction to WinTCD This chapter provides a basic introduction to the WinTCD software package which is used on both the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems Chapter S2 Entering Commands This chapter describes the various methods of entering commands to your system TOC vi What is WinTCD Performing Doppler Examinations Mouse commands Moving the mouse pointer Selecting an option with the mouse Using the touchscreen display Keyboard commands Underlined letter commands Pull down menu selections Entering text using the keyboard Text edit command keys Entering text using the mouse and keyboard Using the remote control Using the footswitch Resizing a window Moving a window Maximizing a window S2 3 S2 3 S2 3 S2 4 S2 5 S2 5 S2 6 S2 7 S2 7 S2 7 S2 8 S2 9 S2 10 S2 10 S2 10 Chapter S3 Summaries This chapter contains brief summaries of the various screen
128. 2 3 Click on OK Figure 3 Method 2 1 In the Event List click on highlight the record you want to delete Figure 1 and then press the Delete key on the Remote Control 2 Click on OK Figure 3 S8 20 HEO bM CH 1 S1 2 MHz PW VA Pr L Copy window Event List Figure 1 Click on the Snapshot or Event you want to delete Edit Event Delete Event Show Advanced I T S Information Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 2 Click on Delete Event WinTCD Are you sure Deleted data will be irretrievable OK Cancel Figure 3 Click on OK Editing a Spectral snapshot This function has the same effect as post processing which allows you to change the gain zero line vessel label and direction as well as adding time and velocity measurements to the snapshot 1 Using the Right mouse button click on the Spectral snapshot in the Copy Window or Event List you want to edit Figure 1 2 Click on Edit Event Figure 2 3 Edit and perform the measure ments as desired 4 Continue with one of the following methods Note Spectral Snapshots can also be edited whenever they are loaded for review in both the acquire review mode and the true review mode Refer to Chapter S7 of this manual for a description of the post processing functions Method 1 1 Press the F1 key on your keyboard or the Save key on your remote control to store your changes
129. 2 MB DIMM RAM 120 GB fixed hard disk storage minimum 1 44 MB HD floppy disk storage Internal DVD RW Drive Medical grade ATX 200W PSU 1 6MHz 2MHz 4MHz and 8MHz transducer probe frequencies 16MHz and 20MHz Microvas cular transducer probe frequencies available via isolation pod 64 128 or 256 point FFT High resolution FFT frequency spectrum analysis with up to 64 levels of color display H6 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Doppler Specifications Continued H6 4 Companion III System Real time maximum frequency envelope Frequency response 75 Hz to 32 kHz Wall Filter 75 Hz to 600 Hz switchable Selectable sweep rates 1 sec to 41 sec depending on the number of channels displayed Acoustic reproduction of the Doppler signals via two broadband loudspeakers or optional stereo headphones flow separated or non direc tional Noise reduction toggle for high sound quality Squelch gel mute control Boost control 2 or 3 levels Up to 8 depths on any channel Up to 2 transducers probes running simultaneously Fixed single frequency operation at any one time Pioneer TC8080 System Real time maximum frequency envelope Frequency response 75 Hz to 32 kHz Wall Filter 75 Hz to 600 Hz switchable Selectable sweep rates sec to 41 sec depending on the number of channels displayed Acoustic reproduction of the Doppler signals via tw
130. 232 Serial Interface Socket socket 13 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Please note that use of the footswitch precludes the use of other serial accessories Connecting the Remote Hand Controller Connect the Remote Hand Controller to the RS 232 Serial connector socket 13 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Please note that use of the remote hand controller precludes the use of other serial accessories Connecting a set of Headphones Use stereo headphones with a 3 5mm 3 pole stereo Jack plug The connector socket 22 is on the rear of the Pioneer TC8080 The internal speakers will be automatically disconnected The audio signals can now be heard via the headphones Connecting USB Peripherals Two USB compatible peripherals may be connected to the USB ports sockets 10 on the back panel Connecting the Pioneer TC8080 to a Network It is possible to connect the Pioneer TC8080 to a network Connect an RJ 45 compatible patch cable to the RJ 45 socket socket 9 on the back panel Consult a network administrator for setting up the networking protocols in the operating system Connecting an External VGA Monitor An extra external VGA monitor may be connected to t
131. 28 01 AM 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 03 17 00 08 12 14 AM 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM 1 Channel EME 1 Channel HITS EME 1x2 MD HITS EME 1x4 MD HITS EME gt 2 Channel EME 2 Channel HITS EME 2x2 MD HITS EME 4 Channel EME Load Save Rename Delete Figure 1 Click on the Settings file you want to load and then click on Load Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 2 Click on the Settings menu and then on the Settings Manager menu point Probes and settings check r Result Setting OK r Probes in setting r Available probes Ch 1 i n a n a 2 MHz C unidirect C unidirect Unidirect 1 unidirect na G na G na Ea Enable Enable Enable Enable IV Autoload if check is successful Variable probe position T Manual assignment na Load Cancel Figure 3 This panel does not appear if the probes are connected correctly to the system Pioneer TC8080 example 5 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual JExam Settings View BoE Toolbar ESE Set the screen display Flow Velocity Scale Flow Direction Use the following procedures to Ber nese choose how you want the Doppler information presented on the screen display Zero Baseline Tren
132. 2mm 84mm Depth 50 Figure 2 Color M Mode display window with power flow toward only 16 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Selecting the M Mode color display palette There are three different palettes for the M Mode color scales The first one Palette 1 is a mixed color scale The second one Palette 2 is a pure red toward pure blue away and pure green total scale The third one Palette 3 is similar to the second one but has white mixed in with the strongest color to help distinguish H I T S data The Color M Mode palette is configurable by using one of the following two methods Method 1 1 Click on View and then on Color M Mode Palette Figure 1 and select the palette from the list Method 2 1 Right click on the M Mode display to get the Color M Mode Menu Figure 2 and select the palette from the list S16 14 v Toolbar Spectral Palette ORCE a Palette 1 v Fast Curve Window Palette 2 Palette 3 Figure 1 Click on View and then on Color M Mode Palette and then select the palette from the list Display Enhancement Disabled Display Enhancement Option A Display Enhancement Option B Palette 1 Palette 2 Palette 3 Figure 2 Right click on the M Mode display and then select the palette from the list Toggling the M Mode display enhancement To take into account the overlap ping between channel bands and the tailing off of the signal s
133. 3 Click on View and then on Toolbar A check mark Enabled S6 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Copy Window The Copy window displays saved Spectral Snapshots Figure illustrates an example screen display with saved spectral snapshots Note The Copy window is always displayed on the screen unless the Spectral window is increased to its maximum width or the Event List is increased to its maximum height The Copy window holds the last 20 saved spectral display records and can be scrolled forwards and backwards to view all of the records S6 16 D Acquiring data for Jo BE IF Exam Protocol View Doppler Configuration Report Window Hel a a 2 al IStep Vessel Label _ Probe Sv Power Report Pos Saved Comment p Previous Step SewoNea Pinton Boostiode On Astar H Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM Figure 1 Example screen display with Saved Spectral Snapshots Loading a Protocol The Protocol Manager panel lets you choose from a list of Proto cols that can be quickly loaded into the system for immediate use 1 Click on the Protocol Manager button or Click on Protocol Figure 1 and then on Protocol Man ager 2 Either click on the desired Protocol and then click on Load or double click on the Protocol you want to load Figure 2 The Diamond symbol identi fies the current default protocol and the right p
134. 7 19 S17 20 This chapter describes the external input and output facilities which allow curve and audio data connections to external units The Doppler audio signals can be recorded to an external DAT recorder and played back in at a later time The envelope curves from the spectral displays are available as analog curve output signals Finally there are analog curve inputs provided to allow external analog signals like a CO2 curve to be read in For convenience the connection of the external devices is made via the optional Analog Connection Box which contains eight RCA input connectors and eight RCA output connectors Refer to Chapter H3 or H4 for a descrip tion of the proper connection procedure for the analog connec tion box In addition the raw digital audio data Continuous SoundTrak can be saved to the harddisk Upon reading in patient files this data is then available for reviewing and postprocessing 17 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 17 2 Description of Audio Inputs and Outputs The Pioneer TC8080 and Com panion III systems support the ability to record and playback the audio Doppler data using an external recording device Up to four spectral channels eight quadrature channels can be recorded or played back simulta neously If analog curve inputs or outputs are also used then the total number of available channels is reduced Two channels of audio inf
135. 8080 and Companion III User Manual sg P ny p re pe O70 Oo en Po mm of Figure 1 Rear View of the Companion III l Pointing Device Socket Mouse Track Ball ES Keyboard Socket Headphone Socket U 4 Microphone Socket Line Out Socket A 6 Line In Socket 7 25Way Parallel Printer Socket H3 4 8 9 10 RS232 Serial Interface Socket Remote Control Socket Analog Outputs Socket Analog Inputs Socket VGA Monitor Signal Socket RJ 45 Network Socket USB Universal Serial Bus Sockets 15 Power Mains Input Socket 16 Power Mains On Off Switch 17 Power Mains Fuse Drawer 18 Equipotential Terminal 19 Transducer Probe Holder 20 Cooling Fan Vent 2 Carrying Handle Companion III System WIASYS C MPanion MN Figure 2 Front Quarter View of the Companion III 22 Infra Red Remote Control Window 23 Resistive VGA Touch Screen 24 Loudspeaker Two On System 25 CD RW Drive 26 1 44MB 3 Floppy Disk Drive 27 Transducer Probe Socket 28 Transducer Probe Socket H3 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Connecting Accessories To guarantee the highest level of safety only accessories that have approval to EN 60601 1 and are CE marked in accordance with the Medical Devices Directive 93 42 EEC should be connected to the Companion III Connection of the Companion III to any mains powered electrical accessories must be in accordance with IEC 60
136. 9 Save 4 Manual 15 48 22 BENGE WEDTEW 15 48 31 Save 6 Manual 15 49 11 Save 7 Manual 15 50 20 ave 8 Manua 15 50 32 Save 9 Manual 15 50 44 Save 10 Manual 15 51 50 Print Save to File Figure 1 Click on Save to File to get PDF Report Cancel WinTCD A PDF graphics report for this examination has already been saved Do you want to overwrite the existing graphics report file with the latest state of the examination data No Yes Figure 2 Prompt to Overwrite PDF Report The abbreviations for the report examinations are DT for the diagnostic text report DG for the diagnostic graphics report and MG for the monitoring graphics report Inside of the NicVue software the five types of WinTCD exams D M DT DG and MG can all be processsed individually This gives you the ability to archive both the original examination data and the report data separately Since the PDF text reports and PDF graphics reports each get their own entry in Nic Vue the files have a different GUID identifier and are saved in a different location in the data directory In this way you can delete the original examination data and keep the PDF reports for the patient By right clicking on the report file entry in Nic Vue and selecting Exam Information the path and data file name can be obtained Automatically Saving PDF Reports Some users prefer to have the generation of the PDF repo
137. 9 Vessel Labels Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Spectra Fo Envelope F6 Envelope Fe Units F8 Units Fe Display Ra Display Range Satpal Mean Ctrl D Set Delta Mean CtrleD Figure 2 Click on Doppler and then on Flow Separation or Squelch to toggle the functions on and off A checkmark means it is currently enabled Performing an Exam Activating the audio squelch function There is a squelch function available for the audio signals The squelch function automati cally chops off the very high intensity audio signals to reduce loud peaks in the audio volume This function can be used to reduce the disturbing noise which occurs when gel is applied to the transducer Use the following control to toggle the function on and off 1 Click on Doppler and then click on Squelch Figure 2 or 2 If one of the softkey functions has been assigned Squelch On Off click on the displayed softkey or press the corre sponding S key on the remote control S7 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Toggling the audio noise reduction The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system each have two versions of the Doppler electronics The original version contained noise reduction cir cuitry for the audio signals which was not adjustable The present version contains the same noise reduction circuitry for the audio signals but allows this to be toggled on and off
138. A ACA R ACA R PCA R PCA P1 R PCA P2 R PCoA R ICA R ACoA Ophth Pr R Ophth Di R Siphon R Vertebral R PICA R BA Pr BA Di Genu R Supraclinoid R Parasellar R Edit Label Unknown gt Parasellar L MCAL MCA ACAL ACAL PCAL PCA P1 L PCA P2 L PCoA L ICAL ACoA Ophth Pr L Ophth Di L Siphon L Vertebral L PICA L BA Pr BA Di Genu L Supraclinoid L Figure 3 Vessel Labels Ch 1 S1 2 MHz PW VA Pr L Ferm Protea Vaw Doppler Goniguaton Repon Vinca Pe ERARE Figure 2 If for example the S1 key is labeled Vessel Labels you can either click on the Vessel labels key or press the S1 Key on the remote control lap Vesse Lade Probe Dopin Sv Power Report Pos saved Comment Ereet Desertpeon Tne a E CEE co Figure 4 The selected vessel label appears on the screen Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display You can choose to view up to 13 Doppler Parameter Boxes Figure 3 which show you current parameter values as the test is conducted on your subject You can choose to view up to 13 of the following parameter values e Depth e Sample Volume SV e Gain e Mean Velocity Mean e Systolic Sys e Diastolic Dia e Pulsatility Index PI e Resistance Index RI e Amplitude Ampl e Power e Filter e TIC TIS e Delta Mean D Mean Note The above parameters are described on the following pages
139. A configuration menu can be accessed by selecting Configure S Keys out of the pull down Configuration menu Note A softkey function can not be assigned to multiple keys If it has been assigned to a key already it first must be removed from that key before you can reassign it to a different key Using the footswitch The three footswitch keys Figure 1 on the Footswitch do not have any correspondence to the five keys displayed on the bottom of the screen display S keys These are completely independent configurable functions Each of the three keys have a specific function which when pressed will perform the assigned action The list of keys below depends on the mode of operation and is just a sample of the various functions There are many more footswitch functions compared to the S keys since typically Doppler control functions will be config ured and these already have a dedicated key on the remote control The keys can be config ured in any order e Indicators On Off e Envelope e Filter Down e Filter Up e Toggle PW CW e Save Snapshot e Depth Up e Depth Down e Freeze e Units etc You can customize the sequence of the keys to fit your personal preference by using the configura tion menu as shown in Figure 2 irregardless of whether the footswitch is connected or not Entering Commands Figure 1 Pressing one of the three footswitch keys will execute the configured command if the command is availa
140. Acquisition Screen Control Buttons 3 12 Monitoring Acquisition Screen Menus S3 6 Monitoring Acquisition Screen Overview S3 5 Monitoring Review Screen Control Buttons 3 14 3 15 Monitoring Review Screen Menus S3 10 Monitoring Review Screen Overview S3 9 Mouse H5 3 Index mouse H2 5 H3 6 H4 6 H5 6 Mouse commands S2 3 S2 4 mouse does not work H5 7 Move Down S5 15 S17 12 Move Horizontal Splitter S5 9 S6 9 Move Up S5 15 S17 12 Move Vertical Splitter S5 9 S6 9 Moving a window S2 10 S11 7 Moving Cursors S8 15 S8 62 Moving Differential Time Cursors 8 38 Moving the mouse pointer 2 3 Multi Depths Link On Off 7 6 multi depth receiver channels S7 8 S7 9 Multichannel Monitoring S7 6 multidepth H LT S S8 36 multidepth H I T S events 8 30 multiple images S17 8 Multiple Window Screen Displays S11 1 multiple windows S11 3 Mute S7 16 mute S16 8 N network H3 7 H4 7 new default Protocol S10 14 new default Settings file S9 5 new protocol S10 3 new Settings file S9 3 S16 4 New Steps S10 9 Next Acquisition or Review Window S11 4 Next Step S7 36 Nicolet software warranty PR iii Nicolet system warranty PR ii Nicolet Vascular Inc H5 8 NicVueicon S 4 4 8 5 Noise Reduction S7 18 Noise Reduction icon S8 25 normocapnia S8 63 O OK S12 5 S12 7 S12 9 S12 12 Online probe test S14 4 open a file for review S8 5 Opt button S10 4 Optional Accessories H2 9 H2 10 Original hardware S7 10 or
141. CD e Exam Info If you need help using the keyboard commands Alt letter see Chapter 2 in this guide WW 13 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 13 2 About WinTCD The About WinTCD panel lists the various software versions used with WinTCD 1 Click on Help Figure 1 2 Click on About WinTCD 3 When finished click on OK Figure 2 Or 1 Click on the About yasys WinTCD button 2 When finished click on OK Figure 2 Examples are shown for both systems The Help Menu Help Topics About WinTCD Exam Info Figure 1 Click on Help and then on About WinTCD About WinTCD VIA SYS HCARE WinTCD Transcranial Doppler Software WinTCD Version X X X X Companion III MK2 Hardware Remote EME2 2 at Com 1 IR Remote Scimed IR at COM 2 Footswitch Not Found WinTCD EXE Version X X X X Display Lib Version X X X X Doppler Lib Version X X X X Doppler Lib Interface X X X X Driver Version X X X X PCI Board Type X DSP Version X X X X Doppler BIOS X X X X 1 0 Board Type X lODsp Version X X X X NPA Interface Supported X X OK About WinTCD VIA SYS HCARE WinTCD Transcranial Doppler Software WinTCD Version X X X X Pioneer III MK2 Hardware Remote EME2 2 at Com 1 IR Remote Scimed IR at COM 2 Footswitch Not Found WinTCD EXE Version X X X X Display Lib Version X X X X Doppler Lib Version X X X X Do
142. Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 3 The Doppler pull down menu appears when Doppler is selected from the menu bar S2 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pull down menu selections Use the Arrow keys on the keyboard or the Arrow keys on the remote control to highlight the menu option you want to choose and then press Enter on the keyboard or the remote control or if the option has an underlined letter type Alt letter as described on the previous page 3 While watching the Indicators menu press the Down Arrow key Note that menu options displayed in black become highlighted as you press the Down Arrow key Note Grayed menu options can not be selected because those options for whatever reason are disabled for use at that time 4 Continue pressing the Down Arrow Key until Settings is highlighted Figure 1 Or Type Alt S because the letter S in Settings is underlined 5 The Indicators Settings window appears Figure 2 At this time simply press the Enter key on the keyboard to exit this window S2 6 Indicators Settings v Enable Reset Count Figure 1 Type Alt S or press the Down Arrow key on the keyboard until Settings is highligh
143. D Acquiring 9 09 A M Figure 1 When the H I T S Parameter box is enabled and the Indicator algorithm is turned on previous page the number of detected H I T S is displayed in the H I T S box Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help laf x e Ere fj AE P Indicat ors 0 SoundTrakOnO Envelope Spectra On Off AsStart M Nic Vue H WinTCD Acquiring Figure 2 Click on Indicators Indicators Settings v Enable Reset Count Figure 3 Click on Reset Count 9 09 A M Ry Saving Event Markers Monitoring Mode only There are two types of user defined event markers which are supported in the WinTCD software package The first type of marker is intended for interval events I Markers These events are start stop type markers which describe events that happen over an interval of time The second type of marker is intended for single events S Markers These events are one shot markers which describe events that only happen at one moment in time Markers can be saved during the acquire mode by using one of the two methods described on this page Method should be used to save markers at the current point in time Method 2 should be used to save markers at a time position in the past The set markers will be drawn in the curve displays at the correct time position using the color
144. Display Enhancement S16 7 S16 15 display gain S16 12 Display H I T S Text On Off S8 29 Index 4 Display Options 5 21 S8 42 S8 50 S16 13 Display Range S7 28 S16 12 Display the Toolbar S5 13 S6 15 Displaying Cursor Units S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 distal resistance S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 Documenting the VMR Results S8 67 Doppler functions are not available 8 25 Doppler Parameter Box 5 10 Doppler Parameter Boxes S6 11 Doppler parameters S8 24 Doppler Pararameter Box display 5 10 Doppler Settings S5 14 S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 Doppler Specifications H6 3 H6 4 Double click 2 3 Drag and drop S 2 4 DT S12 10 Dual Crosshair cursors S8 12 Durability of Probes H5 5 DVD media S14 5 E earth grounded H1 4 Edia S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 Edia End Diastolic Flow S5 12 Edit S5 15 S8 21 S8 22 17 12 Edit Active Step S10 9 EditEvent 7 34 S8 21 S8 56 Edit Marker S7 34 S8 56 Editing a Protocol 10 8 Editing a Spectral snapshot S8 21 S8 22 Editing a step S10 9 editing a step S10 10 Editing Event Markers 87 34 S8 56 Editing the common global Protocol settings S10 11 electrical safety testing H1 7 Electromagnetic Compatibility H1 3 Emboli S 7 30 S8 29 Embolic Signal Detection S7 31 S8 29 EMC Statement H1 10 emissions H1 10 empty spaces S16 11 empty spaces between bands 16 10 Enabling the indicator 7 30 End Diastolic Flow S 5 12 S6 13 S7 27 end start of the Trend data S8 44 Entering text S2 7 Envelope S7
145. End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 5 Click on the desired time scale S8 43 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Jumping to the end start of the Trend data You can jump to the end or the beginning of the Trend data without having to scroll through the data using either of the following methods Note Recalling events out of the Event List will recall the Trend and Fast Curve data from that position Figure 1 Right click inside the Trend window Method 1 1 Right click inside the Trend window Figure 1 2 Click on Go to Exam End or Go to Exam Begin Figure 2 Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 2 Click on Go to Exam Begin or Go to Exam End Method 2 2 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend Figure 3 Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys 3 Click on Go to Exam End or Go to Exam Begin Figure 4 Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 3 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend S8 44 Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes
146. Figure 1 User Defined marker dialog Edit Event Delete Event Show Advanced H I T S Information Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 2 Right Click Event List Menu Edit Marker Injection Diamox Biting Sneeze Embolus Artifact Probe Bump Edit Marker Hyperventilation Start Hyperventilation Stop Sleep Begin Sleep End X Clamp On X Clamp Off Figure 3 Edit marker lists Figure 4 Right click on the saved event in the Trend window Insert S Marker Insert I Marker Edit Event Delete Event Figure 5 Right click Trend window menu lower section Using the General Cursor Mode Curve Displays In order to set cursors in the trend and fast curve display windows the user must activate a special cursor mode Inside of the General Cursor mode there are four types of cursors available for the curve displays These are Horizontal Curve Differential Time Vertical Curve and Average Curve The following pages describe these Activating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for a curve display can be switched on by 1 Right clicking in either the trend display window or the fast curve display window 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Figure 1 Recognizing the General Cursor Mode When the General Cursor Mode for a curve display window is active the mouse pointer will change
147. Figure 2 The cursors may be toggled back on by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the curve display data and then selecting Show Cursors from the menu Note The Hide Cursors and Show Cursors functions are only avail able when the General Cursor Mode is switched off Ry Reviewing Trend data This section describes how to review the Trend data that was collected during the Monitoring acquisition mode Note The procedures in this section of the chapter are for the Monitoring Mode only not the Diagnostic Mode Saving the Trend configuration You can save the present Trend and Fast Curve display settings with the present file so the next time you review the data the settings will be selected automati cally by the system The Trend settings that will be saved include e Curves e Curve colors e Value scales e Time scales e Window sizes e Event marker display configuration e Cursors p Click on Configuration Figure 2 N Click on Save Configuration Reviewing Data D R g monitoring data for Doe John D JE wi View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help EEE PAREA Mea Ce ed 9 09 A M a Scale Time Scale Labels Start IMI Nic Vue I WinTCD RN ving Figure 1 The Trend window can display up to 11 trend curves per channel This example shows two trend curves Sys and Dia have been selected Configuration Co
148. Go to Trend End Scrolling through the Fast Curves data When the Fast Curves data record is longer than the width of the Fast Curves window some of the Curves data can not be viewed When this happens use either of the methods below to scroll the off screen data back into view The Fast Curve and Trend windows are synchronized The Fast Curve Position Indicator in the Trend window indicates the center time position of the data displayed in the Fast Curve window Note When scrolling through the Fast Curves data think of the window as sliding left or right while the data remains stationary Figure 1 Method 1 1 Click on the Left Scroll button Figure 2 to move the Fast Curves window to the left or click on the Right Scroll button to move the Fast Curves window to the right Method 2 1 Focus the Fast Curves window 2 Press the Left or Right Arrow button on the remote control to scroll through the Fast Curves data Figure 3 Reviewing Data Figure 1 Use the Scroll buttons to bring off screen Fast Curves data back into view Figure 2 Click on the Left Scroll or Right Scroll buttons to scroll through the Fast Curves data g amp D eD g g E g SAVE D aD mee oant wre ED DRECTON DELETE SAMPLE ZERO aM n DEPTH SCALE ESCAPE ENTER
149. H6 14 8 MHz CW Output Table H6 15 16 MHz 1 5mm PW Output Table H6 16 16 MHz 2 0mm PW Output Table H6 17 20 MHz 1 5mm PW Output Table H6 18 20 MHz 2 0mm PW Output Table H6 19 Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 Format H6 20 Accuracy of Values Specifications H6 23 Vertical Scale Accuracy H6 23 Information in this chapter is Horizontal Scale Accuracy H6 24 subject to change without notice Accuracy of Values Tables H6 25 H6 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H6 2 PC Specifications Doppler Specifications Companion Ill System e Industrial Style AXIOM SBC 8361 VEA or improved variant motherboard e Intel Pentium III 850 MHz Processor minimum e 256 MB DIMM RAM mini mum e 80GB fixed hard disk storage minimum e 1 44 MB HD floppy disk storage e Internal DVD RW Drive e On board Graphics Adapter e 6 Wire Resistive touch screen e 1 6MHz 2MHz 4MHz and 8MHz transducer probe frequencies e 16MHz and 20MHz Microvas cular transducer probe frequencies available via isolation pod e 64 128 or 256 point FFT e High resolution FFT frequency spectrum analysis with up to 64 levels of color display Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 System Intel Desktop Board D815EEA or equivalent Incorporating On board Intel 82815 AGP video controller On board Soundmax integrated digital audio Intel Pentium III 1 GHz Processor minimum 51
150. I hardware The present systems say either Companion HI MK2 hardware or Pioneer III MK2 hardware The systems with original hardware adjust the amplification of the received Doppler signals The MK2 hardware systems adjust the length of the receiver gate to alter the signal strength Note Refer to the Sample Volume Clarification for the MK2 hardware for more detailed information Use the Boost mode to increase the signal strength thus enhancing your ability to record and inspect the signals Method 1 1 Click on the Boost Mode On Off button Method 2 1 Click on Doppler and then on Boost Mode Figure 1 Method 3 1 If one of the softkeys was assigned the Boost Mode function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Note The Boost mode does not affect the power output Note It is recommended to only use the Boost mode when really needed Overloading the electron ics on normal signals can cause mirror signals where the flow direction is not well separated Note In multidepth mode the boost state is always toggled across all multidepth channels associated with the selected transmit channel It is possible to have boost on channels 1A and 1B with no boost on channels 2A and 2B However it is not possible to have boost on channel 1A and no boost on channel 1B Performing an Exam Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spe
151. LE model Keyboard commands This section provides a short overview of various keyboard commands available for use with your system If additional information about using the keyboard to enter commands is required please refer to your Windows User guide Underlined letter commands Whenever you see a letter underlined in a word displayed in a menu you can use the keyboard to select that function To make your selection hold down the Alt key Figure 1 and then type the underlined letter this procedure is typically described as type Alt letter The commands are not case sensitive you can type a small letter or capital letter e g a or A b or B etc For example note that the letter D is underlined in Doppler Figure 2 1 Type Alt d Alt and the lowercase letter d or Alt D Alt and the uppercase letter D A pull down menu listing various options from which you can choose appears Figure 3 Note If you change your mind or type the wrong letter you can exit from a menu by simply pressing the Esc key 2 Go to the next page Entering Commands Figure 1 When a word has an underlined letter hold down either Alt key and then type that letter to select that option from the screen Figure 2 Type Alt d to select the Doppler menu Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW
152. Manager menu function Lets you load rename or delete an existing setting or save a new setting Freeze Spectral Snapshot Same as the Doppler gt Freeze Spectral Snapshot menu function Freezes the running Doppler display in a pop up freeze window About Button Same as the Help gt About WinTCD menu function Displays a window with various information about your WinTCD system 3 12 Se ae ine Spectra On Off Same as the Doppler gt Spectra menu function Toggles the display of the spectral data on and off Switch Displayed Envelopes Same as the Doppler gt Envelope menu function Toggles the both and off Boost Mode Same as the Doppler gt Boost Mode menu function Toggles the boost mode level envelope curves between above below Print Graphics Report Same as the Report gt Graphics Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a graphics report Indicators On Off Same as the Indicators gt Enable menu function Toggles the indicator algorithm on and off Change Scale Units Same as the Doppler gt Units menu function Toggles the scale units for the spectral display between cm sec and kHz Summaries Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Control Buttons Print Spectral Window Same as the Doppler gt Print Spectral Window menu function Prints out a hard copy of the spectral window Switch Displayed Envelopes Same as the Doppler gt En
153. Manager Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean ff data fyADoe John D am Protocol View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help Configuration Configure Event List Text Report Move Vertical Splitter Help Topics Configure S Keys Graphics Report Move Horizontal Splitter About WinTCD Configure Footswitch Export SoundTrak Next Acquisition or Review Window Exam Info External Connections Cascade System Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically v1 Acquiring data for Doe John D S3 4 Summaries Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Overview Channel Socket Socket Vessel Label Shows channel probe used and the selected vessel label being used during the exam Doppler Window Flow Direction Indicator Red arrow blood flow toward probe above the Zero Baseline Blue arrow blood flow away from probe above the Zero Baseline To change flow direction press the Direction key on the Remote Control Minimize Button Reduce WinTCD to an icon on the desktop Click on the WinTCD icon to return the OF M WinTcD Acquirir Zero Baseline Adjust vertical position of the spectral data using the Zero key on the Remote Control Fast Curve Window Displays real time monitoring curves of designated Doppler parameters and
154. NO OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS SOFT WARE INCLUDING WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NICOLET MAKES NO WARRANTY EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE NICOLET SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSE QUENTIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONTINGENT DAMAGES Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or limitation of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you Software copyright protection This software is protected by state U S and international copyright treaty provisions These copyright provisions apply to your use of this software regardless of whether or not you agree to the following terms Under law copyright infringers may be liable for actual damages sustained by the copyright owner and for punitive damages of up to 100 000 per infringement Unauthorized copying of com puter software and attempts to do so are also criminal violations with penalties that may exceed 100 000 in fines and 10 years in prison Preface 1 Unless restricted by an agreement with Nicolet you are permitted to a Use this software on only one computer and by one user at a time b Make one copy of this software provided that i the copy is created as an essential step in the utiliza tion of this software in c
155. Nicolet Vascular Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual December 2004 Manufactured by SciMed Ltd UK E oo0o8a8a a division of VIASYS Healthcare Nicolet Part Number M7 W001 Rev G User Manual Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Additional copies Additional copies of this manual or other Nicolet Vascular Divi sion of VIASYS Healthcare literature may be obtained from Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare P O Box 44451 Madison WI USA 53744 4451 Attention The information in this document is subject to change without notice Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare assumes no responsi bility for any errors that may appear in this document Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare makes no commitment to update nor to keep current the information contained in this document No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare Preface Trademarks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows Windows NT Win dows 2000 and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Mi crosoft Corporation Pioneer Companion and WinTCD are tr
156. Note Depending on the country of distribution the cart model may vary H4 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Mains Power Supply The Pioneer TC 8080 can be set up to run on either 100 120V or 200 240V AC electrical supplies Before connecting the Pioneer TC 8080 to a mains electrical supply check that the Power Mains Selector Switches are set to the correct voltage Do not change the switch setting whilst the unit is switched on Set to 115V for 100 120V Set to 230V for 200 240V Apply power to the Pioneer TC8080 system After assembling the system and connecting the Pioneer TC8080 to the power mains supply it may be switched on The Power Mains Switch 30 is on the front of the Pioneer TC8080 next to the TC8080 label When the unit is off the switch should be at position O To switch on the Pioneer TC8080 ensure that a mains cable is connected to the system and a power socket and push the switch to position T H4 12 Figure 1 System power switches Note When the unit has been shut down in Windows the power to the motherboard HDD CD RW FDD and any PCI and USB peripher als is automatically disconnected The Transducer Probe Sockets 26 the internal audio amplifier and the Power Mains Outlets are still live until the Power Mains Switch is set to position O Off Note The unit will perform some self tests before booting into Windo
157. Reference Guide that accompa nied this guide for instructions on starting the WinTCD application and opening a data file WW Note Depending on the version of NicVue which is installed on the system the icons may vary For older systems the icons should be displayed as shown below in Figure 4 im Review Figure 4 Older Nic Vue Icons Summary of steps 1 Using the Left mouse button double click on the NicVue icon Figure 1 2 From the NicVue window locate and click on the patient record in which the data files you want to review are located and then click on the data file you want to review 3 From the NicVue window click on the Review button Figure 2 4 When the WinTCD window appears Figure 3 continue with the next page l If a file containing an M Mode display is se lected please refer to Chapter S16 in this guide for all the details on using the M Mode display NY Reviewing Data Figure 1 From the Desktop double click on the NicVue icon Review Figure 2 From the NicVue screen click on the Review button wa Envelope v peat OT Parana Ba Estar Wie oo ML WaTCD Rovowing EI Monitoring Review Mode Diagnostic Review Mode Figure 3 When a screen display similar to that above appears continue with the next page S8 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion
158. Steps and Vessel Label Common Settings Complete Steps Relative Steps Vessel Label only Sound Trak Transducer type and mode Relative depth Zero Window sizes Depth Zero Direction Main window S keys Sample Direction Envelope Footswitch settings Amplitude Envelope Spectra On Off Freeze window size Gain Spectra On Off Units Freeze window S keys Filter Units Spectral display range Review window size Scale Spectral display range Parameter boxes Review window S keys Sweep Parameter boxes Vessel label and side Search transducer at any socket Boost level Vessel label and side Printout position FFT Resolution Zero Printout position Report layout and color Direction Text report side configuration Envelope Event list column width Spectra On Off Squelch Units Flow Separation Noise Reduction Spectral display range Parameter boxes Vessel label and side Printout position Tx Rx Linkage HFE Mode and breakpoint Table 1 10 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Creating a new default Protocol This procedure will replace the current default Protocol with the active Protocol You can have only one default Protocol at a time 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Set as Default 10 14 Loading the default Protocol Use this procedure to load the current default Protocol 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Load Default Create a New Protocol Save Save As
159. TC8080 and the Companion III systems when an analog curve connec tion is made to an external device the external device must be powered through the main system s isolated power sockets Pioneer only or via the portable Isobox isolation Transformer both systems The external device must meet the standard relevant to your country IEC 60065 2001 BS EN 60065 2002 UL 60065 2003 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60065 03 IEC 60950 1 2002 BSEN 60950 2002 UL 60950 1 2002 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60950 1 03 On the Pioneer TC8080 sytem the total power consumption from both mains outlets should not exceed 150VA When using an Isobox isolation Transformer ensure that the voltage selector on the Isobox is set to the correct voltage before connection If an Isobox isolation trans former is not available for connecting a mains powered accessory the system may NOT be used 17 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Creating Curve I O Settings Before the curve inputs and outputs can be used new settings or protocol files need to be created There are no sample factory defaults since most likely users will want to create their own unique configuration files Use the following steps to create configuration files with curve inputs and or curve outputs 1 In the acquire mode load the protocol or settings file which you want to use or create a new settings or protocol file and set the system up the way you want it
160. TIS This Index which is based on a model where the ultrasound travels through soft tissue only is displayed for the 4 MHz and 8 MHz extracranial transducers as well as the 16 Mhz and 20 MHz microvascu lar transducers The Thermal Indexes are dis played along with the parameter boxes provided with each spectral display window The values are referred to as TIC and TIS The higher the thermal index value the greater the tissue warming will be Adjustments of the three parameters on the previous page will cause the thermal index numbers to change Thermal Index values less than 1 are displayed to help in imple menting the ALARA principle Thermal Index values greater than 1 alert the user to proceed with more caution If the Thermal Index value is below 0 4 it does not need to be displayed Safety Summary Description of Applied Parts Depending on the type of trans ducer used two different levels of protection are possible with the system The following transducers provide a Class 1 type B level of protection according to IEC601 1 1988 e 1 6 MHz PW e 2 MHz PW e 4 MHz CW PW e 8 MHz CW PW The following transducers provide a Class 1 type CF level of protection according to IEC601 1 1988 when used in conjunction with their appropriate pre amplifier pod e 16 MHz PW e 20 MHz PW H1 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual EMC Statement The system conforms to the
161. Technical Specification 1 6 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 190 0 004 0 190 0 004 0 190 0 004 0 004 5 142 0 105 5 142 0 105 5 142 0 105 0 080 cm sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds 2 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 151 0 004 0 151 0 004 0 151 0 004 0 004 4 113 0 105 4 113 0 105 4 113 0 105 0 081 cm sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds 4 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 075 0 004 0 075 0 004 0 075 0 004 0 004 4 836 0 248 4 836 0 248 4 836 0 248 0 081 cm
162. The accuracy of the vertical scale of the FFT spectral display depends on two adjustable factors the PRF and the FFT resolution and can be calculated using the formula in Figure 1 The best case accuracy on the velocity measurements result from using the lowest scale setting and the highest FFT resolution The worst case accuracy on the velocity measurements result from using the highest scale setting and the lowest FFT resolution Technical Specification Accuracy of scale PRF 2 FFT Resolution Where Accuracy of scale is expressed in cm sec or kHz PRF full scale setting is expressed in cm sec or kHz FFT resolution is expressed in number of points 64 128 256 Examples 1 If the scale setting is 81 cm sec gt 81 cm sec and the FFT resolution is 256 points then the accuracy of scale velocity 162 cm sec 2 256 0 316 cm sec 2 If the scale setting is 2 00 kHz gt 5 93 kHz and the FFT resolution is 128 points then the accuracy of scale frequency 7 93 kHz 2 128 0 031 kHz Figure 1 Formula for calculating the vertical scale accuracy Note It is important to remember that the accuracy of measurement depends on the operator obtaining a good envelope curve for the signal as described in this guide Note As explained in this guide all measurements of velocity assume an insonation angle of zero degrees Note The Gosling Pulsatility Index PI and the Pourcelot Resistan
163. This example shows the various Splitter Bars which can be used to resize specific windows MAsStart M Nic Vue E WinT CD Acq Splitting the windows horizontally 1 Either a click anywhere in the Protocol List or Event List window or b press the Window button on the Remote Control until the Protocol List or Event List window is in focus title bar highlighted in blue next click on Window and then on Move Horizontal Splitter Figure 3 2 Either a drag the mouse until the focused window is sized as desired and then click the mouse button or b press the Up Down Arrow buttons on either the Remote Control or keyboard and then press the Enter button when finished Splitting the windows vertically 1 Click on Window and then on Move Vertical Splitter Figure 3 2 Either a drag the mouse until the windows are sized as desired and then click the mouse button or b press the Left Right Arrow buttons on either the Remote Control or keyboard and then press the Enter button when finished Preparing the System for Diagnostics Se A PA Bald ap fosst tan rope ospa 5 Powe Report fox sre Comment Teens Figure 1 Click and hold down the Left mouse button on the Splitter Bar and then drag the mouse to left or right to resize the window A Figure 2 After enlarging the window the
164. This section describes how to make the calculation after the examination has been performed Activating the Calculate VMR Mode The Calculate VMR Mode for the trend display can be activated by Method 1 1 Right clicking in the trend display window 2 Clicking on either of the functions Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors or Calculate VMR Average Cursors Figure 2 Method 2 1 Clicking on either of the s key functions Calculate VMR H Cursors or Calculate VMR A Cursors Normocapnia Hypercapnia Reviewing Data Hypocapnia Figure 1 Vasomotor Reactivity VMR Phases Recognizing the Calculate VMR Mode When one of the Calculate VMR Modes for the trend display window is active the mouse pointer will change into a special cursor type pointer when the mouse is positioned in the data section of the trend window Depending on the mode chosen Horizontal cursors or Average cursors a different mouse pointer Figure 3 will be active In addition to the mouse pointer changing the trend display will be redrawn with all event markers and non essential cursors re moved Finally in the top left hand corner of the trend display the letters VMR will be drawn for each mean curve in the trend display The color of the text correlates with the mean curve colors See Figure on next page Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Calculate VMR Average Cursors General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor
165. UID number This number and the data path can be determined by using the Exam Info function in the Help menu In the Exam GUID directory an export directory will be created containing the WAV file records and a header file The header file is a text file and contains the patient informa tion Each WAV file gets a file name consisting of the vessel label depth probe frequency channel and time of save to uniquely identify each record Retrieving Exported SoundTrak WAV files The exported SoundTrak WAV files may be copied moved in order to add to PowerPoint or other media presentations In order to retrieve the exported SoundTrak WAV files for further use 1 Minimize WinTCD 2 In NicVue the study you exported from should be highlighted Above the study will be an icon that contains a blue letter i in a white balloon Click this icon 3 Anew window will appear towards the bottom of this window will be a field called Data File This is where your SoundTrak file is contained In most cases it will be D Nicolet wintcd data The letters following data correspond to the folder where the SoundTrak data is contained Note this folder name 4 Click OK to close this win dow 5 Minimize NicVue Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files 6 Double click on My Com puter 7 Double click on the Data D icon 8 Double click on Nicolet 9 Double click on WinTCD 10 Double click on Data 11 Loc
166. V AC 50 60 Hz 350 VA switchable Integrated 150 VA isolation transformer powering 2 integrated power outlets 2 x T5 0AH 250V 20mm to IEC Sheet III H6 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Acoustic Output Specifications The following pages provide information on the ultrasound intensity output of the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion HI systems The data for each transducer is presented in an individual table Refer to Figure 1 on this page for a list of the symbols used and their defini tions Measurement Uncertainties The associated measurement uncertainties are as follows Power 29 37 Intensity 18 22 Pressure 9 12 Center Frequency 1 5 1 5 H6 8 MI Mechanical Index TIS cay Soft tissue Thermal Index in auto scanning mode TI Soft tissue Thermal Index in non auto scanning mode NON SCAN TIB Bone Thermal Index TIC Cranial Thermal Index A Area of active aperture cm aprt P Derated peak rarefactional pressure W Ultrasonic Power except for TIS ean in which case it is the ultrasonic power passing through a cm window mw W z Derated ultrasonic power at axial distance rA z Derated spatial peak temporal average intensity at axial distance Laa Z mW em z Axial distance corresponding to location of max min W z l z xlcm where z gt Zo cm 05 l 169A For MI z is the axial distance at which F
167. a tion such that ultrasound exposure to the patient may be reasonably minimized The TIC box displays the current Cranial Bone Thermal Index This Index which is based on a model where the bone is located close to the surface of the skin is displayed for the 1 6 MHz and 2 MHz transcranial transducers The TIS box displays the current Soft Tissue Thermal Index This Index which is based on a model where the ultrasound travels through soft tissue only is displayed for the 4 MHz and 8 MHz extracranial transducers as well as the 16 Mhz and 20 MHz microvascular transducers Note The higher the TIC or TIS value the greater the tissue warming will be Adjustments of the Sample Amplitude and the Scale parameters will cause the thermal index numbers to change Note Refer to Chapter H1 for more information concerning this index Note The TIC TIS box is always displayed on systems in the USA and cannot be configured OFF in the acquire mode S5 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Mean Mean Velocity The Mean Parameter Box shows the Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra The Mean velocity is a calculation of the average curve measured over the complete sweep of the envelope Sys Systolic The Sys Parameter Box shows the peak Systolic flow which is the highest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope See Note 1 Dia Diastolic The Dia Parameter Box shows the end Dias
168. ack with a different software gain setting Altering Display Parameters During Continuous SoundTrak Playback While continuous SoundTrak data is playing back the equivalent playback mode Doppler functions Software gain sweep zero line direction audio volume etc are all available The other Doppler functions are not available since the data has already been created If these functions are pressed by the user they get messages displayed saying that they are not available during continuous SoundTrak playback Use the Gain key on the remote control to shift the signal strength up and down the color scale to obtain a more clearly defined spectrum You may also use Ctrl F4 to lower or Shift F4 to raise the gain on the screen display The dB values in the color scale are adjusted appropri ately Set the gain so that the envelope curve closely outlines the Doppler waveform Use the Zero key on the remote control to shift the zero baseline towards the top or bottom of the window You may also use Ctrl F3 to lower or Shift F3 to raise the zero baseline on the screen display Use the Sweep key on the remote control to adjust the time scale of the horizontal axis in the Doppler window You may also use Ctrl F8 to decrease or Shift F8 to increase the sweep speed Use the Direction key on the remote control to change the displayed blood flow direction You may also use the F4 key on the keyboard or simply
169. ademarks of Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare PR i Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Nicolet system warranty Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare warrants that each product we sell you shall conform to its product specifica tions as defined in the user documentation If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period we will repair or replace it without charge If in our judg ment we are unable to do so you may return it to us and we will refund your money Warranty period The warranty period is as stated in the original quotation bid or tender or terms and conditions governing the purchase and installation of the product If you install the product the warranty period begins on the date of invoice If we install the product the warranty period begins on the date of installation but will begin no later than 30 days from the date of invoice The warranty period in the U S A is 12 months from the date of installation The warranty period for products sold outside the U S A and Canada is 12 months from the date of installation or 14 months from the date of shipment whichever is less PR ii Limit of warranty Misuse accident modification unsuitable physical or operating environment improper mainte nance or damage caused by a product for which we are not responsible may void the war ranty Certain components may have separat
170. ading multiple windows When multiple WinTCD windows are open on the screen display you can cascade them which allows you to quickly choose a window for viewing Figure 1 Method 1 1 Click on Window Figure 2 2 Click on Cascade 3 Go to the next page for instructions on selecting a window for viewing on the screen Method 2 1 Using the Right mouse key click on the bottom control bar Figure 3 2 Click on Cascade Windows Figure 4 3 Go to the next page for instructions on selecting a window for viewing on the screen Multiple Window Screen Displays SCREEN 1 SCREEN 4 L Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically v 1 Reviewing monitoring data for test v 2 Acquiring monitoring data Figure 2 Click on Window and then on Cascade Figure 1 Cascading multiple WinTCD windows allows you to quickly select a window for viewing In the top figure Window 1 is currently in the front for viewing while in the lower figure Window 3 has been moved to the front for viewing Cem eds i I i Wrei KKH Astar mf Nic Vue ted __ B Win TCD Raviewing TRAM W Figure 3 Click the Right mouse on the bottom control bar Cascade Windows Tile Windows Horizontally Tile Windows Vertically Minimize All Windows T
171. al display window Figure 2 In addition to the mouse pointer changing the spectral display will be redrawn with the envelope curves switched off Recal Values 2 Cursors Recal Values 3 Cursors General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 1 Spectral Window Right Click Menu Figure 2 Recalculate Values Spectral Cursor Mouse Pointer Finally the parameter boxes for the values will switch to the color green to indicate manually calculated values See Figure on next page Note The Manual Recalculation Modes are only available in the freeze and review spectral display windows They are not available in the real time sweeping spectral display window Note When multichannel spectral records are present the Manual Recalculation Mode must be activated on an individual channel basis Using the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors Mode This section explains how Horizontal Velocity cursors may be used to allow manual recalcu lations of the parameter values using the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors mode Once the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors mode is activated it is possible to set two cursors or four in the case where above and below the zero line measurements are needed in the spectral display window in a similar way to the general cursor mode explained previously While the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors mod
172. ale offset zero Adjust the sample volume depth Adjust the sample volume length Adjusting the M Mode channel bands Adjust the M Mode display gain Adjust the M Mode color display range Inverting the color M Mode velocity scale Toggling the M Mode flow direction coding Selecting the M Mode color display palette Toggling the M Mode display enhancement Freezing the spectral M Mode display Saving the spectral M Mode display Post processing the color M Mode display Table of Contents S16 3 S16 4 S16 5 S16 6 S16 7 S16 8 S16 8 S16 9 S16 9 S16 10 S16 10 S16 11 S16 12 S16 12 S16 12 S16 13 S16 14 S16 15 S16 16 S16 17 S16 18 TOC xix Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S17 Using the External Inputs and Outputs This chapter describes the external audio input and output facilities which allow the Doppler audio signals to be recorded to an external DAT recorder and played back in at a later time The chapter also describes the external curve input and output facilities which allow analog curve signals to be interchanged with other systems In addition the Continuous SoundTrak recording facility is described Index TOC xx Description of Audio Inputs and Outputs Creating Audio I O Settings Loading Settings and Protocols with External Connections Using the Record Mode Using the Playback Mode Description of Analog Curve Inputs and Outputs Creating Curve I O Settings Defining Anal
173. ancement 16 16 S16 18 M Mode Display Palette 16 16 S16 18 M Mode display software license 16 3 M Mode Flow Direction Coding 16 18 M Mode Velocity Scale Direction S16 16 S16 18 Main Window S2 9 S5 6 S6 7 main window S5 5 S6 6 mains fuses H1 5 Mains Power Supply H3 11 H4 12 Mains Supply Specifications H6 7 Manualassignment S5 3 S7 4 Manual of Doppler Embolic Signal Detection 7 31 S8 29 Manually Recalculating Values S8 16 Markers 7 33 S8 55 markers 5 15 Maximize button S11 7 Maximizing a window S2 10 S11 7 maximum file size 14 5 S17 20 maximum file size limit S17 19 Maximum Y scale ranges S5 20 S8 41 S8 49 S17 15 MD Contract Depths S7 9 S16 11 MD Expand Depths 87 9 S16 11 MD Link On S16 10 MD Mode S7 6 Mean S5 18 S8 16 Mean Mean Velocity S5 11 S5 12 S6 12 S6 13 S7 27 Mean box S7 27 Measurement Uncertainties H6 8 Measurements and Weights Specifications H6 7 Measuring Time Differences in the SoundTrak Data S8 36 Menus S3 1 MG S12 10 Microvascular 1 3 microvascular 15 3 Microvascular license 15 3 Microvascular Option S15 1 microvascular pod preamplifier H5 5 Microvascular pods H5 4 microvascular probes H3 9 H4 9 Minimize button S11 8 Minimizing a window S11 8 Minimum and Maximum Y scale ranges S5 20 S8 41 S8 49 17 15 MK2 hardware S7 10 S7 19 mobile telephones H1 10 Mode Change S5 14 S5 21 S8 42 S8 50 Monitor H5 3 monitor is blank H5 7 Monitoring
174. and then on Save Configuration Clearing Cursor Background At times the cursor values may be difficult to read if the numbers are written directly over the curve data For this reason it is possible to clear the background data for the cursor value by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the curve display data and then selecting Clear Cursor Background from the menu The background may be toggled back on by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the curve display data and then selecting Display Cursor Background from the menu Hiding Cursors All the different types of curve cursors may be temporarily removed from the display by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the curve display data and then selecting Hide Cursors from the menu The cursors may be toggled back on by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the curve display data and then selecting Show Cursors from the menu Note The Hide Cursors and Show Cursors functions are only available when the General Cursor Mode is switched off Calculating the Vasomotor Reactivity VMR The vasomotor reactivity VMR which is based on Ringelstein et al can be calculated from the mean curve using three cursors Horizontal curve cursors or Average curve cursors in the trend display to define the areas of normocapnia hypercapnia and hypocapnia Figure 1 In addition the calculation can be done in a simplified form only using two cursors normocapnia and hypercapnia
175. annel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 x Cancel Figure 3 External Connections dialog box analog input tab Creating Curve I O Settings continued 4 There are eight available inputs and eight available outputs which correspond with the RCA connectors on the analog connection box Activate the desired signal s for the inputs or outputs by clicking the mouse on the combo box selection arrow to the right of the white boxes for the appropriate numbered connec tor and choosing the signal from the list of available signals Figures and 2 5 When all signals have been configured as desired click on OK to activate the external connections 6 Once the required external connections have been assigned and loaded the settings should be saved by saving the active setting or protocol file with the Save or Save As functions in either the Settings or Protocol menus Using the External Inputs and Outputs Note The choices available for each combo box list are dependent on the configuration of the user definable items as well as on the present system setting number of channels etc Figure 1 shows an example list with two user defined analog inputs Figure 2 shows an example list of analog outputs for a 1x4 MD channel setting Note If audio inputs or outputs are also assigned then the total number of available channels is reduced Note In order to create the list of user defined analog
176. aphics report page button layout layout 6 Using the Up Down Arrow Pato Nane Den ohn owe ee buttons select the Relative PEIES ETE aen ei SR ESO soy Depth 7 Using the Up Down Arrow buttons choose on which page row and column you want the saved spectral display to appear Figure 3 Only those saved records associated with steps set to Print step in report step 4 above will be tne included in the report Figure 4 Conclusion report page layout This page is printed automatically at the end of each report if configured S10 10 Editing the common global Protocol settings Right click anywhere inside the Protocol List window Figure 1 2 Click on Common Protocol Settings Figure 2 3 In the Comments Description text entry box type in a short description of the protocol for future reference Figure 3 4 Choose which function s you want to enable by clicking on checkmarking the corre sponding checkboxes e SoundTrak On when protocol is started Checkmark if you want the SoundTrak to turn on automatically when you start the protocol e Search probe at any available socket Checkmark to search the sockets starting with socket 1 until the system locates the probe defined in the current protocol step Leave the checkbox empty if the defined probe type must be plugged into the correct socket as defined in the current protocol step FFT Resolution
177. apshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Ctrl Alt F Squelch Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Diagnostic Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW ICW Curve Recording SoundTrak geat kiet Ctri Alt F Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Monitoring Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on High Frequency Enhance to toggle the HFE Mode Viewing the Spectra You can choose to view the Doppler display without Figure 1 or with Figure 2 spectra If one of the softkeys is labeled Spectra On Off click on that softkey Figure 3 press the corresponding S key on the remote control or Click on Doppler and then on Spectra or Click on the Spectra On Off button WY See Setting the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions in Chapter S5 Performing an Exam a Aa E k CH 1 S1 2 Mh iz PW MCA R Figure 1 Example display with Spectra turned off Ee ene Yew Dap Comgus
178. are rounded off Note For information on how to set Horizontal Curve cursors please refer to the section Setting Horizontal Curve Cursors Saving Recalculated Values The recalculated values and associated cursors may be saved by simply resaving the spectral record It is not necessary to exit the Recalculation mode after saving the values In the case that the recalculation is done in the freeze window saving will automatically close the window If the screen is frozen again the recalculation mode will not be active In the case that the recalculation is done in the pop up review window saving will not automati cally close the window or turn off the recalculation mode The window needs to be closed in the standard way by clicking on the X symbol If the pop up review window is opened again the recalculation mode will no longer be active In the case that the recalculation is done in the standard review window saving will not turn off the recalculation mode If another record is read in the recalculation mode will no longer be active If a record has been manually recalculated and the user would like to turn the automatic enve lope curve calculation back on the user should refer to the following two methods Deactivating the Recalculate Values 2 Cursors Mode The Recalculate Values 2 Cursors Mode for the spectral display can be switched off by Method A 1 Right clicking in the spectral
179. are always assigned with either connectors 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 In other words if a user assigns Audio Ch2A to connector 6 then connector 5 is also assigned Audio Ch2A and visa versa This method ensures that users can not swap the order of the audio signals causing the flow direction to invert when playing the signals back in Note Both audio inputs and outputs cannot be activated at the same time Note Both record and playback settings files can be created for the monitoring mode but only record settings can be created for the diagnostic mode The reason for this is that the playback mode does not make much sense in the diagnostic mode since the place of insonation is not known during playback mode The diagnostic record mode is supported so users who use a VCR to record com plete examinations on video tape can also easily record the audio sound on the tape Audio Chi Audio Ch2 Off Figure 1 Available audio signals Bilateral Monitoring Audio ChiA Audio ChiB Audio Ch1C Audio ChiD Off Figure 2 Available audio signals 1x4 MD Monitoring Note The choices available for each combo box list are dependent on the present system setting number of channels etc Figure 1 shows an example list for a standard bilateral setting Figure 2 shows an example list for a 1x4 MD channel setting 17 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Loading Settings and Protocols with External Conn
180. ascular Pods The Microvascular pods should be cleaned using the following procedure 1 The pre amplifier pod must not be sterilized as this could damage internal components and leave the pod unsafe for further use Clean the pod and cable with a moist cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol or a disinfectant solution lt gt CAUTION Do not immerse the pod in liquid as this could damage internal components Sterilizing 16 MHz and 20 MHz Probes The 16 MHz and 20 MHz probes can be sterilized using one of the following two procedures in the next column Note Where ever appropriate follow the sterile practice guide lines of your institution and the instructions from the manufac turer of the sterilizing unit However NEVER exceed the temperature listed in the follow ing procedures lt I gt CAUTION Always separate the EME microvascular pod preamplifier from the probe before sterilizing the probe Never autoclave the microvascular pod preamplifier or immerse the pod in a liquid Care and Maintenance of the Equipment 1 Autoclave at 134 Celsius 273 Fahrenheit for 3 minutes For the cool down procedure see the time table pertaining to the specific autoclave unit being used Remove the transducer from the autoclave and cool to room temperature 2 Autoclave at 121 Celsius 250 Fahrenheit for 15 minutes For the cool down procedure see the time table pertaining to the
181. ask Manager Properties Figure 4 Click on Cascade Windows 11 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Selecting a cascaded window for viewing You can use any of these methods to select a cascaded window for viewing Method 1 1 Click on the Title Bar of the window you want to bring forward for viewing Figures 1 and 2 Method 2 1 Click on the Window menu and then click on Next Acquisition or Review Window Figure 3 Also see Maximizing a window later in this A chapter S11 4 or ne Msc eaae Figure 1 To bring focus the Doppler window forward for viewing as shown in Figure 2 click anywhere on that window i a e u M E T O is es NETO esra oo Figure 2 The window hidden in Figure 1 is now focused brought into full view Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically J 1 Reviewing monitoring data for test v 2 Acquiring monitoring data Figure 3 Click on Window and then on Next Acquisition or Review Window to bring the next window into view focus Tiling multiple windows horizontally When multiple windows are open on the screen display Figure 1 you can choose to tile them horizontally so the windows can be viewed simultaneously This feature is particularly useful for visually com
182. ate your desired data folder and double click on it 12 Double click on Export 12 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Capturing Screens Screen dumps can be made from the WinTCD software for use in PowerPoint or other media presentations In order to capture a screen display for further use 1 Activate the WinTCD program in either the acquire or review mode 2 From the Event List double click on the saved image you wish to capture or just set up the display with the data you want to capture 3 Hold down the Shift key and simultaneously press the Print Screen Prt Sc Sys Rq key in upper right part of your keyboard key 4 Minimize NicVue and WinTCD 5 Click on Start 6 Click on Programs 7 Click on Accessories 8 Click on Imaging 12 14 9 In the upper left hand corner of the screen click on the white icon beneath File to open a new document 10 Click on JPG File 11 Click OK 12 At the top of the screen click Edit 13 Click on Paste 14 A message appears saying the image in the clipboard is larger than the image Click Yes to resize the image 15 Click on File 16 Click Save As 17 Enter a File name 18 Click Save This process will save these files as jpg in the My Documents folder Chapter S13 Help Menu About WinTCD 13 3 This chapter describes the Help menu function Exam Information S13 4 About WinT
183. ation and then on User Definable Items User Definable Items S Event Markers l Event Markers Analog Curve Inputs Label Injection Remove Diamox Biting it Sneeze Embolus Artifact Probe Bump Figure 2 S Event Marker List User Definable Items S Event Markers Event Markers Analog Curve Inputs Ad Label State Hyperventilation Start Stop Remove Sleep Begin End X Clamp On oft Edit Move Up OK PRREE ll Figure 3 I Event Marker List User Defined Marker Name and state information Hyperventilation Figure 4 User Defined Marker S5 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Trend window The Trend window Figure 1 is used to display the long term monitoring curves of user selected Doppler parameters information Note The Trend window is always displayed on the screen unless the Spectral window is increased to its maximum height or the Event list is increased to its maximum width See Reviewing the Trend Data in Chapter S8 WW Continue with the next page S5 16 D Acquiring data for Jo HEF Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help sgal Malee eee GECEDEN AEN vw A a eee D Dastart I Nic Vue Ew fairing 9 09 A M Figure 1 Screen display with the Trend Window Note At the far right sid
184. ation values are stored in the settings file if the setting is saved so the calibration procedure is usually only needed the first time the external device is used Configure Fast Curves channel channel re Scale Limits External Inputs Colors inimum Jr Units 7 Calibrat oF 3 Vol mmHg Lele Lele la la SHEESH ET fale o oO o o mj O o O LEELELEE JES Figure 1 Click on checkmark each of the external inputs you want displayed and then click on Signal Calibration Name Input X Assignment Selection In a two step process set your external system to known output levels select the corresponding scale values in the boxes below to match the input voltages and assign the values A lower limit usually the minimum scale value and an upper limit usually the maximum scale value must be set Input voltage 7020 Assign input voltage to corresponding upper scale value Upper Scale 10 00 A Assign Upper Value Current Assignment 1 020 V 10 00 CO2 Assign input voltage to corresponding lower scale value Lower Scale _ 000 ff Assign Lower Value Current Assignment 0 015 V 0 00 CO2 Calibration result l Calibration OK Y 10 001 X 0 015 OK Cancel Figure 2 Signal Calibration dialog for curve inputs lt I gt CAUTION When different models of external devices are used for a certain
185. ave Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Toggle PW CW Ctrl P Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean F9 F6 F8 Ctrl D Monitoring Mode Save Spectral Snapshot Fi Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Toggle PW CW Probe Ctrl P F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctrl Alt F Ctrl H Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean F9 F6 F8 Ctrl D Diagnostic Mode Figure 2 Click on Toggle PW Choose the flow velocity scale units You can choose to display the data using scale units of centime ters per second cm s or kilohertz kHz as illustrated in Figure 1 Note The Doppler Parameter boxes will display in whichever units are selected To change the scale units either 1 Press the F8 key on the keyboard or 2 If there is a softkey labeled Units click that key Figure 2 or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control or 3 Click on Doppler and then on Units Or 4 Click on the Change Scale Units button
186. aving On Off v 2 Function Indicator On Off v 3 Function Filter Up S4 Function Filter Down S5 Function Units cm sec kHz Cancel Figure 2 The five remote control S keys can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window in a similar way to the footswitch Choose the Vessel Labels You can label the Doppler window s with the corresponding vessel label which then will remain permanently with the spectral display Method 1 1 Click on Doppler Figure 1 2 Click on Vessel Labels 3 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 Method 2 1 If a softkey is labeled Vessel Labels click on that softkey Figure 2 or press the corre sponding S key on the remote control 2 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 Method 3 1 Click on the Show Vessel Label List button 2 Click on the desired Vessel Label Figure 3 Preparing the System for Monitoring Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Ctri Alt F Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta
187. ayback settings 1 In the acquire mode load the protocol or settings file which you want to use or create a new settings or protocol file and set the system up the way you want it 2 Select the External Connec tions menu point out of the Configuration menu Figure 1 3 Click on the analog outputs tab to configure the audio output channels for a record setting Figure 2 or click on the analog inputs tab to configure the audio input channels for a playback setting Figure 3 Refer to the explanation on the next page Note The external connections dialog box is only available in the acquire mode and only before any data has been saved 17 4 Configuration Configure Event List Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Configure External Connections Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on the Configuration menu and then on the External Connections menu point diagnostic and monitoring examples Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Outputs Channel 1 Audio CHIA f Channel 2 Audio CHIA f gt Channel 3 AudioCHiB fY Channel 4 AudioCHiB fY Channel 5 Env CH1A__ PA Channel6 Env CHiB _fr Channel 7 Channel 8 Env CH2B _Jr ox Configure External Connect
188. ayed in the Trend window Figure 2 e Mode Change e Doppler Settings e Save Events H LT S e User Defined Events Event types which are not checked will just be displayed as a tick at the top of the display with no text Toggle scale sharing 3 Check the Scale Sharing function to toggle the scale sharing on This will allow more than one trend curve to be displayed in the same scale section of the trend Leave the box unchecked to force each trend curve to have its own scale section in the trend S8 42 Toggle background grid 4 Check the Show Background Grid function to toggle the background grid for the trend on and off Leave the box unchecked to hide the grid 5 When finished making your selections click on OK Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 1 Click on Display Options Trend Display Options Indicators Curve Recording etc Depth PW CW Scale etc Auto and Manual Save events H LT S User Defined Event Markers Scale Sharing Identical curves share same section of display Show Background Grid aa Cancel Figure 2 Make your choices by clicking on checkmarking the desired option s Choosing the Trend Curves time scale display You can choose from eight time scales with which the Trend data will
189. back Mode Indicator Green Arrow Adjusting the Scale The scale key on the remote control also adjusts the scale setting during the playback mode but instead of adjusting the pulse repetition frequency of the Doppler the scale key adjusts the rate at which the data is read in The same scale setting which was used in the record mode should be used in the playback mode This setting can be found by adjusting the scale during the playback mode and watching the spectral display until everything looks normal When incorrect scale settings are used there will be multiple images of the Doppler spectral data or aliasing problems If audio data from an old EME system TC2020 TC4040 Companion I or Companion II is being played back then the PRF scale set will need to be changed using the s key Audio Playback Scale Set since the scales are not exactly the same in the TC8080 and Companion III systems compared to the older systems Adjusting the Audio Gain The gain key on the remote control also adjusts the gain setting during the playback mode but instead of adjusting the amplification of the Doppler the gain key adjusts the amplification of the audio data being read in The input amplification can be adjusted from 0 up to 20 in steps of 1 Description of Analog Curve Inputs and Outputs The Pioneer TC8080 and Com panion III systems support the ability to read in and display analog curve signals coming fro
190. bes to be used simulta neously e Dual frequency capability e Integrated isolation transformer to allow the display and printer to be powered without the need for an additional isolation transformer e Advanced processor e Extra PCI slots for future expansion PR v Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Features and Benefits Features Renowned EME high sensitivity 1 6 and 2 MHz pulsed wave Doppler probes Combined pulsed and continuous wave Doppler in the 4 and 8 MHz probes Microvascular 16 MHz and 20 MHz option MDD Moce Unique SoundTrak software option Advanced monitoring and trending program option Advanced H I T S Indicator Multi depth capabilities Easy to use comprehensive remote control Wireless remote control option User programmable function keys on the remote control and footswitch PR vi Benefits Locate signals in the toughest patients and deepest areas For increased utility throughout the body Allows intraoperative microvascular flow evaluation Autoclavable 1 5mm and 2 0mm transducers are available Allows more data to be interpreted in a simple fashion Can aid as a window finder to locate signal on difficult to insonate patients Can aid in the identification of embolic events View a greater number of vessel segments for a wider field of view All Doppler signals from all channels are always available for review and analysis Saves what you hear
191. ble in the present mode of operation Holding the key down will repeat the function Text messages are provided for user feedback Footswitch Configuration Main Window Freeze Window Review Window r Left Switch Function Depth Up Middle Switch Function _ Depth Down v Right Switch Function OK Cancel _ Figure 2 The three footswitch keys on the Footswitch can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window This menu can be accessed by selecting Configure Footswitch out of the pull down Configuration menu S2 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Resizing a window You can resize a window for display on the screen 1 Move the mouse pointer to which ever edge you want to resize until the point changes into the resize symbol Figure 1 2 Hold down the mouse button and then drag the mouse in the desired direction to resize the window Figure 2 3 Release the mouse button when finished aix o EE A Start 11 08 AM Figure 1 Moving a window You can move a window on the display screen to view what may be located behind it or to just organize the displayed elements 1 Move the mouse pointer over the window s Title Bar Figure 3 2 Hold down the mouse button and then drag the mouse in the desired direction Figure 4 3 Release the mouse but
192. c velocity measurement s equal to the largest cursor value s the system sets the mean velocity measurement s equal to the middle cursor value s and the system sets the diastolic velocity measurement s equal to the lowest cursor value s Once these values are set the system recalcu lates the PI and RI values accord ingly as shown in Figure 1 S8 18 Freeze Protocol Step 1 CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L EE ra Recal Values 3 Cursors Units Spectra On Off Figure 1 Recalculating Values using three Horizontal Velocity cursors If the user tries to set more than three Horizontal Velocity cursors on one side of the zero line then the system automatically moves the closest cursor to the new position The Recalculate Values 3 Cursors mode always interprets any cursor changes and automati cally recalculates new values e g Toward and away values are shown when the correct number of Horizontal Velocity cursors are set on both sides of the zero line values are removed if cursors are deleted values are recalculated if a cursor position is moved etc During the time that the system does not have the correct number of cursors the parameter box values are displayed as with the color green Note The cursor values and the resulting PI and RI values are subject to rounding errors at times The values used in the formulas are often of higher precision than those of the displayed cursor values which
193. cading multiple windows S11 3 CD media 814 5 CD player control symbols 8 23 CD player symbols S 8 26 centimeters per second 7 7 change the scale units S7 7 Channel tab S8 49 channelbands S16 6 S16 7 16 15 checkmark S 5 10 S6 11 Choose the common global Protocol settings 10 4 Choose the diagnostic mode protocol S6 3 S7 5 S7 20 Choose the Doppler colors S6 14 Choose the Doppler Data Boxes S6 11 Choose the Doppler Pararameter Box display S5 10 Choose the external inputs to be displayed S8 49 S17 15 Choose the Fast Curves for display 8 49 Choose the flow velocity scale units S7 7 Choose the probe S10 5 Choose the probe mode CW PW S7 6 Choose the system parameter settings S5 3 S7 4 Choose the Trend window curves S5 17 Choose the Vessel Labels S5 7 S6 10 Choose Trend curves for display and curve colors S5 20 S8 41 Choose which Events will be displayed S5 20 Choosing the Fast Curves time scale display 8 51 Choosing the Trend Curves time scale display 8 43 Class 1 typeB H1 9 Class 1 type CF H1 9 cleaning H1 7 Cleaning Standard Transducers H5 4 Cleaning the Equipment H5 3 Cleaning the Microvascular Pods H5 4 Cleaning the Microvascular Transducers H5 4 Clear Cursor Background S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Clearing Cursor Background S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Click 2 3 Clickon 2 3 click on 2 3 Clicking the mouse 2 3 cm s S7 7 cold sterilization agent H1 7 Color S 5 22 S6 14 S10 5 10 12 12 9 colorcod
194. cales with which the Fast Curves data will be displayed This lets you in effect compress the Fast Curve data thus allowing you to view a longer record of the Fast Curve data Choices offered depends on the record length of the data Method 1 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Figure 1 2 Click on the desired time scale 2 5 10 20 or 30 seconds Figure 2 Method 2 1 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Figure 3 2 Click on the desired time scale 2 5 10 20 or 30 seconds Figure 4 Asn Yoo WED rovwen eat Figure 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 3 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Reviewing Data Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 2 Click on the desired time scale Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 4 Click on the desired time scale S8 51 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Moving the Fast Curve data to the end beginning
195. can manually reactivate data saving File Size 610MB 95 Chi DIA Figure 1 Trend Display with Current File Size Indicator 17 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Reaching the Maximum File Size If during an examination the file size goes above 90 of the configured maximum file size a warning message in the color red appears in the message window The message says File Size XXXMB at 9X of maximum defined limit The message with new number repeats each time more data is saved if a least another 1 has been used In the monitoring acquire mode shortly after the first red warning message 90 disappears from the message window a pop up warning dialog appears as shown in Figure 1 The dialog box says File size will soon exceed the maximum defined limit for the selected backup media Data saving will be halted unless you choose to override The user is given the choice of Override or Stop If the user answers Stop to the dialog box the system continues to run and save until the maxi mum file size limit is reached Once this happens the ability to store data is halted Continuous SoundTrak recording and curve saving are automatically turned off The ability to save spectral records is turned off 17 20 Once the maximum file size has been reached another pop up dialog appears as shown in Figure 2 The message says File size has reached maximum defined limit fo
196. ce Index RI are calculations dependent on the accuracy of the MEAN SYS and DIA contained in the tables Since these calculations are non linear it is impossible to state the actual accuracy of measurement for the PI and RI The accuracy of calculations depend on the nature of the signal H6 23 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Horizontal Scale Accuracy The accuracy of the spectral time values horizontal scale of the FFT spectral display is dependent on one adjustable factor the sweep speed and can be calcu lated using the formula in Figure 1 The best case accuracy on the spectral time resolution measure ments result from using the fastest sweep speed The worst case accuracy on the spectral time resolution measurements result from using the slowest sweep speed H6 24 Accuracy of spectral time values Sweep speed 512 Where Accuracy of spectral time values is expressed in seconds Sweep speed full length spectrum is expressed in seconds Example 1 If the full spectral sweep speed is 4 1 seconds then the accuracy of spectral time values 4 1 seconds 512 0 008 seconds Figure 1 Formula for calculating the spectral time value accuracy Note The accuracy of the Spectral Time Cursors are dependent on the accuracy of the Spectral Time Resolution as expressed in the tables The Spectral Time Cursors will have the same accuracy of measurement as the Spectral Time Resolution
197. ck all of the system components and make sure none are missing or damaged refer to the shipping list supplied with the system 2 Place the components on the cart using Figure on the next page for guidance 3 Ensure that the Power Mains Switch 30 is in the O Off position before continuing the set up procedure 4 Set the Power Voltage Selector Switches 2 and 6 to the required voltage for the country in which the TC 8080 is to be used 5 Plug the monitor power lead from the monitor power inlet to a Power Outlet 3 on the back panel Plug the monitor signal lead into the VGA Monitor Signal socket 12 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connec tor jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance H4 10 6 Plug the printer power lead from the printer power inlet to a Power Outlet 3 on the back panel Plug the 25 way Centronics printer cable from the printer to the 25 Way Parallel Printer Socket 11 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 7 Connect the keyboard plug to the Keyboard Socket 8 on the back panel 8 Connect the pointing device mouse or track ball to the Pointing Device Socket 7 on the back panel 9 If the unit is to be connected to a network plug an RJ 45 compatible patch cable int
198. ck on the Layout Matrix radio button that corresponds with the desired number of Column and Rows for the report in which you want to place the Saved Spectral displays Click on the Color or Grayscale radio button accordingly for the type of printout you want Click on the Comments tab Figure 2 If you want to add a Footer Comment to your report click on checkmark the Footer Comment checkbox click inside the Footer Comment text entry box and then type in your comments If you want to add a Conclu sion to your report click on checkmark the Conclusion checkbox click inside the Conclusion text entry box and then type in your conclusion If finished click on Print Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files Graphics Report Configuration Selection Print Layout Comments r Layout Matrix Mode Color O Greyscale Save to File Cancel Figure 1 Click on the Print Layout tab choose the layout matrix for the saved spectral displays and whether you want color or grey scale prints Click on Print when finished Graphic Report Configuration Selection Print Layout Comments v Footer Comment Conclusion Print Save to File Figure 2 Checkmark the Footer Comment and or Conclusion checkboxes and type in the desired information Click on Print when done Note The function bu
199. click on the Blood Flow icon itself When the arrow is red blood flow above the zero line is toward the transducer When the arrow is blue blood flow above the zero line is away from the transducer Use the Volume knob on the remote control to adjust the Audio volume for the running spectral displays You may also use Ctrl F7 to decrease or Shift F7 to increase the volume level Use the Noise Reduction icon to toggle the electronics for the noise reduction in the audio signal When the noise reduction is On button shown as pressed the background hiss will be removed from the sound When the function is toggled Off button shown as not pressed the electronics for the noise reduction are switched off allowing the background hiss This function can also be toggled using the menu point or the s key Reviewing Data Note The Noise Reduction toggle is only available in the systems containing a PCI Board Type 2 Refer to the About menu to determine the board type Note Other display parameters like vessel labels envelopes units display range parameter boxes spectra on off and M Mode display adjustments can also be made Please refer to the sections in this maual explaining these functions for the normal acquire mode The continuous SoundTrak playback mode is essentially the same Note While reviewing Continu ous SoundTrak data user adjust ments to the display like the software gain or M Mode windo
200. click on Protocol Manager Protocol Manager xi Name Time Example Protocol EME Non Protocol Mode EME gt Protocol 1 Protocol 2 Protocol 3 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 03 16 00 09 58 06 AM 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM Load Save Rename Delete Figure 2 Click on the Protocol file you want to delete and then click on Delete WinTCD J Are you sure Deleted data will be irretrievable L OK Cancel Figure 3 Click on OK Return to Figure 2 and click on Exit Chapter S11 Viewing Multiple Window Screen Displays Cascading multiple windows 11 3 This chapter describes how to view multiple windows on the Selecting a cascaded window for viewing S11 4 screen display e Cascade Windows Tiling multiple windows horizontally 11 5 Tile Windows Horizontally e Tile Windows Vertically Tiling multiple windows vertically S11 6 The figure below shows the 3 ee possibilities for viewing multiple ANE a Mado S11 7 window screen displays Minimizing a window S11 8 noona TCD Window 2 WINDOW 1 e g Acquire TCD Window 1 e g Review Cascaded _ WINDOW 1 TCD Window 1 e g Review TCD Window 2 e g Acquire Tiled Horizontally _WINDOW 1 WINDOW 2 TCD Window 1 e g Review TCD Window 2 e g Acquire Tiled Vertically S11 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 11 2 Casc
201. crosshair anywhere inside the Doppler Parameter Box area and then click the Right mouse button Figure 3 Using the mouse highlight the parameter you want to add to or remove from the Doppler Parameter Boxes and then click either the Left or Right mouse button Depth The Depth Parameter Box shows the distance in millimeters of the axial center sample volume from the face of the transducer SV Sample Volume Length The SV Parameter Box shows the sample volume which is the axial length of the area from which the Doppler signals are obtained The larger the sample volume the longer the duration of the pulse bursts and consequently the higher the ultrasound output power See Technical Description of the Sample Volume in Chapter S7 Gain The Gain Parameter Box shows the amplification of the received Doppler signal HW gain Filter The Filter box shows the current high pass filter cutoff frequency in Hz Ampl Amplitude The Ampl Parameter Box shows the current amplitude as a percentage of the maximum system output of the ultrasound signal Preparing the System for Monitoring Power The Power box shows the current ultrasound output as a percentage of maximum TIC TIS Depending on which type of transducer is active the TIC TIS box will display either the TIC or TIS index automatically These indexes are used to provide information to clinical operators at the time of the patient examin
202. ctor e Joystick MIDI socket H6 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Analog Audio I O Specifications Available as an optional acces sory System Feature Specifications Regulatory Compliance Specifications H6 6 Companion III System e Analog Audio Inputs 8 channels Curves or 4 pairs Phase Quad Voltage up to 10Vpp with adjustable gain Input impedance 100 kOhm PRF sample rate compatible with all Companion and Pioneer systems Maximum 31 7 kHz e Analog Audio Outputs 8 channels Curves or 4 pairs Phase Quad Voltage up to 10Vpp Output impedance 100 Ohm e Remote hand controller wired or infrared e Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system environ ment e Interface to Nic Vue patient database e Support for all Windows compatible printers e 12 1 inch 800 x 600 TFT screen with touch screen technology e IBM PS 2 style QWERTY keyboard with integral pointing device e See Chapter H1 Pioneer TC8080 System e Analog Audio Inputs 8 channels Curves or 4 pairs Phase Quad Voltage up to 10Vpp with adjustable gain Input impedance 100 kOhm PRF sample rate compatible with all Companion and Pioneer systems Maximum 31 7 kHz e Analog Audio Outputs 8 channels Curves or 4 pairs Phase Quad Voltage up to 10Vpp Output impedance 100 Ohm e Remote hand controller wired or infrared e Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system envi
203. ctral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Cirl Alt F Ctrl H Shift F9 Ctrl F9 HFE Mode Filter Up Filter Down Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Diagnostic Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Monitoring Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on Boost Mode to toggle the Boost level S7 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Toggling the High Frequency Enhance Diagnostic mode only The High Frequency Enhance HFE mode is a two stage filtering operation which enables better identification of high frequency jets in cerebral blood flow in the diagnostic mode The first filter stage helps reduce wall thump at low frequencies and is applied to the audio as well as the spectral data The second filter stage is the High Frequency Boost filter which is applied ONLY to the displayed colors For frequencies below the break frequency by default 3kHz no enhancement is made After the break frequency a li
204. customer should seek advice from Nicolet prior to such repair or replace ment If this product is in need of repair it should not be used until all repairs have been made and the unit is functioning properly and ready for use The owner of this product has sole responsibility for any malfunction resulting from improper use or maintenance or repair by anyone other than Nicolet and from any malfunction caused by parts that are damaged or modified by anyone other than Nicolet PR iv Function And Intended Application The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system are advanced Transcranial Doppler TCD ultrasound systems which run the WinTCD software package allowing non invasive assessment of blood flow veloci ties throughout the body This method of measurement is particularly useful for examining the major arteries supplying blood to the brain TCD is useful for evaluation of numerous neurologic vascular problems such as vasospasm and intracranial stenosis TCD is also extremely valuable for intraopera tive monitoring to help detect sudden changes in flow and potential embolic events Emboli are small particles of foreign matter air particulate thrombin etc within the bloodstream that can potentially cause obstructions in various arteries in the body and the brain Such obstructions can often lead to stroke The following non invasive methodologies are included e Diagnostic cerebrovascular a
205. d limit patient exposure Major governing bodies in ultrasound have issued statements to the effect that there are no known adverse effects from the use of diagnostic ultrasound however exposure levels should always be limited to As Low As Reasonably Achievable the ALARA prin ciple You can control the ultrasonic power or patient exposure to ultrasound in any of the following three ways e Adjust the pulse strength amplitude e Adjust the duration of the pulse sample volume e Adjust the pulse rate pulse repetition frequency or scale To change these settings for the WinTCD system use the follow ing H1 8 Amplitude The amplitude voltage to transducer setting directly influences the amplitude of the pulse burst A higher setting increases the amplitude resulting in a higher ultrasound output at the transducer Sample The Sample volume is the axial length of the area from which the Doppler signals are obtained The larger the sample volume the longer the duration of the pulse burst and consequently the higher the ultrasound output and power Scale The higher the scale setting the higher the pulse repetition frequency number of pulses per second and consequently higher ultrasound output More pulses per second is equivalent to a higher power output Ultrasound exposure power is measured as an average over time Proper use of these instrument settings can minimize patient e
206. d Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 2 MHz 10mm diameter fone Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Aaprt lt Aaprt gt l oram aaO a a Zs pe__ 0 a E aoa fo a Acoustic aay on je jowof ee Dim of Aaprt xea to jo feo EEE ESS eer f e pene ol a a Other Information unfocused Focal Length o evn e me O o o Operating Conditions a data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 10 Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 2 MHz 15mm diameter Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW non scan non scan Aaprt lt 1 Aaprt gt l ue Index Label Global Maximum Index Value e min of W 3 Z1 ITA 3 Z1 N Assoc Acoustic Parameter p A Dim of Aaprt Information FLx unfocused Focal Length FLy unfocused ccom om O o o l Operating Conditions ewwa f O l data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 e o a indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt 1 H6 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 4 MHz P Operat
207. d Window e Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions Time Scale or eS SS SS SS i 7 Parameter Boxes T gt Intensity Scale dB Event List These 5 keys correspond to the 5 softkeys on the screen display e Set the Footswitch functions e Set the Flow Velocity scale e Choose the Flow Direction e Choose the Doppler Parameter G S DIRECTION DELETE 4 o PRINT MUTE MENU Boxes display e Set the Copy window e Customize the sizes of the Doppler window Trend window Event window and SAMPLE ZERO AMPLITUDE SWEEP lt gt D DEPTH SCALE Copy Window using the mouse and Splitter bars See Custom izing the Window Sizes later in this chapter for information e If displaying the Trend window choose the Trend data you want to view e Configure the Event List window e If you want to use indicator algorithm you can select the default settings e Choose whether you want to display the Doppler in color or gray e Choose which Vessel Labels are selected ing the fast curve window S5 4 Figure 1 Set up the basic screen display to meet your preferences and needs Note Refer to chapter S17 in this handbook for information on configur Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions You can select from a menu of options the functions of the five keys S1 S5 on the Remot
208. d and qualified service engineer before further use Following the safety checks and fault rectification depress the inner button on the circuit breaker reconnect all items and power up If the monitor is blank with yellow Power Saving LED On Check that the monitor signal lead 15 way density and a half D connector is connected to the VGA Monitor Signal Socket on the rear of the unit If the color on the screen is not uniform If the monitor is close to any potential sources of magnetic fields color may not be uniform Try to move the monitor away from the source A degauss cycle is initiated whenever the monitor is switched on and can be manually initiated from the Menu Option on screen display on the monitor If the picture is fuzzy Adjust the brightness contrast and convergence controls A degauss cycle is initiated whenever the monitor is switched on and can be manually initiated from the Menu Option on screen display on the monitor If the mouse does not work Ensure that the mouse connec tor is connected to the Pointing Device Socket 8 Clean the mouse inside and out as described earlier in this chapter If the keyboard does not work Ensure that the keyboard connector is connected to the Keyboard Socket 7 on the rear panel H5 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Servicing the Instrument If User Maintenance is unable to solve a
209. d remain synchronized in time Method 1 1 Press the Freeze key on the Remote Control Figure 1 Method 2 1 Press the F2 key on the keyboard Figure 2 Method 3 1 Click on Doppler and then on Freeze Spectral Snapshot Method 4 1 Click on the Freeze Spectral Snapshot button S16 16 The window focusing inside the pop up freeze window is similar to the normal spectral M Mode display window where the Probe key arrow keys mouse etc can be used to highlight different display windows inside of the pop up freeze window The focussed window gets the keystrokes when the pop up freeze window is active The following post processing functions are available in the pop up freeze window for the frozen M Mode display Software Gain M Mode Depth Range Scale M Mode Depth Scale Offset M Mode Velocity Scale Direction M Mode Color Display Range M Mode Display Palette and M Mode Display Enhancement These should function in a similar way to the real time M Mode display All the data for the M Mode display is available in the Freeze mode so it is also possible to toggle the display of the data using the flow direction toggling as described previously The post processing functions for the frozen spectral displays remain as in previous software releases AMPLITUDE SWEEP DEPTH SCALE Figure 1 Press the Freeze key Figure 2 Pre
210. dance problems On the Pioneer TC8080 system when an external monitor printer or any other electronic piece of equipment is connected to the system it must be pow ered through the main system s power sockets H1 4 lt WARNING On the Pioneer TC8080 system there are separate voltage selectors for the input voltage and the isolated output voltage Particular care must be taken when selecting voltages and this should only be carried out with the mains input cord removed It is possible to have 230V output with 115V selected on the input or 115V output with 230V selected on the input Both voltage selectors should be set to the same value The output frequency will always be the same as the input frequency On the Companion III system when an external monitor printer or any other electronic piece of equipment is connected to the system it must be pow ered via the Portable Isobox If not leakage limits may be exceeded The Nicolet Portable Isobox may be obtained from the suppliers listed in chapter H5 Before use both the system and any accessories should be checked for possible damage The mains cables should be carefully examined If the insulation or plug is damaged an authorized person should replace it immediately Dam aged probes should not be used under any circumstances gt WARNING Improper earthing of the system can result in an electric shock The system must be earthed T
211. default protocol Renaming a protocol file Deleting a protocol file 10 3 S10 4 S10 5 S10 6 S10 8 S10 8 S10 9 S10 9 S10 9 S10 9 S10 10 S10 11 S10 13 S10 13 S10 13 S10 14 S10 14 S10 15 S10 16 This chapter describes how to create new Diagnostic protocols which then can be selected to quickly set up your system for Diagnostic acquisitions S10 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank page 10 2 Creating a new Protocol You can create a new protocol which contains steps you design such as probe type Doppler parameters such as Depth etc The following procedure creates a new Protocol from scratch If you wish you can edit an existing Protocol and then save it under a different name to save time see Saving the edited Protocol later in this chapter 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Create a New Protocol 3 If the Query panel There is already an active Protocol loaded and running Do you want to continue appears click on Yes Figure 2 Creating Diagnostic Protocols Protocol Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol and then on Create a New Protocol f There is already an active Protocol loaded and running Do you want to continue Yes No Figure 2 Click on Yes to continu
212. ding key S1 S5 on the Remote Control or by clicking on the displayed softkey Example If for example the S1 key is currently assigned to the Vessel Labels function and you want to change it to Units use the Right mouse key and click on the Vessel Labels softkey and then click on Units from the options menu The first softkey S1 will now read Units and pressing the S1 key on the Remote Control will alternate the Flow Velocity Scale between cm s and kHz 1 Position the mouse pointer over the softkey displayed towards the bottom of the Acquisition window Figure 2 2 Click the Right mouse button 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected softkey Figure 3 4 Repeat until all five S keys have been assigned a specific function S6 6 Note Alternatively the S keys can be configured by selecting the function Configure S keys out of the Configuration menu In the pop up dialog box a set of S keys can be defined for each of the three operation windows main window freeze window and review window See next page Note You can not assign the same function to multiple S keys with the mouse If you want to reassign a function you must first remove the function from the current key pe EUERE Ere OTSA VessalLapel_ Prove oop SV Power Repor Pox saved Comment meva Eeo rH These 5 keys correspond to the 5 softkeys on the screen d
213. direction from the stored audio signals Make sure that the left and right DAT channels are connected consis tently for both the inputs and the outputs e g Left to connector 1 and right to connector 2 for both the inputs and the outputs H4 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System lt gt CAUTION Make sure you align the red dots in step 1 to guard against damage to the transducer and or system connectors 1 Align the Red dots on both the system sockets 26 and the transducer connectors Figure 1 2 Push the transducer connector straight in all of the way Disconnecting a transducer from the Pioneer TC8080 system Use this procedure to disconnect a transducer from the system lt gt CAUTION Do not pull on the transducer s cable or damage to the transducer and or system may occur 1 Grasp the knurled sleeve of the transducer s connector Figure 2 2 Carefully pull the transducer connector straight out from the system connector H4 8 dot Red dot System model may vary from that which is shown Figure 1 Align the red dots and push the transducer straight into the connector on the system v Figure 2 Grasp the knurled sleeve and pull straight out to remove the transducer Your system s layout and components may differ from the examples shown above and in the remainder of this guide
214. e S10 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Choose the common global Protocol settings 4 Click on the Opt button Figure 1 5 In the Comments Description text entry box type in a short description of the protocol for future reference Figure 2 6 Choose which function s you want to enable by clicking on checkmarking the corre New Protocol Wizard Select a probe and start the Doppler Change the current settings power depth sweep zero line softkeys etc if necessary Add new steps with the current settings Setup common protocol settings that apply to all steps optional Preferably done first before adding any steps since these settings can influence the properties of the steps Please repeat steps 1 and 2 or just step 2 as many times as needed Select the protocol window and click the right mouse button to edit delete or insert steps Finish Cancel sponding checkboxes SoundTrak On when protocol is started Checkmark if you want SoundTrak to turn on automatically when you start the protocol Search probe at any available socket Checkmark to search the sockets starting with socket 1 until the system locates the probe defined in the current protocol step Leave the checkbox empty if the defined probe type must be plugged into the correct socket as defined in the current protocol step FFT Resolution Choose by clicking on one of the th
215. e Control Figure 1 These five keys allow you to quickly execute the chosen function by simply pressing the corresponding key S1 S5 on the Remote Control or by clicking on the displayed softkey Example If for example the S1 key is currently assigned to the Vessel Labels function and you want to change it to Units use the Right mouse key and click on the Vessel Labels softkey and then click on Units from the options menu The first softkey S1 will now read Units and pressing the S1 key on the Remote Control will alternate the Flow Velocity Scale between cm s and kHz 1 Position the mouse pointer over the softkey displayed towards the bottom of the Acquisition window Figure 2 2 Click the Right mouse button 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected softkey Figure 3 4 Repeat until all five S keys have been assigned a specific function Preparing the System for Monitoring Note Alternatively the S keys can be configured by selecting the function Configure S keys out of the Configuration menu In the pop up dialog box a set of S keys can be defined for each of the three operation windows main window freeze window and review window See next page Note You can not assign the same function to multiple S keys with the mouse If you want to reassign a function you must first remove the function from the current key val Marr
216. e between T moo p e E Ba any two points on the Spectra by Se eee ELE Figure 1 Click on the first point and hold down the mouse button 1 Selecting the Differential Time while dragging the cursor over the second point and then release the cursor type as described mouse button previously to get the appropri lt TIME T2 T1 gt ate mouse pointer 2 Clicking on the first of two points you want to measure and then holding down the Left mouse button Figure 1 3 Dragging the mouse until the highlighted box is over the Freeze Protocol Step 1 second point and then releasing the mouse button Figure 1 CH 1 S1 4 An H Bar appears between the two points and the differential time T2 T1 value is displayed Mean Figure 2 49 SSE SSS ae Vessel Labels Pe Units Spectra On Off Figure 2 This example illustrates a differential time cursor S8 14 Working With Spectral Cursors This section describes the various functions which are available to edit the different types of spectral cursors Note Up to ten cursor measure ments can be saved in a single spectral display window If you make more than ten measure ments the oldest measurement will be removed from the display Moving Cursors All the different types of spectral cursors may be moved by clicking the left mouse button on a cursor holding down the button and dragging the cursor to a new pos
217. e event and selecting Delete Event out of the menu Figure 2 After a prompt for confirmation the event is deleted permanently from the list and the curve windows It is also possible to delete any saved user defined event by right clicking on the event in a curve window Figure 4 and selecting Delete Event out of the menu Figure 5 User Defined Marker Name and state information Hyperventilation Figure 1 User Defined marker dialog Edit Event Delete Event Show Advanced H I T S Information Configure Event List Show Event List Statistics Figure 2 Right Click Event List Menu Edit Marker Injection Diamox Biting Sneeze Embolus Artifact Probe Bump Edit Marker Hyperventilation Start Hyperventilation Stop Sleep Begin Sleep End X Clamp On X Clamp Off Figure 3 Edit marker lists Figure 4 Right click on the saved event in the Trend window Insert S Marker Insert I Marker Edit Event Delete Event Figure 5 Right click Trend window menu lower section Using Protocols Diagnostic Mode only You can choose any of the previously created Protocols for use during a Diagnostic exam A Protocol is comprised of numer ous steps which can help improve your efficiency while performing a Diagnostic exam See Chapter S6 for instruc tions on creating editing Protocols and choosing a Default Protocol
218. e for Track 3 Transducer Model 16 MHz 2 0mm diameter Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Global Maximum Index Value mo oo f fe Acoustic Parameter Zsp cm en o eooo i e Dim of Aaprt irom e tefl pr PlImax Mpa deq PlIImax Other Information FLx cm Focal Length FLy cm Operating Conditions data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 5 5 S P Ai indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 20 MHz 1 5mm diameter fone Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Aaprt lt Aaprt gt l oran aaO a a Zs E E ls pomama fo S Acoustic a a eooo oe ee Dim of Aaprt O See jo feo e EEE ESS eer f e pene ol Eere aa Other Information Focal Length o oom e C Operating Conditions wwa data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 18 Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 20 MHz 2 0mm diameter Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW non scan non scan Aaprt lt 1 Aa
219. e is active the system constantly inspects the spectral display to see if 2 valid Horizontal Velocity cursors all on the same side of the zero line have been set Other types of cursors are ignored As soon as two valid Horizontal Velocity cursors are found on one or both sides of the zero line the system sets the systolic velocity measurement s equal to the largest cursor value s and the system sets the diastolic velocity measurement s equal to the lowest cursor value s The mean velocity measurement is calcu lated according to the formula Mean 1 3 Systole 2 3 Diastole Once these values are set the system recalculates the PI and RI values accordingly as shown in Figure 1 Freeze Protocol Step 1 CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L Reviewing Data 49 Depth Mean SSS SS SSS Recal Values 2 Cursors Units Spectra On Off Figure 1 Recalculating Values using two Horizontal Velocity cursors If the user tries to set more than two Horizontal Velocity cursors on one side of the zero line then the system automatically moves the closest cursor to the new position The Recalculate Values 2 Cursors mode always interprets any cursor changes and automati cally recalculates new values e g Toward and away values are shown when the correct number of Horizontal Velocity cursors are set on both sides of the zero line values are removed if cursors are deleted values are recalculated if a cursor positi
220. e of the title bar in the trend display a real time file size indicator has been added Figure 2 so users are always in formed of their file size Refer to section S17 in this manual for more information on Keeping Track of File Size during monitoring examina tions Trend Window File Size 610MB 95 Ch1 DIA Figure 2 Trend Display with Current File Size Indicator Choose the Trend window curves You can choose to have the Trend window display the long term monitoring curves of designated Doppler parameters Figure 1 The Trend window Figure 1 can display up to 11 trend curves per channel specified via the Config ure Trend panel Figure 2 When the trend curves reach the right side of the Trend window they are shifted towards the left edge of the window Tick marks appear when events occur and when Doppler param eters are changed during the examination You can choose any combination of the six choices for display flowing toward or away from the transducer e Systole e Diastole e Mean e PI Pulsatility Index e RI Resistance Index H I T S Each choice can be assigned one of eight possible colors Like wise you can set the minimum and maximum Y axis scales with which the selected trend curves will be displayed as well as choose which types of events you want displayed Curves with the same scale limits will share the same scale in the trend otherwise they will have their own s
221. e p v Fast Curve Window Figure 3 Click on View and then on Toolbar A check mark Enabled S5 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Copy Window The Copy window Figure 1 displays saved Spectral Snap shots It holds the last 20 saved spectral display records and can be scrolled forwards and back wards to view them Note The Copy window is always displayed on the screen unless the Spectral window is increased to its maximum width or the Event List is increased to its maximum height S5 14 Set the Event List window The Event List window Figure 2 is used to log the types of events for which you want the system to monitor All of the events are saved the configuration just filters what you will view on the screen display Note The Event List window is always displayed on the screen unless the Trend window is increased to its maximum width or the Copy window is increase to its maximum height 1 Right click anywhere inside the Event List window Figure 2 2 Click on the Configure Event List button Figure 3 3 Click on the events you want logged into the Event List window Figure 4 e Mode Change e Doppler Settings e Save Events e H LT S e User Defined Events Note Alternatively the event list can be configured by selecting the function Configure Event List out of the Configuration menu EF vea Maer eE
222. e scales Window sizes Display events Cursors 1 Click on Configuration Figure 2 2 Click on Save Configuration Reviewing Data D Reviewing monitoring data for Doe John D ajx Exam View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help E HE wsi N a E Start I Nic Vue Wit N iewi 9 09 A M Labels Figure 1 The Fast Curve window displays the Envelope Towards and Away curves This example shows only the Envelope Towards curve has been selected for display Scale Time Scale Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 2 Click on Configuration and then on Save Configuration S8 47 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Configure the Fast Curve display You can choose to view the Envelope Toward and or Enve lope Away curves set the Fast Curves Y axis scales and which events you want displayed in the Fast Curve window Method 1 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair anywhere inside the Fast Curve window Figure 1 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Click on Curve Configuration Figure 2 3 Go to the next page Method 2 1 Click on Configuration Figure 3 2 Click on Configure Fast Curves 3 Click on Curve Configuration Figure 4 4 Go to the next page
223. e that both flow toward and away from the probe are configured the stronger signal is selected for display To take into account the overlap ping between channel bands and the tailing off of the signal strength at the edges of the sample volume some additional image processing is needed to optimize the M Mode image Using the Color M Mode Display Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 52mm 84mm Depth Figure 1 Unidirectional Color M Mode display window The eight possible channel bands in the M Mode display are expanded out to include additional bands between the true bands These additional bands extra depth settings are based on data which is interpolated from the two adjacent bands Three different types of depth interpolation are provided to the user to choose from These are a no interpolation option a Display Enhancement A option and a Display Enhancement B option See section Toggling the M Mode Display Enhancement S16 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Highlighting the appropriate window In the non M Mode monitoring settings the Probe key on the remote control can be used to select the spectral channel which will receive the keystrokes for adjustments like Depth or Zero Line This functionality has been slightly changed to account for the new style of spectral display window introduced along with the M Mode display When a special M Mode setting is act
224. e trend curves time scale display Jumping to the end start of the trend data Scrolling through the trend data Zooming in on the trend data Unzooming the trend display Reviewing fast curve data Monitoring Mode Only Saving the fast curve configuration Configure the fast curve display Choose the fast curves for display and curve colors Set the fast curve scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the fast curve display options Choose which events will be displayed Toggle scale sharing Toggle background grid Choosing the fast curves time scale display Moving fast curve data to end start of the trend data Scrolling through the fast curves data Zooming in on the fast curves display Unzooming the fast curves display Saving Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Saving Custom Markers Editing Event Markers Deleting Event Markers Using the general cursor mode curve displays Activating the general cursor mode Recognizing the general cursor mode Selecting the cursor type Deactivating the general cursor mode Setting horizontal curve cursors Setting differential time cursors Setting vertical curve cursors Setting average curve cursors Working with curve cursors Moving cursors Resizing cursors Deleting individual cursors Deleting all cursors Continued on next page S8 42 S8 42 S8 43 S8 44 S8 45 S8 46 S8 46 S8 47 S8 47 S8 48 S8 49 S8 49 S8 49 S8 5
225. e warranty periods as stated in the product user docu mentation Consumables are not covered under warranty THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY AND FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILI TIES ON THE PART OF NICOLET WHETHER IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER WISE NICOLET SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR AND DIS CLAIMS ALL CONSEQUEN TIAL INCIDENTAL AND CONTINGENT DAMAGES Items not covered by warranty We do not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of a product We provide certain non Nicolet products on an as is basis Non Nicolet manufacturers or suppliers may provide their own warranties to you Separate software warranty is provided with software user documentation Nicolet software warranty Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare warrants that the physical media e g diskettes shall be free of malfunction in labor and materials for a period of ninety 90 days from the invoice date If the physical media containing the software is defective Nicolet will replace it without charge This is your sole remedy for product malfunctions In no event will Nicolet s liability exceed the price paid for the software regardless of the form of the claim Nicolet does not warrant that the software will operate uninter rupted or error free NICOLET MAKES
226. e with wired remotes inc RS232 PC card X2 P002 Pioneer only e Cherry Mini Keyboard M2 0491 e Keyboard including trackball M2 0445 e Microsoft Intellimouse Mouse e Analog Connection Box 8 Inputs 8 Outputs 340 S A 02 e Analog Connection Kit 8 Inputs 8 Outputs 340 SA 19 Pioneer only e Analog Connection Kit 8 Inputs 8 Outputs 340 SA 04 Companion only e Knurr Pioneer Cart inc Drawer X9 0126 e Knurr Cart Rear Cover M1 P001 e TFT Monitor Pioneer only e 17 Color Monitor MN 0012 Pioneer only e Hewlett Packard Color Printer inc Leads RC 0029 e Stereo Headphones M2 0495 e Service Manual Pioneer M7 P002 e Service Manual Companion H2 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Optional Accessories continued e Reader Station Software X9 0127 Pioneer amp Companion e Dual Headband for 15mm Probe X2 P006 e Single Headband for 15mm Probe X2 P007 e Dual Headband for 10mm Probe X2 P012 e Single Headband for 10mm Probe X2 P008 e Single 15mm Probe Holder Attachment X2 P009 e Single 10mm Probe Holder Attachment X2 P010 e Pack of 10 Headband Cushion Pads and 5 Velcro Top Straps M2 0496 H2 10 Chapter H3 Companion Ill System Labels and Symbols H3 3 This chapter provides information concerning the assembly and set Rear View of Companion III H3 4 up of the Companion III system Front Quarter View of Companion III H3 5 Connecting Accessories H3 6 Connecting the Keyboard H3 6 Connecting the Point
227. ead Only 10 13 Read Only file 10 13 Reading calculations from the Doppler boxes 7 26 Reading in H I T S Events 8 35 Reading in Manually Saved Records 8 35 Reading the intensity scale 7 28 Rear View of the Companion III H3 4 Recal Values 2 Cursors S8 16 S8 19 Recal Values 2 Cursors Off S8 19 Recal Values 3 Cursors S8 16 S8 19 Recal Values 3 Cursors Off S8 19 recalculated values 12 5 Recognizing the Calculate VMR Mode S 8 63 Recognizing the General Cursor Mode S8 9 S 8 57 Recognizing the Recalculate Values Mode S8 16 Reconfiguring the Maximum File Size 17 19 record H2 7 17 3 17 5 record continuous SoundTrak data 17 18 Record Mode Indicator 17 7 record symbol 17 7 Recording Stop marker S8 24 recording time 17 18 rectangle 8 32 reddot 17 7 red recording symbol 17 6 redtext S17 6 S17 18 Regulatory Compliance H1 3 Regulatory Compliance Specifications H6 6 reinstall the system software H1 7 Rel Depth S10 6 Relative Depth S10 10 Relative Depth step S10 6 remote H4 6 remote control H2 3 Remote Control Functions 3 16 Remote control functions 3 16 Remote Control S1 S5 key functions S5 5 S6 6 S8 6 Remote Hand Controller H2 3 Remove S5 15 S17 12 Remove Cursor Units S8 15 8 38 Rename S9 6 S10 15 Renaming a Protocol file 10 15 Renaming a Settings file S9 6 S10 15 Replay SoundTrak S8 22 Replaying Continuous SoundTrak Data 8 24 Replaying SoundTrak data S8 22 r
228. ease the mouse button Figure 3 shows the Splitter Bars which can be used to resize the various windows Also see the next page for additional methods which WW can be used to resize the windows S5 8 Pea EEEREN Curva Recording ONON Soundtr ONON Ewop Speca ONO T D NH WinTCO Acqurng Tall Figure 1 Click and hold down the Left mouse button on the Splitter Bar and then drag the mouse to left or right to resize the window aon EN Gu Para SES uNa ENG Woo WT 00 hoara TOA Figure 2 After enlarging the window the Spectral data is more easily inspected Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help Sl Ti kealrl 2 Fra 1S Ap pectra On O CAStart M Nic Vue liring M Figure 3 This example shows some of the various Splitter Bars which can be used to resize specific windows Splitting the windows horizontally 1 Either a click anywhere in the Trend window or b press the Window button on the Remote Control until the Trend window is in focus title bar highlighted in blue next click on Window and then on Move Horizontal Splitter Figure 3 Either a drag the mouse until the focused window is sized as desired and then click the mouse button or b press the Up Down Arrow buttons on either the Remote Control
229. ections User defined settings and protocol files which use external connec tions can be loaded in the exact same way as normal settings and protocol files which was ex plained in Chapter S7 of this manual The only difference with the settings and protocol files containing external connections is that these are color coded in the list of available configuration files Figures and 2 The record file names are written in red text and the playback file names are written in green text The normal configuration files are written in white text The record file entries also get a red recording symbol next to the name and the playback file entries get a green play symbol next to the name 17 6 Note Since the system is already operating with a certain configu ration when the new external settings are loaded the system may need to switch modes record playback to activate the assigned channels The presence of probes is checked when switching from a playback setting to anon playback setting No check is necessary if the system switches to playback mode since the system does not require probes in the playback mode Note The probe settings are contained in the configuration file even if the file is a playback setting since this information is used to properly set up the system for correct probe frequencies etc In addition to the frequency of operation for each channel the hardware gain of the input amplifiers
230. ed focussed it is possible to select the way the M Mode displays the depth scale By using the Direction key on the remote control or the F4 key on the keyboard it is possible to invert the M Mode display so the display is low to high or high to low Toggling the M Mode flow direction coding In the case that only flow in one direction is of interest users have the ability to configure the system to ignore the data coming from the other flow direction or if the flow direction is irrelevant then a total power mode is also available When the M Mode display is highlighted focussed it is possible to select the way the M Mode display codes the flow direction By using the Display Options S Key on the remote control or the F6 key on the keyboard it is possible to toggle through the available options Flow Towards or Away Flow Towards Only Flow Away Only Unidirectional Total Power The algorithm for the M Mode display uses only the data from the selected sides of the spectral display windows for its calcula tions The color scales in the M Mode display are toggled accordingly See Figures and 2 The envelope curves and flow direction configured on the spectral displays are completely independent of the M Mode flow direction coding Using the Color M Mode Display Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 52mm 84mm Depth Y 50 Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 5
231. ed methods to accomplish this task The more popular method Recalculate Values 3 Cursors 1s based on manually setting three horizontal cursors on one side of the zero line one for the systolic velocity one for the mean velocity and one for the diastolic velocity The other method Recalculate Values 2 Cursors is based on manually setting two horizontal cursors on one side of the zero line one for the systolic velocity and one for the diastolic velocity In this case the mean value is calculated mathemati cally The following sections describe the special user modes which are similar to the General Cursor mode with Horizontal Velocity cursors to allow manual recalcu lations of the parameter values using either of the above methods in a spectral display window S8 16 Activating the Recalculate Values Mode The Recalculate Values Mode for the spectral displays can be switched on by Method A 1 Right clicking in the spectral display window 2 Clicking on either function Recal Values 2 Cursors or Recal Values 3 Cursors Figure 1 Method B 1 Clicking on one of the s keys Recal Values 2 Cursors or Recal Values 3 Cursors Recognizing the Recalculate Values Mode When the Recalculate Values Mode for a spectral display window is active the mouse pointer will change into a special cursor type pointer Horizontal Velocity when the mouse is positioned in the data section of the spectr
232. ed S 16 7 S17 6 color display range 16 12 Color M Mode display window S16 6 Color M Mode image S16 7 Color mode 2 S5 22 S6 14 color on the screen is not uniform H5 7 column 10 6 columnrate S17 16 Comment checkbox 12 7 S12 9 Comment column S6 19 comment description 10 6 Comments tab 12 9 Common Protocol Settings S10 11 CompanionI S17 8 Companion II 17 8 Companion IMLE 82 4 Companion III System Box H5 4 Companion III System Design PR v Complete step S10 6 Conclusion checkbox 12 5 12 7 S12 9 Conclusion text entry box 12 7 12 9 confidence 7 31 Configuration 8 40 S8 48 configuration files 12 1 Configure Event List S5 14 Configure Fast Curves S8 48 Configure Footswitch S5 6 S6 7 Configure S keys 5 5 S5 6 S6 6 S6 7 Configure the Fast Curve display S8 48 Configure the Trend curves display S8 40 Configure the User Defined Event Marker Lists S5 15 Configure Trend 5 19 S8 44 Configuring Separate Scales S8 58 S8 64 Configuring the Display for External Curve Inputs 17 14 Configuring the Indicator settings 7 31 Connect and activate the probe s 7 3 Connect the probe s 7 3 Connecting a set of Headphones 3 7 H4 7 Connecting Accessories H3 6 H4 6 Connecting an External DAT Recorder H3 7 H4 7 Connecting an External Printer H3 6 H4 6 Connecting an External VGA Monitor H3 7 H4 7 Connecting Serial Devices H3 7 H4 7 Connecting the Companion III toa Network 3 7 Connecting the
233. ed in white Figure 1 If the step you want to edit is not highlighted in white use the Next Step and Previous Step commands in the Protocol menu or the associated softkeys if assigned those functions at the bottom of the window A step must be active before you can edit it 2 Click on Edit Active Step Figure 2 3 Go to the next page Deleting a step Use this procedure to delete the selected highlighted in blue step You may not delete the active step highlighted in white If the step you want to edit is not highlighted in blue use the Arrow keys or click on the desired step 1 Right click on the step you want to delete Figure 1 2 Click on Delete Step Figure 2 3 When asked if you really want to delete the selected step number click on Yes Creating Diagnostic Protocols EE E z E a REL SS AT RN AN eve virco ewan Figure 1 Right click anywhere in the Protocol List window Add New Step Insert New Step Before Step Delete Step Edit Active Step Common Protocol Settings Figure 2 Click on the desired action 10 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adding inserting editing a Add insert New Step 4 MHz CW step r Vessel name and side CCA Di L M After completing the Add Insert EF m Edit steps on the previous page
234. ee aes These 5 keys correspond to the 5 softkeys on the screen display 1O Mey Figure 1 The softkeys displayed on the screen can be clicked on to execute the action or the corresponding S key on the remote control can be pressed to execute the action sels Te lel Prep S E a Nie vue mr wintco cout TAA Figure 2 Position the mouse pointer over the displayed softkey you want to define and then click the Right mouse button Indicators On Off Envelope Filter Down Filter Up Toggle PW CW SoundTrak On Off Spectra On Off Units Vessel Labels Graphics Report Parameter Boxes Indicators Settings Indicators Reset Count Curve Recording On Off Settings Manager Boost Mode Squelch On Off Flow Separation On Off Export SoundTrak Multi Depths Link On Off MD Expand Depths MD Contract Depths Inc Rx Pulse Width Dec Rx Pulse Width M Mode Display Options Display Range Inc Tx Pulse Width Dec Tx Pulse Width Tx Rx Linkage On Off Calculate VMR H Cursors Calculate VMR A Cursors Audio Playback Scale Set Set Delta Mean S Markers l Markers Noise Reduction Fast Curve Window Figure 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected key List shown is an example from the monitoring mode S5 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the footswitch functions The three footswitch ke
235. eferences as was done with the Horizontal Curve cursors Figure 1 The Average Curve cursors may be set by 1 Selecting the Average Curve cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Clicking on the first of two points where you want the averaging to begin and then holding down the Left mouse button 3 Dragging the mouse until the other end of highlighted box is over the second point where the averaging should end and then releasing the mouse button An H Bar appears defining the start and stop times of the segment to average over and the average values of each curve are calcu lated and displayed using the curve colors Figure 2 Reviewing Data 13 06 00 Figure 1 Average Curve cursor measurements are made with respect to the 0 references _ Trend Window 13 06 00 Figure 2 This example shows a single Average Curve cursor S8 61 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Working With Curve Cursors This section describes the various functions which are available to edit the different types of curve cursors Moving Cursors All the different types of curve cursors may be moved by clicking the left mouse button on a cursor holding down the button and dragging the cursor to a new position and then releasing the button Resizing Cursors The average curve cursors and time differential cursors may be resized by first single clicking the l
236. eft mouse clicking on the menu name The desired function in the menu can then be selected by pressing your finger against the touchscreen display on the function in the pulldown menu All icon functions in the toolbar can be used by simply pressing your finger against the touchscreen display on the desired icon S key functions also work by pressing the screen over the function name Drag and drop functions can be executed by simply pressing your finger against the touchscreen display and sliding your finger across the display to the new position and then lifting your finger S2 4 VIASYS ap Companion IHI n Figure 1 The touchscreen display can be used as a pointing device by pressing your finger against the screen Note The desired functions can just be pressed on with your finger without having to first move the cursor position over the function and then pressing the left mouse button Note If a double click function is needed using the touchscreen press your finger on the function two times in a similar way to the mouse button Note If aright mouse button click is needed using the touchscreen the small symbol in the lower right hand corner of the display should be pressed first to place the system in the mode that the next click will be a right mouse click and not a left mouse click Note The touchscreen display is not available on the Pioneer TC8080 system or the Companion II
237. eft mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then clicking the mouse on one of the small resize handles half way up the vertical boundary lines holding down the button dragging the boundary line to a new position and then releasing the button The horizontal curve cursors may be resized by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then clicking the mouse on one of the small resize handles at the ends of the line holding down the button drag ging the end to a new position and then releasing the button S8 62 Deleting Individual Cursors All the different types of curve cursors may be deleted by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then pressing the delete key or right clicking the mouse on the cursor and then selecting Delete Selected Cursor from the menu Deleting All Cursors All the displayed curve cursors irregardless of their type may be deleted all at once from a trend or fast curve display by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the display data and then selecting Delete All Cursors from the menu Saving Cursors The cursors may be saved by 1 Click on Configuration Figure 1 2 Click on Save Configuration Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 1 Click on Configuration
238. el curves are blue If there is a sudden increase in the amplitude of the reflected Doppler signal this is easily seen in the display since the height of the curves increases The normal Doppler signal appears near the zero line as noise leaving vertical space for high intensity events The time scale for the SoundTrak window is in milliseconds which provides a very high time resolu tion The lowest time scale is 20 milliseconds Reviewing Data SoundTrak 2200 2300 msec irava Figure 1 SoundTrak Display The title bar of the SoundTrak display always contains the start and end times in msec for the presently displayed data Note The SoundTrak window can also be toggled on and off by clicking on the SoundTrak Display menu point in the View menu Adjusting the SoundTrak data amplitude scale When the SoundTrak display is highlighted focussed use the Scale key on the remote control to adjust the displayed scale range You may also use Ctrl F2 to decrease or Shift F2 to increase the scale setting Decreasing the scale setting makes the curves larger in amplitude and increasing the scale setting makes the curves smaller in amplitude The display scale is adjustable from 10 10 up to 100 100 in numerous steps S8 31 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Save 1 manual CH 1A S1 2 Mhz PW MCA The Spectral Zoom Box When the spectral window has the
239. els 1 Current assignment of available probes FFT Resolution Load Figure 2 Assign the connected probes to the desired channels or select the number of depths each and then click on Load Companion HI and Pioneer TC8080 examples shown S9 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the parameters and window sizes Choose the various parameter settings and resize the windows as desired The following items can be configured e Sweep speed e Depth e Scale e Zero line e Gain e Doppler parameter boxes e Number of Doppler channels e Number of multidepths e MD Channel Linkage e External analog curves e Fast curve display and curves e Trend display and curves e H LT S indicator settings e Screen layout e Amplitude e Filter e Direction e Sample e Probe frequency and mode e Display events configuration e Freeze window settings e Review window settings e S key configuration settings e Footswitch settings e Vessel labels for each channel e Spectral display range e Spectral scale units e Envelope curve settings e Boost mode settings e Tx Rx Linkage e All M Mode related settings e External connections e Continuous SoundTrak e Squelch e Flow Separation e Noise Reduction S9 4 1 Set the system parameters as desired to meet your exam requirements using the normal user interface for those functions 2 Click on Settings Figure 1 3 Click on Save or Save As 4 Type
240. emote control key functions used with your system Detailed descriptions follow in later chapters S3 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 3 2 Summaries Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Overview Channel Socket Probe Vessel Label Shows channel socket used and the selected vessel label being used during the exam Minimize Button Reduce WinTCD to an on the WinTCD i icon to icon on the desktop Click quiring data for Jones W Window Size Button Reduce the size of the window Restore the window to its original size Patient name n Flow Velocity Scale AEN Na PEER cm s or kHz E Doppler Window N Flow Direction Indicator l i Red arrow blood flow toward probe above the Zero Baseline Blue arrow blood flow away from probe above Depth sv Power Report Pos Saved Commen CH1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA R tep Vessel Label Probe the Zero Baseline Start Subop Let 27 VAPr L 2 MHz PW S1 68mm 10mm 39 Page 6 1 1 1 To change flow direction y press the Direction key on the Remote Control E WinTCD Acquiring Zero Baseline Adjust vertical position of the spectral data using the Zero key on the Remote Control Softkey Status Bar Identifies the function of the softkeys on the remote control To change softkey functions click the Right mouse button on the
241. en mn Step Vessel Label __ Probe Depth sv Power Report Pos Savec z E mage 5 1 2 e 1 28 VA p ___Previous Step_ ode On O AsStart Nic Vue E WintCD Acquiring 3 09 AM Figure 1 The resulting window after freezing the spectral display rom lt gt oo DEPTH Figure 2 Press the Freeze key F2 Key 0 COO CE LL T Figure 3 Press the F2 key to freeze the spectral display Enlarging a Frozen window You can enlarge a Frozen window to help make visual inspections easier If the Freeze window s size and position are altered they will be maintained for the rest of the session These can be saved to the Protocol and Settings files as defaults 1 Position the mouse pointer over one of the corners of the Frozen window Figure 1 until the pointer changes to a Resize icon 2 Press and hold down the mouse button and then drag the mouse until the window is the desired size Note You can also resize the Frozen window unproportionally by clicking on and dragging one of the sides of the window rather than one of its corners Moving a Frozen window You can move a Frozen window anywhere on the screen display to allow you to view the panel s hidden behind it 1 Click on the Frozen window s title bar Figure 2 and then hold down the mouse while dragging the window to its new location
242. ent is not protected against loss of mains power The use of an UPS is recommended to avoid losing data lt T gt CAUTION Preventative maintenance does not require access to the interior of the instrument and may be performed by the user For this device preventative maintenance consists of periodically cleaning and inspecting the exterior of the instrument Periodic electrical safety testing is recommended It is recommended a schedule be established for these purposes with at least an annual cleaning and safety testing This system does not require calibration Turn off the system power before cleaning Prevent detergent solution or cold sterilization agent from seeping into the electronics of the system Be especially careful around controls the TFT touchscreen display Companion HI connectors and panel edges Do not use abrasive cleansers On the Companion III system wipe the TFT touchscreen display lightly with a soft lint free cloth If necessary a small amount of mild detergent may be used Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent lt gt CAUTION Switch off system power before connecting or disconnecting any system component s or accesso ries You may damage the device s If you disconnect cables please be careful to reconnect them in their proper locations To guard against damage to the system when using the audio inputs make sure that the in
243. eparate scale Preparing the System for Monitoring 5x FE JExam pone ew erie Configuration Indicators rs Window i west TS Teale Pho TS ale Fe B ee A eh a ae I Start I Nic Vue E WinTCD WN caring Scale Time Scale Labels Figure 1 The Trend window can display up to 11 trend curves per channel This example shows two trend curves SYS and DIA have been selected Configure Trend Channel1 Channel 2 TCD Scale Limits External Inputs Curves r Toward r Away J Systole lt al Diastole tA Mean a E ancel Figure 2 Example Trend Configuration window showing the Systolic and Diastolic Doppler parameters for channel 1 have been selected checked for display S5 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Systole The peak systolic flow is the highest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope and is displayed in the Doppler window as SYS Diastole The end diastolic flow is the lowest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope and is displayed in the Doppler window as DIA S5 18 Mean The Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra is a calculation of the average display envelope and is displayed in the Doppler window as Mean PI Pulsatility Inde
244. eport examinations 12 10 Report Position column S6 19 Reset Count 7 32 Resetting the H I T S counter 7 32 Resistance Index S5 12 S6 13 Resizing a window 2 10 Resizing Cursors S8 15 S8 62 Resizing Differential Time Cursors S8 38 Resizing the windows S8 8 Restore Config 12 1 Retrieving Exported SoundTrak WAV files 12 13 Review S8 5 review S7 28 Review Window S2 9 S5 6 S6 7 review window S5 5 S6 6 Reviewing Continuous SoundTrak Data 8 23 Reviewing Fast Curve data S8 47 Index Reviewing H I T S data 8 23 S8 29 Reviewing saved spectral snapshots S8 7 Reviewing the Data S8 1 Reviewing the Trend data S8 29 S8 39 rewind lt lt symbol S8 26 RI S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 S8 16 RI Resistance Index S5 18 RI box 7 27 Right Scroll S8 45 S8 53 roundingerrors S8 17 S8 18 S8 66 row S10 6 RSAVE S8 28 S S key S5 5 S6 6 S keys S6 7 S8 6 S Markers 5 15 7 33 S8 55 S N ratio 7 11 S1 S5 key functions S5 5 S6 6 S8 6 Sample H1 8 S7 9 S7 10 S16 10 sample rate 17 16 Sample Rates Analog Inputs 17 16 Sample Rates Analog Outputs 17 16 Sample Volume 7 19 sample volume S7 11 S16 7 Sample Volume S V column S6 18 Sample volume clarification S7 10 Sample Volume Length S5 11 S6 12 sample volume length S7 9 S7 11 S16 10 Save S9 4 16 17 save additional spectral records S8 28 Save As S10 13 Save as Default S9 5 Save Configuration S8 39 S8 47 S8 62 Save Events S5 14 S5 2
245. er for the accurate reproduction of the Doppler FFT flow direction from the stored audio signals Make sure that the left and right DAT channels are connected consis tently for both the inputs and the outputs e g Left to connector 1 and right to connector 2 for both the inputs and the outputs H3 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System lt gt CAUTION Make sure you align the red dots in step 1 to guard against damage to the transducer and or system connectors 1 Align the Red dots on both the system sockets 27 and 28 and the transducer connectors Figure 1 2 Push the transducer connector straight in all of the way Disconnecting a transducer from the Companion III system Use this procedure to disconnect a transducer from the system lt gt CAUTION Do not pull on the transducer s cable or damage to the transducer and or system may occur 1 Grasp the knurled sleeve of the transducer s connector Figure 2 2 Carefully pull the transducer connector straight out from the system connector H3 8 Z System model may FA vary from that which F is shown a dot Figure 1 Align the red dots and push the transducer straight into the connector on the system 09 A f Q p Figure 2 Grasp the knurled sleeve and pull straight out to remove the transducer Your system s layout and comp
246. esktop Legends ney Designates Diagnostic COIN Mode only Designates Monitoring Mode only 12 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 12 2 Printing the Spectral window You can use any of the methods on this page to print a copy of the currently active spectral display Note Make sure your printer is connected to the computer has power applied and is loaded with paper Method 1 1 Press the Print key on the Remote Control Figure 1 Method 2 1 Click on the Print button Figure 2 Method 3 1 Click on Doppler Figure 3 2 Click on Print Spectral Window Note If the spectral display window also contains SoundTrak display or M Mode display data this data will also be printed out Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files zza Figure 1 Press the Print key on the Remote Control caf Tele ore 1 H 1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA R Figure 2 Click on the Print button Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Save Spectral Snapsh
247. essing the play symbol or by unfreezing the user is able to restart the playback of the data The transfer of the continuous SoundTrak data then starts again with the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar 8 28 While continuous SoundTrak data is being played back the user is able to save additional spectral records to the file by using the standard Save function A spectral record is written to the copy window and a new entry is added to the event list and curve windows at the appropriate time point The event is labeled RSAVE manual for review save and numbered beginning with the number so there are no number ing conflicts with the original saves Ry Reviewing H I T S data This section describes how to review the H I T S data that was collected during the Monitoring acquisition mode Note The procedures in this section of the chapter are for the Monitoring Mode only not the Diagnostic Mode H I T S events are labeled in the spectral display snapshots by a small white tick at the top of the display which indicates their position Near to the event a text marker is drawn with an E or an A and then a number to indicate which number event or artifact These numbers correspond with the numbers in the event list Turning the Labeling text off The event labeling text can be switched on and off by 1 Right clicking on the event in the spectral display and selecting Display H I T S
248. estiga tions the transducers are usually hand held enabling signals of interest to be quickly insonnated and optimized e A 2 MHz monitoring trans ducer can be mounted in a headpiece and secured in position once a good Doppler signal is located Up to two or four monitoring transducers can be used simultaneously depending on the hardware system Microvascular transducers are also available 16 MHz Microvascular PW 20 MHz Microvascular PW You can configure your system to display either Spectra or extended term trend curves copy windows or any combi nation thereof and additional information such as the mean velocity etc may be obtained Extended term trend curves are generated from the real time analog waves which enable you to view data trends on a single screen The software allows spectra to be labeled and saved to the hard disk Information stored during the examination may be reviewed via the Nicolet NicVue TCD Review mode SoundTrak recordings which allows the system to record both audio Doppler data and spectral data See your Nicolet NicVue E User Guide that shipped with your system for instruc tions on using the NicVue program Introduction Performing Doppler Examinations The systems are designed for trained and skilled personnel in collecting transcranial data and peripheral Doppler ultrasound from a test subject This manual is intended to describe the controls and fu
249. etection Detection is enabled when the button appears pressed in Configuring the Indicators settings The indicator algorithm settings can be configured in the Indica tors Settings menu The percent confidence levels for both H LT S and artifacts can be set to values between 10 and 100 These values are a form of threshold in determining which events to save All events which are detected and have a confi dence level higher than the configured level will be saved The 100 level represents OFF since no events can be detected with 100 confidence In addition the channels can be selected where the detection algorithm should run by using one of the combo boxes representing the probe sockets in the menu Two provided for Companion III and four for the Pioneer TC8080 To activate the Indicators Settings menu Figure 3 1 Click on Indicators Figure 1 and click on Settings Figure 2 or 1 If one of the softkeys at the bottom of the screen display is assigned the Indicators Settings function either click on that softkey or press the corresponding soft key S1 S5 on the Remote Control Performing an Exam Figure 1 Click on Indicators Indicators Settings v Enable Reset Count Figure 2 Click on Settings Indicators Settings r Algorithm Setup H I T S Confidence 70 Artifact Confidence OFF 4 r Channel Select
250. events which have not been preconfigured in the lists When Custom Marker is selected a pop up menu will appear Figure 1 allowing the user to type in a custom name and or marker state Once a custom marker has been saved it will appear in the list for the remainder of the examination to allow it to be used more than once Editing Event Markers It is possible to edit any saved user defined event in the event list by right clicking on the event and selecting Edit Event out of the menu Figure 2 An edit marker list will appear Figure 3 from which the user can choose a different marker or use the Edit Marker function to enter a custom marker name S8 56 It is also possible to edit any saved user defined event by right clicking on the event in a curve window Figure 4 and selecting Edit Event out of the menu Figure 5 Deleting Event Markers It is possible to delete any saved user defined event in the event list by highlighting the event and pressing the delete key or right clicking on the event and selecting Delete Event out of the menu Figure 2 After a prompt for confirmation the event is deleted permanently from the list and the curve windows It is also possible to delete any saved user defined event by right clicking on the event in a curve window Figure 4 and selecting Delete Event out of the menu Figure 5 User Defined Marker Name and state information Hyperventilation
251. f one of the softkeys was assigned the Export SoundTrak function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control 2 In the dialog box Figure 2 highlight the records you want to export to WAV files To select a string of records click on the first record hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and then click on the last record in the string The first last and all records between will be highlighted To highlight an assortment of records hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired records Only those records you click on will be high lighted 3 If finished click on the Export button 12 12 Report Text Report Graphics Report Export SoundTrak Figure 1 Click on Report and then on Export SoundTrak Wave File Export Snapshot Label Time 15 46 42 Save 2 Manual 15 47 12 Save 3 Manual 15 48 09 Save 4 Manual 15 48 22 SEV oon WHEW U 15 48 31 Save 6 Manual 15 49 11 EAC EEN 15 50 20 ave 8 Manua 15 50 32 Save 9 Manual 15 50 44 Save 10 Manual 15 51 50 Cancel Export Figure 2 Highlight the records that you want to export to WAV files Note The WAV files are written to a sub directory of the exam data on the harddrive The data path is defined using the DCM with the Nic Vue program The directory path by default is D Nicolet WinTCD Data Each exam gets its own directory in the Data directory using a G
252. ff Enabling the indicators Monitoring Mode only Configuring the indicators settings Resetting the H I T S counter Saving Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Using Protocols Diagnostic Mode only Loading a Protocol Stepping through a Protocol Load the next previous step Save the active spectral display and load the next step Print the active spectral display and load the next step Loading a step manually S7 22 S7 23 S7 24 S7 25 S7 25 S7 26 S7 26 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 28 S7 28 S7 29 S7 29 S7 29 S7 30 S7 31 S7 32 S7 33 S7 34 S7 35 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 37 TOC xi Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S8 Reviewing the Data This chapter describes how to review data which was collected during an exam TOC xii Start the program and open a file for review Set the remote control S1 S5 key functions Reviewing saved spectral snapshots Resizing the windows Using the general cursor mode spectral displays Activating the general cursor mode Recognizing the general cursor mode Selecting the cursor type Deactivating the general cursor mode Setting horizontal velocity cursors Setting vertical time cursors Setting dual crosshair cursors Setting differential velocity cursors Setting differential time cursors Working with spectral cursors Moving cursors Resizing cursors Delet
253. g SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Filter Up Filter Down Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Monitoring Mode Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctrl H Ctri Alt F Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Diagnostic Mode Figure 2 Click on Doppler and then Save Spectral Snapshot The Copy Window As you are collecting Doppler data the last 20 saved spectral snapshots will be displayed in the Saved Spectral Snapshots Copy window at the right side of the screen display Figure 1 Note The newest spectra saved appears at the bottom of the Copy Window and all other previously saved spectra shift upward Use the scroll bar when the window is full to bring the other spectra back into view F By double clicking on saved spectral displays in the Copy Window the saved records can be post processed See Reviewing saved spectral snap shots in Chapter S8 WW Performing an Exam WinTCD Acquiring data for Jones W ex P Exam Protocol View Doppler Configuration Re
254. g them for the first time ensure that sterilization procedures are carried out The 16 and 20 MHz probes must be sterilized before each subsequent use The microvascular pods must not be sterilized These may be cleaned using the procedures in chapter H5 Inspect transducer assemblies on a regular basis for possible damage cracks which could allow the ingress of conductive fluids cable or connector damage etc Never use a damaged transducer To reduce risk of injury Use proper lifting techniques when moving or lifting the system components Follow all safety standards set by your place of employment In all cases the original data must be reviewed if a clinical decision is involved gt WARNING Do not use ultrasound intensi ties greater than 10 for transorbital examinations None of the transducers sup plied with the system are intended for fetal use or pediat ric applications Depending on your locality your computer s battery might be considered as hazardous waste Follow all of your respective local laws and regulations for the proper disposal of batteries and any other parts of your system such as monitors amplifiers key boards electrodes etc Federal law in the U S A and Canada restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a medical practitioner licensed by the law of the state in which they practice to use or order to use this device This equipm
255. gin Selecting and linking channels S7 6 the exam Choose the transducer mode PW CW S7 6 Choose the flow velocity scale units S7 7 _ Set the flow velocity scale S7 8 Note The majority of information Adjust the amplitude S7 8 inthis chapter applies to both the Adjust the sample volume depth S7 9 Monitoring and Diagnostic Adjust the sample volume length S7 9 modes Exceptions ae noted Sample volume clarification S7 10 when the information is applicable Original hardware S7 10 to only one of the acquisition MK2 hardware S7 10 modes In addition the Monitor Technical description of the sample volume S7 11 ing screen display is used for the Adjust the sweep speed S7 12 illustrations the Diagnostic screen Turn on the envelope S7 12 display will be shown only if Adjust the gain S7 13 necessary for clarity Adjust the zero baseline 7 13 Set the filter S7 14 Set the direction of blood flow S7 14 Turning SoundTrak on off S7 15 Turning the speaker on off S7 16 Adjusting the audio volume S7 17 Activating the audio flow separation S7 17 Legends Activating the audio squelch function 7 17 P Designates Diagnostic CONN Mode only Toggling the audio noise reduction S7 18 Designates Monitoring Continued on the next page Mode only S7 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont S7 2 Toggling the Boost mode level Toggling the high frequency enhance Setting the HFE breakpoint Viewing t
256. gle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Benito Ctri Alt F Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 1 Click on Doppler and then on Curve Recording Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 2 Click on Configuration and then on Intermittent Curve Recording Intermittent Curve Recording EA Smin oK 10 min Cancel Record On Record Off 4 Figure 3 Select how long recordings should last and how long recordings should be turned off Click on OK when finished S7 29 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Ry Enabling the indicator Monitoring Mode only Note The indicator algorithm is available in the Monitoring Mode only and only if a valid software license Advanced H I T S Indication is installed in the system H I T S is an acronym which stands for High Intensity Tran sient Signals These include emboli and various types of artifacts e g patient movement transducer movement environ mental noise etc The user is responsible for determining whether a H I T S is an embolus or an artifact You can enable disable t
257. h did not Row 1 Row 1 use predefined print positions please go to page S12 8 in this Column 1 Column 2 chapter Row 2 Row 2 Berg The Diagnostic Mode Column 1 Column 2 UM prints the saved spectral Row 3 Row 3 records of each step which have a Comment tres page matrix position page row tet column entered on the Report Position column Figure 1 If Figure 2 Graphics report page layout however some of the steps do not have a page matrix assigned you can choose to locate those records at the end of the report at the end of this procedure Figure 2 shows an example layout for a Graphic report 12 6 Click on Report Figure 1 and then on Graphics Report Or If one of the softkeys was assigned the Graphics Report function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Or Click onthe Graphics Report button 100 100 If you want to add a Footer Comment to your report click on checkmark the Footer Comment checkbox Figure 2 click inside the Footer Comment text entry box and then type in your comments If you want to add a Conclu sion to your report click on checkmark the Conclusion checkbox Figure 3 click inside the Conclusion text entry box and then type in your conclusion Click on Print If the query shown in Figure 3 appears click on Yes to include the saved spectral displays that were not assigned a positio
258. h is displayed in the Parameter box labeled SV It is important to remember that the size of the sample volume influences the ultrasonic power output The larger the sample volume the longer the duration of the pulse burst and consequently the higher the ultrasound output and power Note Always apply the ALARA principle use power levels that are As Low As Reasonably Achievable By adjusting these values the resolution of the channels bands can be changed If the total depth range of all channels is low and the sample volume size is large then the sample volumes will overlap quite a bit creating a very low resolution image In this case it would be better to use a smaller sample volume size to see better definition between bands When adjustments will cause empty spaces between bands i e when SV is less than the depth separation the background gray is displayed between the bands The overlap between channel bands is limited to 50 Figure 1 Depth keys Ctrl F1 Shift F1 Figure 2 Sample key Ctrl F6 Shift F6 Note The sample volume setting is displayed in parenthesis for multi depth receiver channels Note See Configuring the Sample Volume Functionality in Chapter S7 in this guide Adjusting the M Mode channel bands In addition to the previously described functions it is possible to adjus
259. hannel EME 1 Channel HITS EME 1x2 MD HITS EME 1x4 MD HITS EME gt 2 Channel EME 2 Channel HITS EME 2x2 MD HITS EME 4 Channel EME Load Save Rename Delete Figure 1 Click on the Settings file you want to load and then click on Load Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 2 Click on the Settings menu and then on the Settings Manager menu point Probes and settings check r Result Setting OK r Probes in setting Ch 1 Ch 2 2 MHz 2 MHz r Available probes Ch 1 Ch 1 2 MHz 2 MHz C unidirect Unidirect O na na 4 Enable Load Cancel Figure 3 This panel does not appear if the probes are connected correctly to the system Companion III example Enable IV Autoload if check is successful Variable probe position Manual assignment Choose the Only protocol Diagnostic mode only The system parameters can be set up quickly for diagnostics by selecting a previously created protocol file If you want to create your own protocol see Chapter S10 in this guide NY Use either of the following methods to choose a protocol Method 1 1 Click on the Protocol Manager button mhad D 2 Click on the desired file click on Load Figure 1 3 If Figure 2 appears insert the correct transducers and then click on Load P
260. he indicator algorithm using any of the three methods When enabled the system automatically saves a Spectral Snapshot Figure 1 when a H I T S occurs Each H I T S event in the Spectral display is marked with a small tick mark and label Note Depending on the country of distribution the term H I T S may be replaced in the menus by the word Emboli S7 30 Method 1 1 Click on Indicators Figure 2 2 Click on Enable Figure 3 3 Go to the next page Method 2 1 Click on the Indicators On Off button Figure 4 2 Go to the next page Method 3 1 Click on the Indicators On Off softkey if assigned or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control 2 Go to the next page Spectral Snapshots EBAR AAAA All E Star We Vue E WinTCO Acquring Figure 1 Spectral Snapshots are saved automatically each time a high intensity transient signal is detected and the Indicator algorithm is enabled a See ine iS Indicators Figure 2 Click on Indicators Indicators Settings v Enable Reset Count Figure 3 Click on Enable A checkmark means it is currently enabled aS E h H 1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA R Figure 4 Click on the Indicators On Off button to enable disable d
261. he time value in ms from any point on the spectra by Method A 1 Selecting the Vertical Time cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Positioning the mouse pointer on the point of interest and then clicking the Left mouse button Method B 1 Selecting the Vertical Time cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Clicking and holding down the Left mouse button anywhere in the spectral data then dragging the vertical cursor line to a new position and releasing the mouse button on the point of interest The line is drawn and the time with respect to T 0 is displayed Figure 2 Reviewing Data T 0 E m vi oo a iguration Report W Help Haaro E aH Event Description Time op Spectra On Off a _ e Vessel Labels Bo CAStart I Nic Vue ted _ H WinTCD Reviewing 9 09 A M Figure 1 Vertical Time cursor measurements are made with respect to the Time 0 reference Freeze Protocol Step 1 x CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L K 34 Mean 49 E Vessel Labels D S Spectra On Off Figure 2 This example shows a single Vertical Time cursor S8 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Setting Dual Crosshair Cursors Dual Crosshair cursors are single point measurements which are made with respect to the T 0 and V 0 references Figure 1 The Spectral Dual Crosshair cu
262. he Pioneer TC8080 Connect the monitor signal cable to the VGA Monitor Signal Socket socket 12 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Connecting Serial Devices Standard serial port compatible devices may be connected to the 9 way D type RS 232 connector socket 13 on the back panel of the Pioneer TC8080 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Please note that use of the remote hand controller or footswitch precludes the use of other serial accessories Pioneer TC8080 System Connecting the Optional Analog Connection Box An optional analog connection box may be connected to the Pioneer TC8080 Connect the analog connection box 2 cables to the Analog Inputs Outputs Sockets sockets 19 20 Ensure that the cables are fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Connecting an External DAT Recorder If an external DAT recorder is to be used to record and playback the Doppler audio data via the analog connection box it needs to be properly connected Two channels of audio information for each Doppler FFT display are required and these need to be connected in the correct order for the accurate reproduction of the Doppler FFT flow
263. he Spectra Saving spectral snapshots The copy window Freezing the display Enlarging a Frozen window Moving a Frozen window Reading calculations from the Parameter boxes Setting the Delta Mean 100 reference level Mean Mean Velocity Sys Systolic RI Resistance Index Dia Diastolic PI Pulsatility Index D Mean Delta Mean Reading the intensity scale Adjusting the intensity scale Turning Curve recordings on off Monitoring Mode only Intermittent Curve recordings Turning Intermittent Curve recordings off Enabling the indicators Monitoring Mode only Configuring the indicators settings Resetting the H I T S counter Saving Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Using Protocols Diagnostic Mode only Loading a Protocol Stepping through a Protocol Load the next previous step Save the active spectral display and load the next step Print the active spectral display and load the next step Loading a step manually S7 19 S7 20 S7 20 S7 21 S7 22 S7 23 S7 24 S7 25 S7 25 S7 26 S7 26 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 27 S7 28 S7 28 S7 29 S7 29 S7 29 S7 30 S7 31 S7 32 S7 33 S7 34 S7 35 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 36 S7 37 Connect Companion transducer s Up to two transducer s can be connected to the ports on the side of the system Match the Red Dots on the transducer and system connec tor Figure 1
264. he infrared port on the hand controller is classified as a class 1 LED Light Emitting Diode device according to Interna tional Standard IEC 825 1 EN60825 1 This device is not considered harmful but the following precautions are recommended 1 Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam Be aware that the beam is invisible light and cannot be seen 2 Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device On both systems when a DAT recorder is used to record or playback Doppler audio data it must be powered through the main system s isolated power sockets Pioneer only or via the portable Isobox Isolation Transformer O WARNING The DAT recorder must meet the standard relevant to your country IEC 60065 2001 BS EN 60065 2002 UL 60065 2003 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60065 03 IEC 60950 1 2002 BSEN 60950 2002 UL 60950 1 2002 CAN CSA C 22 2 No 60950 1 03 Where applicable a potential equalization connection point is provided on the system or chassis of the device for connec tion to the corresponding parts of other devices connected to the patient Such connections may be used to help reduce the incidence of ground and or leakage currents which can occur through patient connec tions of devices with separate grounding systems When more than one medical device is connected to the patient leakage currents of the devices are summed together Use caution Whilst using the s
265. he one you want to use skip this procedure To Create a New Settings file create a New Default Settings file Delete a Settings file or Rename a Settings file see Chapter S9 in this guide WY Note The Settings files contain many parameters This chapter describes the various configurable features all of which are saved in the Settings files Note Figure 3 will appear with four columns on a Pioneer TC8080 system and two columns on a Companion III system since the columns correspond to the number of probe sockets Preparing the System for Monitoring Method 1 1 Click on the Settings Manager button he ca 2 Click on the file you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note The current Settings file is identified with an Arrow prefix The Diamond prefix is the current default Method 2 1 Click on the Settings menu Figure 2 2 Select the Settings Manager menu point 3 Click on the file you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note Figure 3 will not appear if the transducers are connected correctly to the system If incorrect connections were made make the corrections as necessary and then click on Load You can choose to override the system and click on the Manual assignment checkbox and then make your selections from this panel The number of channels must however remain the same g Settings Manager x 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 03 17 00 07
266. he present Mean value After this time the Delta Mean parameter box will display a percent value relative to this level which essentially displays the change in the mean velocity with respect to the point in time where the Set Delta Mean was used See Setting the Remote Control S1 S5 key func tions in Chapter S5 WW Note If both envelope curves are switched off for a particular record the system will display and print a for all envelope related values Performing an Exam 28 MEAN B C EE Mean 120 46 SYS SYS C Systolic C B B Diastolic 2 9 PI 3 8 B C Pulsatility Index 0 81 RI A Resistance Index Figure 1 The possible measurement results you can choose to view A Flow toward the transducer B Flow away from the transducer C Flow in both directions S7 27 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Reading the intensity scale Note that to the right of the Doppler window is a column divided into 64 colored segments with Black at the bottom and Red at the top Figure 1 These colors represent the signal intensity in units of dB The higher the color in the scale the more red blood cells there are flowing at that particular velocity You can obtain a visual interpreta tion of the Doppler signals intensity by comparing the colors of the signal with the intensity scale colors For example bright red could correspond to an i
267. ick on Delete Figure 2 3 Click on OK Figure 3 4 Click on Exit Figure 2 Managing the System Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 1 Click on Settings and then click on Settings Manager Settings Manager x 1 Channel EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 1 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 1x2 MD HITS EME 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 1x4 MD HITS EME 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM gt 2 Channel EME 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 2 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 08 12 14 AM 2x2 MD HITS EME 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 4 Channel EME 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM Load Save Rename Delete Figure 2 Click on the Settings file you want to delete and then click on Delete WinTCD A A Are you sure Deleted data will be irretrievable 0K _Cancet_ Figure 3 Click on OK Return to Figure 2 and click on Exit S9 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank page S9 8 Chapter S10 Creating Diagnostic Protocols Creating a new protocol Choose the common global protocol settings Choose the probe Create the protocol step Editing a protocol Selecting a different probe Adding new steps Inserting a new step Editing a step Deleting a step Adding inserting editing a step Editing the common global protocol settings Saving the edited protocol Overwriting the original protocol Creating a new protocol Creating a new default protocol Loading the
268. if no snapshot saves or snapshot deletes have been made since the last update If a snapshot save is made the update is rescheduled to occur after the save If a snapshot is deleted the update occurs immediately Note If the free harddisk space runs out during an examination the system automatically stops data saving at the limit and displays a dialog as shown in Figure 2 The dialog box says Harddisk is full Storage has been stopped and all data saving abilities have been disabled Please archive or delete data prior to creating next examination The user is forced to choose OK This dialog is proceeded by numerous warning messages Harddisk is Full Harddisk is full Storage has been stopped and all data saving abilities have been disabled Please archive or delete data prior to creating next examination OK Figure 2 Full Harddisk Dialog Trend Window Reconfiguring the Maximum File Size If the maximum file size limit is reconfigured during an examina tion See section S14 the file size indicator gets its value readjusted The new maximum limit is used for the messages If the examination size already exceeds the new limit the system continues to run and save data but the indicator shows a value over 100 In the case that the maximum file size was already reached and the system automatically turned data saving off but the new limit now allows more data saving then the the user
269. iginal hardware S7 19 overlap 16 10 S16 11 overlapping 16 7 S16 15 Override 17 20 Overwriting the original Protocol 10 13 Index 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual P I Psys Edia Mean S5 12 S5 18 S6 13 S7 27 page S10 6 page lt symbol S8 26 page gt symbol S8 26 Palette S5 22 S6 14 S16 6 palettes S16 14 Parameter Boxes S5 10 S6 11 parameter settings 5 3 parenthesis 7 8 S7 9 S16 10 Password S4 3 pause symbol S8 26 17 18 PC Specifications H6 3 PCI Board Type 7 18 PDF format 12 10 PDF reports 12 11 Peak Systolic Flow S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 pediatric applications H1 6 Performing an Examination S7 1 Performing Doppler Examinations 1 3 PI S8 16 PI Pulsatility Index S5 18 Pl box 7 27 picture is fuzzy H5 7 Pioneer TC8080 Base Unit H5 3 Pioneer TC8080 System Design PR v Play SoundTrak 8 22 play symbol S8 24 S8 28 playback H2 7 S17 3 S17 5 Playback Mode Indicator 17 8 playback time position 8 26 S8 27 pointing device H3 6 H4 6 H5 6 Pointing Devices H2 5 Portable Isobox H1 4 position indicator tab S8 27 post processing S16 16 Postprocessing Continuous SoundTrak Data 8 28 Postprocessing the color M Mode display 16 18 potential equalization H1 5 Power S5 11 S5 12 S6 12 S6 13 power H3 11 H4 12 Power Mains Inlet H5 6 Power Mains Selector Switch H4 12 Power Mains Switch H3 11 H4 12 H5 6 Power column S6 19 powercord H1 4 power output H1 8 po
270. in blue step Doppler settings can only be saved to complete steps Display changes can be saved to all steps See Chapter S10 for more information 1 Load the Protocol step for which you want to make Doppler DSP setting changes 2 Make any Doppler DSP settings changes as desired using the Remote Control 3 Click on Protocol Figure 3 4 Click on Save Step Settings S6 20 we ag EE es Sed Dah VessalLapel_ Prove_ aptn_ 5V Power Report Pos saved Comment eves Deon Tne Eere imwerco Figure 1 Load the Protocol step for which you want to make Doppler DSP changes 0 1 9 o Figure 2 Use the Remote Control to make changes to the Doppler DSP settings Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 3 Click on Protocol and then on Save Step Settings Chapter S7 Performing an Exam Connect the transducer s S7 3 This chapter describes how to acquire data from your subject Load the channel settings Monitoring mode only S7 4 during an exam It is assumed that you have already set up the Choose the Protocol Diagnostic mode only S7 5 screen Chapter S5 for Monitor ing or Chapter S6 for Diagnostic Set up the acquisition parameters S7 6 and you are now ready to be
271. in the file name you want to identify the Settings file and then click on OK Figure 2 The newly created Settings Manager file will appear on the Settings menu Figure 3 which is displayed by clicking on Settings and then on Settings Manager Note The settings files created for the Pioneer TC8080 system will receive the file extension ST3 or ST7 and those created for the Companion III system will receive the file extension ST5 or ST8 These are located in the C Nicolet WinTCD Settings directory Note The Companion IN LE model is limited to a maximum of four receiving depths instead of the normal eight Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 1 Click on Settings and then on Save Enter new name Figure 2 Type the new file name and then click on OK Settings Manager xi 1 Channel EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 1 Channel HITS EME 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 03 17 00 08 12 14 AM 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM 1x2 MD HITS EME 1x4 MD HITS EME gt 2 Channel EME 2 Channel HITS EME 2x2 MD HITS EME 4 Channel EME Load PEG Rename Delete Figure 3 The newly created Settings file will appear on the Settings menu Creating a new default Settings file You can choose to make a Settings file the default Then each time a new exam is Started the
272. ing Device H3 6 Connecting an External Printer H3 6 Connecting the Optional Footswitch H3 6 Connecting the Remote Hand Controller H3 6 Connecting a Set of Headphones H3 7 Connecting USB Peripherals H3 7 Connecting the Companion III to a Network H3 7 Connecting an External VGA Monitor H3 7 Connecting Serial Devices H3 7 Connecting Optional Analog Connection Box H3 7 Connecting an External DAT Recorder H3 7 Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System H3 8 Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System H3 9 Assembling the System H3 10 Mains Power Supply H3 11 Apply Power to the Companion III System H3 11 Information in this chapter is subject to change without notice H3 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H3 2 Labels and Symbols The following labels and symbols are affixed to the Companion III Warns the user to consult this manual and any other accompany ing documentation A Power Mains Supply OFF O Power Mains Supply ON Stereo Headphones 3 5mm jack socket Potential Equalization Terminal g Mouse Pointing Device Connec tion Keyboard Connection RJ 45 Network Connection USB Universal Serial Bus Connection Parallel Printer Connection Remote Controller Connector Eal Companion III System Line Out 3 5mm jack socket 2 Line In 3 5mm jack socket Microphone In 3 5mm jack socket Vd H3 3 Pioneer TC
273. ing Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Aaprt lt 1 Aaprt gt 1 oran a a a Zs E E ls pomama fo S Acoustic a a eooo oe ee Dim of Aaprt O See jo feo e EEE ESS eer f e pene ol Eere aa Other Information Focal Length o fein e C Operating Conditions wwa data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt 1 H6 12 Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 4 MHz Index Label Global Maximum Index Value Assoc Acoustic Parameter Dim of Aaprt pr PllImax deq PlIImax Other Information Focal Length IpA 3 MImax Operating Control Conditions data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III Acoustic Output Reporting Table for Track 3 Transducer Model 8 MHz P Operating Mode Pulsed Doppler PW TIS TIB Index Label non scan scan non scan Aaprt lt 1 Aaprt gt 1 oran a a a Zs E E ls pomama fo S Acoustic a a eooo oe ee Dim of Aaprt O See jo feo e EEE ESS eer f e cI Eere aa Other Information Focal Length o oom e
274. ing a protocol or whenever something out of the ordinary occurs S6 4 Set the screen display Use the following procedures to choose how you want the Doppler information presented on the screen display Instructions are located on the following pages e Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions e Set the Footswitch functions e Set the Flow Velocity Scale e Choose the Flow Direction e Choose the Doppler Parameter Boxes display e Customize the sizes of the Doppler window Protocol List window Event window and Copy Window using the mouse and Splitter bars See Custom izing the Window Sizes later in this chapter for information e Choose whether you want to display the Doppler in color or grayscale Toolbar Flow Velocity Scale Flow Direction Indicator Velocity Scale or Zero Baseline Protocol Steps Softkey Status Bar Preparing the System for Diagnostics Saved Spectral Copy Snapshots Window Doppler Parameter Boxes Current Protocol Event List Window Figure 1 Set up the basic screen display to meet your preferences and needs S6 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions You can select from a menu of options the functions of the five keys S1 S5 on the Remote Control Figure 1 These five keys allow you to quickly execute the chosen function by simply pressing the correspon
275. ing individual cursors Deleting all cursors Saving cursors Displaying cursor units Clearing cursor background Hiding cursors Manually recalculating values Activating the recalculate values mode Recognizing the recalculate values mode Using the recalculate values 2 cursors mode Using the recalculate values 3 cursors mode Saving recalculated values Deactivating the recalculate values 2 cursors mode Deactivating the recalculate values 3 cursors mode Deleting a spectral snapshot Editing a spectral snapshot Replaying SoundTrak data Continued on next page S8 5 S8 6 S8 7 S8 8 88 9 S8 9 S8 9 88 9 88 9 S8 10 S8 11 S8 12 S8 13 S8 14 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 15 S8 16 S8 16 S8 16 S8 17 S8 18 S8 19 S8 19 S8 19 S8 20 S8 21 S8 22 Chapter S8 Reviewing the Data continued Table of Contents Reviewing Continuous SoundTrak Data M Only Replaying Continuous SoundTrak Data Altering Display Parameters During C SoundTrak Playback Adjusting the Time Position for C SoundTrak Playback Jumping the Time Position for C SoundTrak Playback Postprocessing Continuous SoundTrak Data Reviewing H I T S data Monitoring Mode Only Turning the labeling text off Viewing the advanced H I T S information Show event list statistics The SoundTrak display Activating the SoundTrak display Adjusting the SoundTrak data amplitude scale The spectral zoom box Adjust
276. ing the size and position of the spectral zoom box Default zoom box positions Reading in H LT S records Reading in H I T S events Reading in manually saved records Saving the default zoom box positions for a saved record Measuring time differences in the SoundTrak data Activating the general cursor mode Setting differential time cursors Saving differential time cursors Working with SoundTrak differential time cursors Moving differential time cursors Resizing differential time cursors Deleting individual cursors Deleting all cursors Displaying cursor units Clearing cursor background Deactivating the general cursor mode Hiding cursors Reviewing Trend data Monitoring Mode Only Saving the trend configuration Configure the trend curves display Choose the trend curves for display and curve colors Set the trend curve scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the trend display options Choose which events will be displayed Continued on next page S8 23 S8 24 S8 25 S8 26 S8 27 S8 28 S8 29 S8 29 S8 29 S8 29 S8 30 S8 30 S8 31 S8 32 S8 33 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 35 S8 36 S8 36 S8 37 S8 37 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 38 S8 39 S8 39 S8 40 S8 41 S8 41 S8 41 S8 42 S8 42 TOC xiii Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S8 Reviewing the Data continued TOC xiv Toggle scale sharing Toggle background grid Choosing th
277. inished click on OK Chapter S14 System Menu Software License Upgrade Menu 14 3 This chapter describes the System menu function Using the Infrared Remote Control S14 4 Software License Upgrade Use Internal IR Remote Online Probe Test S14 4 Online Probe Test e File Size Limitation File Size Limitation Menu 814 5 S14 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 14 2 Software License Upgrade Menu In order for the WinTCD software to run the system needs to have a valid software license installed Depending on the system and the options ordered a unique software license is generated and installed on the system during the manufac turing process Each time the program is loaded the system reads the license code and activates the features which have been installed If new features are purchased at a future date these can be installed by using the procedure below 1 Click on Configuration and move to System Figure 1 2 Click on Software License Upgrade 3 Enter the new license code obtained from your EME representative in the appropri ate field Figure 2 and select Load Figure 2 The System Menu Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System 14 Use Internal IR Remote Online Probe Test File
278. inted out in the normal way In addition if the correspond ing Auto PDF Report configu ration function is selected the system creates the PDF file and writes it to disk as well 2 Upon exiting the WinTCD program when a check mark is present the system automati cally saves the report type toa PDF file This ensures that a PDF report is always saved and the report is always up to date with the latest saves and post processing information for those customers who want this automatic feature Upon exiting the WinTCD program when one or both Auto PDF report functions are checked the system evaluates whether any post processing has been done If the system determines that the saved report is no longer up to date then the system prompts you to over write the file This can mean that you could be prompted two times once for the text report and once for the graphics report Note If the automatic PDF report saving functions are activated the amount of time needed to shut down the program when exiting the acquire and review modes will be increased S12 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Exporting SoundTrak data to WAV files If spectral records have been saved containing SoundTrak data then this data can be exported to WAV files for use with other applications In order to export the SoundTrak data to WAV files 1 Click on Report Figure 1 and then on Export SoundTrak Or 1 I
279. inter Socket 7 on the rear panel and to the Centronics connector on the printer e Check that there is enough ink in the cartridges contained in the printer and a paper supply in the printer s hopper If there is no sound from the loudspeakers e Select Start Settings Control Panel then open Sounds and Multimedia Ensure that the Sound Volume option in the Sounds tab is not set hard over to the left e Double click the loudspeaker icon just left of the clock in the taskbar Ensure that none of the sliders have a tick mark in the Mute box User Maintenance Pioneer TC8080 In case of a fault User Mainte nance is limited to the following If the Pioneer TC8080 system does not power up e Check that the Voltage Selector Switches 2 and 6 are set to the correct voltage for the country in which the system is being used e Check that the mains power supply lead is connected to the Power Mains Inlet 1 is connected to a suitable mains outlet and is switched on e Check the Power Mains Switch 30 on the front panel is in the on position e Check that the voltage selector inside the Fuse Drawer 2 is installed the right way round On 100 120V systems the 115 side should be visible on 200 240V systems the 230 side should be visible e Check the Power Mains Input fuses in the Fuse Drawer 2 Input mains fuses are accessed by d
280. into a special cursor type pointer when the mouse is positioned in the data section of the trend or fast curve window Depending on the type of cursor active a different mouse pointer Figure 2 will be active Selecting the Cursor Type The type of cursor can be selected by 1 Right clicking in the display window which has the general cursor mode active 2 Clicking on the function Select Cursor Type Figure 3 3 Selecting the cursor type from the submenu Figure 4 Deactivating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for a curve display can be switched off by 1 Right clicking in the curve display window 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Off Figure 3 Note See also the sections on Calculate VMR which follow these pages for information on a special type of cursor mode which allows the vasomotor reactivity to be manually calculated by setting cursors in the trend display Reviewing Data Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Calculate VMR Average Cursors General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 1 Trend and Fast Curve Window Right Click Menus XX R Ny Figure 2 Various Curve Cursor Mouse Pointers Xey General Cursors Off Select Cursor Type gt Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Curso
281. ion Socket 1 to 4 E channel selected ok Cancel Figure 3 Click on the Confidence Up Down keys until desired setting appears and or select the channel s where the algorithm should be active Note The indicator algorithm is not designed to be used with bidirec tional signals For best results try to optimize the signal strength above the zero line Note For more information concerning the use of the indicator algo rithm please refer to the special writeup Manual of Doppler Embolic Signal Detection S7 31 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Resetting the H I T S counter The H I T S counter counts the number of H I T S occurrences and displays that number in the H I T S counter box Figure 1 This box can be reset to 0 at any time by using one of the methods below Note In the Multichannel Mode each Spectral display can have its own counter 1 Click on Indicators Figure 2 2 Click on Reset Count Figure 3 to reset the counter to zero or 1 Click on the Indicators Reset Count softkey if assigned or press the corresponding S key on the Remote control Note Depending on the country of distribution the term H LT S may be replaced by the word Emboli 7 32 E JExam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help zax A DQ ol_Te eal Pe Sale Ee Astar H Nic Vue 0 SoundTrak On Off E WinTC
282. ion window similar to Figure 2 appears If you selected TCD D in step 3 go to Chapter S6 when an Acquisition window similar to Figure 3 appears Figure 1 This window will appear followed by the panel after several seconds You can click on the Dismiss button or wait for a few seconds after which the system will go to the chosen acquisition window automatically Fara Ma CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA R Figure 2 Example Monitoring acquisition window Gas a ee ee EE Da star Wie Woe WinTCO Acquiring EA Figure 3 Example Diagnostic acquisition window Chapter S5 Preparing the System for Monitoring Choose the monitoring mode settings Set the screen display Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions Set the Footswitch functions Choose the Vessel Labels Customizing the window sizes Splitting the windows horizontally Splitting the windows vertically Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display Depth SV Sample Volume Length Gain Filter Ampl Amplitude Power TIC TIS Mean Mean Velocity Sys Systolic Dia Diastolic PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index H LT S D Mean Delta Mean Display the Toolbar Set the Copy Window Set the Event List window Configure the User Defined Event Marker Lists S5 3 S5 4 S5 5 S5 6 S5 7 S5 8 S5 9 S5 9 S5 10 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 1
283. ions Cancel Figure 2 External Connections dialog box analog output tab Analog Inputs Analog Outputs pigiai Outputs Channel 1 Audio CHi fA Channel 2 Audio CHI f Channel 3 Audio CH2 f Channel 4 Audio CH2 f Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 x Cancel Figure 3 External Connections dialog box analog input tab Creating Audio I O Settings continued 4 There are eight available inputs and eight available outputs which correspond with the RCA connectors on the analog connection box Activate the desired signal s for the inputs or outputs by clicking the mouse on the combo box selection arrow to the right of the white boxes for the appropriate numbered connec tor and choosing the signal from the list of available signals Figures and 2 5 When all signals have been configured as desired click on OK to activate the external connections 6 Once the required external connections have been assigned and loaded the settings should be saved by saving the active setting or protocol file with the Save or Save As functions in either the Settings or Protocol menus Using the External Inputs and Outputs Note When an audio signal is assigned to a particular connector automatically the same setting is assigned to the neighboring connector so there is always a pair of audio signals representing the phase and quadrature signals The audio signal pairs
284. is system just has an internal LCD display Common Hardware Components Optional Accessories The following is a list of the optional components available for the systems e 1 6 MHz PW 15mm monitoring transducer probe 2 5m X1 P100 e 2 MHz PW diagnostic handheld probe 2 5m X1 P101 e 2 MHz PW 15mm standard monitoring transducer probe 2 5m X1 P102 e 2 MHz PW 10mm monitoring transducer probe 2 5m X1 P103 e 4 MHz PW CW active transducer probe 2 5m yellow X1 P104 e 8 MHz PW CW active transducer probe 2 5m green X1 P105 e 1 5mm 16 MHz PW microvascular probe Autoclaveable X1 P110 e 2 0mm 16 MHz PW microvascular probe Autoclaveable X1 P111 e 1 5mm 20 MHz PW microvascular probe Autoclaveable X1 P112 e 2 0mm 20 MHz PW microvascular probe Autoclaveable X1 P113 e 16 MHz PW microvascular isolation pod X1 P114 e 20 MHz PW microvascular isolation pod X1 P115 e 1 6 MHz PW 15mm monitoring transducer probe 4 8m X1 P120 e 2 MHz PW 10mm standard monitoring transducer probe 4 8m X1 P117 e 2 MHz PW 15mm standard monitoring transducer probe 4 8m X1 P116 e Probe Carry Case X2 P004 e Probe Holder Adhesive backed Pioneer only e Infra Red Remote Control English M2 P001 e Wired Remote Control English M2 P002 Infra Red Remote Control German M2 P003 e Wired Remote Control German M2 P004 e IR Remote Pod M2 0516 e Footswitch 3 way for use with IR remotes X2 P001 Pioneer amp all Companion e Footswitch 3 way for us
285. isconnecting the mains power supply lead and pulling out the fuse drawer located below the Power Mains Inlet 1 Replacement fuses are as follows Two off T5AH 250V 20mm fuses to IEC 127 should be fitted e Check the mains fuse in the mains plug if fitted If the unit powers up but the SVGA monitor is blank e Check that the monitor power lead is connected between the monitor and the IEC outlet on the rear of the unit e Check the power switch on the monitor is in the on position e Check the Thermal Circuit Breaker on the rear panel has not tripped e Isolated mains outputs for the external monitor and printer are protected by a 2A Thermal Circuit Breaker 5 This is located on the rear panel below the Isolated Power Outlets 3 e In normal operation the inner black button should be ap proximately 3mm proud of the plastic bezel If a fault has occurred with the isolated power output and the circuit Care and Maintenance of the Equipment breaker has tripped the inner black button will be approxi mately 6mm proud of the plastic bezel Check the state of the thermal circuit breaker if the monitor and or printer fail to power up Should the circuit breaker trip switch off the Pioneer TC8080 system and disconnect from the mains supply The monitor and printer must be checked for electrical safety and operation by an authorize
286. isplay 1O 43 Figure 1 The softkeys displayed on the screen can be clicked on to execute the action or the corresponding S key on the remote control can be pressed to execute the action Exam Protent Yaw Doppler Contiguraton Report Window Heip Pe Test ea E eevee E coo Figure 2 Position the mouse pointer over the displayed softkey you want to define and then click the Right mouse button Envelope Filter Down Filter Up Toggle PW CW SoundTrak On Off Spectra On Off Units Vessel Labels Next Step Previous Step SaveGoNext PrintGoNext Save Step Settings Text Report Graphics Report Parameter Boxes Protocol Manager Boost Mode Squelch On Off Flow Separation On Off Export SoundTrak Inc Rx Pulse Width Dec Rx Pulse Width Display Range Inc Tx Pulse Width Dec Tx Pulse Width Tx Rx Linkage On Off Set Delta Mean HFE Mode On Off HFE Breakpoint Noise Reduction Figure 3 Click on the function you want to assign to the selected key List shown is an example from the diagnostic mode Set the footswitch functions The three footswitch keys on the Footswitch can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window 1 Select the Configure Footswitch function out of the Configuration menu The Footswitch Configuration menu Figure 1 will appear 2 Click the Left
287. ition and then releasing the button Resizing Cursors The differential spectral cursors may be resized by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then clicking the mouse on one of the small resize handles half way up the boundary lines holding down the button dragging the boundary line to a new position and then releasing the button Deleting Individual Cursors All the different types of spectral cursors may be deleted by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then pressing the delete key or right clicking the mouse on the cursor and then selecting Delete Selected Cursor from the menu Deleting All Cursors All the spectral cursors irregardless of their type may be deleted all at once from a spectral record by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Delete All Cursors from the menu Saving Cursors The cursors may be saved by simply resaving the spectral record Displaying Cursor Units The units cm sec msec etc for all of the spectral cursor types may be toggled on for a spectral record by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Display Cursor Units from the menu The units may be toggled off by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Remove Cursor Units from the menu Reviewing Data Clearing Cu
288. ive the Probe key now only toggles between the large spectral windows associated with probe sockets and the M Mode display In the unilateral case the Probe key toggles the focus between the one large spectral display window and the M Mode window and visa versa In the bilateral case the Probe key rotates the focus from the first large spectral display window to the first M Mode window and then to the second large spectral display window and finally to the second M Mode window As always all appropriate key strokes go to the focussed window At any time it is also possible to toggle the window focus by clicking the mouse on the appro priate window 16 8 The title bar on the selected small spectral display control window lights up as being highlighted when its associated large spectral window is highlighted The audio sound heard in the speakers comes from the focussed large spectral window If the M Mode window has the focus then the audio sound heard in the speakers comes from the associ ated large spectral window A small speaker is drawn next to the M Mode channel band where the sound is coming from By clicking on this speaker it is possible to mute the sound Note The functionality of the window key on the remote control is independent of the methods described on this page This key is used to move the main Windows focus circling through the Event List Trend window Spectral M Mode window a
289. king With Event Markers S7 34 S8 56 Working With SoundTrak Differential Time Cursors S8 38 Z Zero S7 24 S8 25 S16 9 zero baseline S7 13 zero baseline noise S7 14 Zero key S7 13 S8 25 zero line S8 25 Zoom box S8 32 S8 34 S8 35 Zooming in on the Fast Curves display S8 54 Zooming in on the Trend data S8 46
290. kly press and release the left mouse button Figure 2 after positioning the pointer over the desired option or command 2 If you are clicking on a checkbox Mig or ona pulldown menu option click the button once to make your choice Unless otherwise noted in the instructions assume that you will only be using the LEFT mouse button to Single click a command referred to as click on Sometimes you will be instructed to Double click quickly press and release the mouse button twice to make a selection Double click abilities are noted in the procedures Clicking the RIGHT mouse button over certain areas of the screen display e g Doppler Parameters Boxes Trend or Event List will open up a menu relevant to that specific area Entering Commands Figure 1 Move the mouse in the direction you want to move the pointer on the display Click Figure 2 Left clicking the Mouse S2 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Using the touchscreen display The Companion III system is supplied standard with a touchscreen TFT display which can be used as a pointing device This allows the system to be very portable since the mouse and trackball are not needed for the system Pulldown menu functions can be selected by pressing your finger against the touchscreen display on the pulldown menu name The menu will then be shown on the screen similar to l
291. kscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 10 If a second VGA monitor is to be used with this unit connect the monitor signal cable to the VGA Monitor Signal Socket socket 12 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 11 If the optional analog connec tion box is to be used with this unit connect the analog connection box 2 cables to the Analog Inputs Outputs Sockets sockets 10 11 Ensure that the cables are fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance In addition make sure that the external device e g DAT recorder is also properly connected 12 Plug the Power Mains Lead into the Power Mains Inlet 1 on the rear of the unit and into a suitable wall socket 13 The unit is now ready to be switched on Mains Power Supply The Companion III can auto matically detect and set itself for voltages between110V and 240V Before connecting the Compan ion III to a mains electrical supply check that the Power Mains Switch is set to off then connect any peripherals and accessories required Apply power to the Companion Ill system After assembling the system and connecting the Companion III to the power mains supply it may be switched on The Power Mains Switch 16 is on the rear
292. l Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display You can choose to view up to 14 Doppler Parameter Boxes Figure 1 which show you current parameter values as the test is conducted on your subject The available parameters are e Depth e Sample Volume SV e Gain e Mean Velocity Mean e Systolic Sys e Diastolic Dia e Pulsatility Index PI e Resistance Index RI e HITS e Amplitude Ampl e Power e Filter e TIC TIS e Delta Mean D Mean Note The above parameters are described on the following pages 1 Position the mouse pointer inside the Doppler Parameter Box area and then click the Right mouse button Figure 2 2 Click on the Doppler Param eter Figure 3 you want to view or remove from the display and then click the Left or Right mouse button A checkmark means that Doppler parameter is currently being displayed 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as necessary S5 10 E Settings View toe Configuration Indicators Report Window Help Ggcenecoed E SoundTiak OWOH Envelope Spoor onoi E E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM CAStart I Nic Vue Figure 1 This figure illustrates an example screen with nine Doppler Boxes selected for display Doppler ont ation Indicators Report Wir A SuScoan E Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM Figure 2 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a
293. l power mode only one color scale is used and the flow icon is not drawn There are three different palettes for the color scales The first one Palette 1 is a mixed color scale as described previously The second one Palette 2 is a pure red toward pure blue away and pure green total scale The third one Palette 3 is similar to the second one but have white mixed in with the strongest color to help distinguish H I T S data See section Selecting the M Mode Display Color Palette for infor mation on how to toggle the color scales The background of the M Mode display is a dark gray This distinguishes areas of no insonation from areas of weak signal black Color M Mode image The Color M Mode Image is generated by making intensity calculations on the spectral data in the eight different spectral channels These spectral displays are often referred to as M Mode channel bands and are labeled corresponding to the spectral display windows For each spectral channel three average power values Flow towards the probe flow away from the probe and total power are calculated for each column of data These calculations assume the zero line is in the middle of the display Depending on the display mode See section Toggling the M Mode Flow Direction Coding one of the three calculated values is color coded according to the intensity scale and displayed for each of the eight channel bands In the cas
294. l Cursors S8 15 spectral display control window S 16 8 Spectral display window layout S16 5 Spectral Palette S5 22 S6 14 Spectral Snapshots 7 22 spectral snapshots S8 7 Spectral Zoom Box S8 32 Splitter Bar S8 8 Splitter Bar S 5 8 S6 8 Splitting the windows horizontally S5 9 S6 9 Splitting the windows vertically S5 9 S6 9 Squelch 7 17 start of the Trend data S8 44 Start the program S4 4 Start the program and open a file for review S8 5 stenosis 7 14 Step and Flow Direction 6 18 Stepping through a Protocol S7 36 sterile H1 6 Sterilising 16 MHz and 20 MHz Probes H5 5 Stop 17 20 stop symbol S8 28 Structure of Manual PR viii Summary Cont SoundTrak Screen Control Buttons S3 15 Summary Diagnostic Acq Screen Control Buttons S 3 11 Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Menus S 3 4 Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Overview S3 3 Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Control Buttons 3 13 Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Menus 3 8 Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Overview 83 7 Summary Monitoring Acq Screen Control Buttons 3 12 Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Menus S3 6 Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Overview S3 5 Summary Monitoring Review Screen Control Buttons 3 14 Summary Monitoring Review Screen Menus S3 10 Summary Monitoring Review Screen Overview S3 9 Summary Remote Control Functions 3 16 SV Sample Volume Length S5 11 S6 12 SV box S7 9 S7 10 Sweep 88 25 S8 33
295. l display In order to replay the SoundTrak data for a particular record use one of the following methods 1 Click on the Play y SoundTrak button 2 Click on Doppler and then on Play SoundTrak Figure 1 3 Using the Right mouse button click on one of the speaker symbols for a spectral display to get the menu as shown in Figure 2 and then choose one of the Replay SoundTrak options In multichannel modes you have the choice to listen to one channel individually or all channels together Note If Continuous SoundTrak data has been saved for the examination please refer to the next sections for a description how to postprocess this data S8 22 Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Play SoundTrak Noise Reduction Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope Units Display Range Figure 1 Select Doppler and then Play SoundTrak to listen to the Doppler audio signal saved along with the spectral data Replay Ch 1A SoundTrak Replay SoundTrak All Channels Figure 2 Select the appropriate choice to listen to either all channels together or one channel individually Ry Reviewing Continuous SoundTrak Data The continuous SoundTrak feature which is only supported in the monitoring mode is unique and provides the user with the ability to reanalyse entire monitor ing sessions in a thorough methodical manner and is particularly useful for event detection When all of
296. le click on the saved spectral snapshot iror Window He rd Wrei KKH Sia ie Ve ea RL WinTCO viewing Figure 2 Double click on the event in the Event List Figure 3 Double click on the event in the Trend Window Note If the review functions are used in the acquire mode the post processing will occur in a pop up review window This window needs to be focussed for correct operation S8 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Resizing the windows You can increase the size of the various boxes windows to increase the display area for improved viewing 1 To better view the Spectra and measured values increase the window to fill the entire screen by clicking on the Maximize button Figure 1 2 To improve your view you can increase the size of the Spectral window Trend window or Fast Curve window by clicking and holding down the mouse button on the Splitter Bar Figure 2 and then dragging the mouse until the desired window size is reached Monitoring Review Mode Figure 2 Examples of some Splitter bars which allow you to resize a window S8 8 Using the General Cursor Mode Spectral Displays In order to set cursors in the spectral display windows the user must activate a special cursor mode Inside of the General Cursor mode
297. length S16 10 Adjust the sweep speed 7 12 Adjust the zero baseline 7 13 Adjusting the Audio Gain S17 8 Adjusting the audio volume S7 17 Adjusting the intensity scale S 7 28 Adjusting the M Mode channel bands S16 11 Adjusting the Scale 17 8 Adjusting the SoundTrak data amplitude scale 8 31 Adjusting the Time Position for C S Playback S8 26 Advanced H I T S Indication 7 30 advanced H I T S information 8 29 ALARA H1 8 H1 9 aliasing S17 8 All Params S10 6 Altkey S2 5 Altering Display Parameters During C S Playback 8 25 Ampl Amplitude S5 11 S6 12 amplification 7 19 Amplitude H1 8 S7 8 Amplitude button S7 8 anaesthetic gases H1 6 Analog Audio I O Specifications H6 6 analog channels 17 9 Analog Connection Box H2 7 17 3 S17 9 analog connection box H3 7 H4 7 Analog Curve Inputs and Outputs 17 9 analog curve name S17 12 analog curve outputs 17 16 analog input output circuit board 17 3 S17 9 analoginputs H2 7 S17 12 Analog Inputs Outputs H3 7 H3 10 H4 7 H4 10 analog outputs H2 7 application training seminars S1 3 Applied Parts H1 9 Apply power to the Companion III system 3 11 arch S16 6 archiving S14 5 arrow is blue S7 14 S8 25 arrow isred S7 14 S8 25 arrow keys S16 8 Arrow prefix 5 3 S7 4 artifacts 7 31 Assign Lower Value 17 15 Assign the probe s and channel s 9 3 S16 4 Assign Upper Value S17 15 audio data S 8 30 audio flow separation S7 17 S7 18 Audio
298. lete a Settings file or Rename a Settings file see Chapter S9 in this guide NY Note The Settings files contain many parameters This chapter and chapter S5 describe the various configurable features all of which are saved in the Settings files If a setting containing an M Mode display is se lected please refer to Chapter S16 in this guide for all the details on using the M Mode display WW S7 4 Method 1 1 Click on the Settings Manager button ps B 2 Click on the file you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note The current Settings file is identified with an Arrow prefix The Diamond prefix is the current default Method 2 1 Click on the Settings menu Figure 2 2 Select the Settings Manager menu point 3 Click on the file you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note Figure 3 will not appear if the transducers are connected correctly to the system If incorrect connections were made make the corrections as necessary and then click on Load You can choose to override the system and click on the Manual assignment checkbox and then make your selections from this panel The number of channels must however remain the same Settings Manager x 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 03 17 00 08 12 14 AM 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM 1 C
299. light green and these will also be added to the event list The real time markers receive the time position corresponding to the point in time when the s key was pressed and not the time when the marker was finally selected Method 1 1 Click on the S Marker or I Marker softkey if assigned or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control 2 Select the appropriate marker out of the list Figure 1 using the mouse or use the up down arrow keys to select the label and press enter to save it Method 2 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair inside the Trend window at the point in time where the marker should be set Figure 2 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Select either Insert S Marker or Insert I Marker out of the menu Figure 3 3 Select the appropriate marker out of the list Figure 1 using the mouse or use the up down arrow keys to select the label and press enter to save it Note Refer to section S5 in this manual for information on configuring the S Marker and I Marker lists Performing an Exam Custom Marker Injection Diamox Biting Sneeze Embolus Artifact Probe Bump Custom Marker Hyperventilation Start Hyperventilation Stop Sleep Begin Sleep End X Clamp On X Clamp Off Figure 1 Event marker lists Figure 2 Right click inside the Trend window Insert S Marker Insert Marker Edit Event
300. long time H2 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Footswitch The system may be supplied with an optional three function footswitch See Figure 1 The footswitch has three user assign able switches F1 to F3 The configurability and function ality of the footswitch is described in chapter S2 in this manual Keyboard The system is supplied with a standard keyboard See Figure 2 for use in entering alpha numeric data The functionality of the keyboard is described in chapter S2 in this manual Note A smaller version keyboard containing a trackball pointing device is also available as an option H2 4 Figure 1 The footswitch DO CLOT CE Figure 2 The keyboard Pointing Devices The system may be supplied with an optional two button mouse See Figure 1 The system may also be supplied with an optional keyboard containing a trackball pointing device See Figure 2 A third type of pointing device which is available is the touchscreen display See Figure 3 The functionality of the three pointing devices is described in chapter S2 in this manual Note The touchscreen display is only available on the Companion HI system Pioneer TC8080 systems and Companion III LE models do not support the touchscreen Common Hardware Components Figure 1 The mouse Figure 2 The trackball a VIASYS ep Companion IHI s o Figure 3
301. lready been installed for your use A summary of steps for the Nicolet NicVue is included on this page If you need help please refer to the Nic Vue User Guide that accompanied this guide for instructions on starting the WinTCD application and for opening or creating a new patient record WY Note Depending on the version of NicVue which is installed on the system the icons may vary For older systems the icons should be displayed as shown below in Figure 4 E gt New Acquire TCD D Figure 4 Older NicVue Icons S4 4 Summary of steps 1 From the Desktop and f7 l using the Left mouse button double click _ on the NicVue icon 2 You now must create a new patient record iee ecru by clicking on the New New button or clicking on the desired patient record listed on the NicVue window 3 From the NicVue window click on the TCD M button for monitoring or click on the TCD D button 9 for diagnostic TCD D 4 Click on the Acquire button CP Acquire 5 After a several seconds the window and panel in Figure appear Either click on Dismiss or wait for the system to exit and display either Figure 2 or 3 automati cally Go to 6 If you selected TCD M in step 3 go to Chapter S5 when an Acquisit
302. ls are stored to the external recording device which has been attached to the output connectors on the analog connection box Note The voltage outputs are fixed to an optimized level and are not user adjustable Using the External Inputs and Outputs Ch 1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA Power 49 Figure 1 Spectral Display with Record Mode Indicator Red Dot S17 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Using the Playback Mode When a playback configuration file is loaded the program turns off the internal Doppler and sets up the system to read in the appropriate audio signals from the configured input channels on the analog connection box This is indicated to the user through the use of a small indication symbol green arrow next to speaker added to each of the spectral displays Figure 1 In addition the title bars of the spectral displays are altered to indicate audio playback and the depth power amplitude sample volume filter and TIC TIS indicators will show In the playback mode the system functionality differs in many ways compared to the standard acquisi tion mode All Doppler functions which are no longer available have been switched off The display functions zero sweep etc still function as usual The other functions which have been altered are described in the following sections 17 8 Audio Playback Inputs 1 2 2 MHz MCA Figure 1 Spectral Display with Play
303. ls in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Monitoring Mode Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Ctrl Alt F Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Diagnostic Mode Figure 2 Click on Display Range Note In the freeze and review windows the gain key adjusts the software gain setting which shifts the signal strength up and down the color scale to allow fine adjustments in a post processing mode The dB values in the color scale are adjusted appropriately Ry Turning Curve recordings on off Monitoring Mode only Note Curve recording is available in the Monitoring Mode only Curve recordings capture Enve lope and Trend data only To turn Curve recordings on or off use any of the following methods Method A 1 Click on the Curve Recording on off button PRE REC Method B 1 Click on Doppler and then on Curve Recording Figure 1 Method C 1 If one of the softkeys at the bottom of the screen display is assigned the Curve Recording On Off function either click on that softkey or
304. lues listed on this page or damage to the probe may result H5 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual User Maintenance Companion Ill In case of a fault User Mainte nance is limited to the following If the Companion Ill system does not power up e Check that the mains power supply lead is connected to the Power Mains Inlet 15 is connected to a suitable mains outlet and is switched on e Check the Power Mains Switch 16 is in the on position e Check the Power Mains Input fuses in the Fuse Drawer 17 Input mains fuses are accessed by pulling out the fuse drawer located beside the Power Mains Switch 16 Ensure that the Power Mains Lead is disconnected and the unit is switched of before accessing the fuses Replace ment fuses are as follows Two off T2 5AH 250V 20mm fuses to IEC 127 should be fitted e Check the mains fuse in the mains plug if fitted H5 6 If the pointing device mouse trackball does not work e Ensure that the mouse connec tor is connected to the Pointing Device Socket 1 e Clean the mouse inside and out as described earlier in this chapter If the keyboard does not work e Ensure that the keyboard connector is connected to the Keyboard Socket 2 on the rear panel If the printer does not work e Ensure that the printer connec tor is connected to the 25 Way Parallel Pr
305. m an external device as well as providing the ability to obtain the spectral envelope curves as analog outputs Up to eight analog channels can be read in displayed and saved simultaneously Up to eight analog channels are also provided as outputs for envelope curves If audio inputs or outputs are also used then the total number of available channels is reduced The connection of the external devices should be made via the optional Analog Connection Box Figure 1 which contains eight RCA standard audio input connectors and eight RCA output connectors Once connected the signals need to be properly configured via the External Connections configura tion menu see Creating Curve I O Settings later in this chapter Using the External Inputs and Outputs Once signals have been config ured they are savable to the settings files or the protocol files In this way numerous combina tions of signals are possible by just loading a new setting or protocol and the configuration is only done once Note The analog curve input output facility requires that the optional analog input output circuit board is installed in the system If this board is not installed the external connections configuration menu point will not be functional Please consult your local Nicolet distributor for information on upgrading your system hardware Figure 1 Analog Connection Box lt gt WARNING On both the Pioneer
306. milar way to the normal operating mode However once the curve data saving is turned on the system will start to record Continuous SoundTrak data in parallel with the curve data to the disk for all the channels which are active While Continuous SoundTrak data is being recording a blue dot appears next to the speaker symbols Figure 1 in a similar way to the red dot which is used in the external audio record mode The Continuous SoundTrak saving stops when the curve saving is deactivated or when the user exits the acquire mode The blue dot is removed from the spectral displays and replaced with a pause symbol when the curve saving is deactivated In this way it is possible to do intermittent type monitoring during the exam and create a type of segmented saving to reduce disk space requirements 17 18 Ch 1 S1 2 Mhz PW MCA 50 Figure 1 Spectral Display with Continuous SoundTrak Record Indicator Blue Dot Note The Continuous SoundTrak data is only recorded when the curve recording is active This creates a 1 1 recording of curve data and the associated Continuous SoundTrak data to ensure proper operation in the review mode See Chapter S8 in this handbook Note Each time the Continuous SoundTrak recording is started the system makes an estimate of the amount of recording time available in hours by checking the free drive space and making a calculation based on the present system configuration If the a
307. mm depth but the majority of the signal comes from the depths closer to 40 mm As a second example non linked mode of operation Figure 2 the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time are different lengths 4 mm and 8 mm The true axial length of the sample volume is also a convolution of these two times but results in a different shape As one can see the axial sample volume length ranges from 34 46 mm depth Depending on the lengths of the pulses the sloping of the convolu tion will vary to allow more precise sample volumes at the cost of the S N ratio S7 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adjust the sweep speed When you adjust the Sweep speed you change the time scale of the horizontal axis in the Doppler window The sweep speed ranges from 2 0 sec to 41 sec in approximately one second steps The range limits vary with the number of channels and can be limited by the computer speed Use the Sweep key Figure 1 to adjust the sweep speed You may also use Ctrl F8 to decrease or Shift F8 to increase the sweep speed Note Extremely slow sweep speed settings will have an adverse effect on displayed and calculated values of P I Mean Systolic Diastolic and R I S7 12 Turn on the envelope Envelope places an outline around the spectra It is used to calculate the mean velocity pulsatility index etc An envelope may be placed around spectra designating flow towards
308. mount of recording time available in hours is less than 10 then the amount is displayed in the message window and removed after a few seconds Note As a result of the large amount of space which is required to store the Continuous SoundTrak data the message showing the amount of recording time available automatically appears when the time available is under hour In this case the message is drawn in red text and it appears every minute Note The amount of recording time available and the data rate require ments for the active setting can be found in the Exam Info menu point Keeping Track of File Size In many cases especially when the continuous SoundTrak feature is used the WinTCD examination file sizes can get quite large In these cases users may want to track their file sizes so they can stop the examination before the examination size exceeds the backup media size In order to keep track of the file size an additional file size indicator has been added to the right side of the trend display title bar Figure 1 This text indicator is in the format File Size XXXMB XX The MB number is the total file size in MB and the number is the file size as a percentage of the configured maximum file size See section S14 If the file size goes over 1GB then the numbers are readjusted and the letters GB are used Using the External Inputs and Outputs The file size indicator is updated every minute
309. mouse button on one of the three tabs to choose the window type 3 Click the Left mouse button on the selection arrow to the right of the function to change and choose the new function from the list of possible functions 4 Repeat until all nine footswitch functions have been assigned a specific function and click the mouse on the OK button to finish Note The remote control S keys can be configured by selecting the function Configure S keys out of the Configuration menu In the pop up dialog box Figure 2 a set of S keys can be defined for each of the three operation windows main window freeze window and review window Preparing the System for Diagnostics Footswitch Configuration Main Window Freeze Window Review Window r Left Switch Function Depth Up Middle Switch Function444 Depth Down X Right Switch Function Cancel Figure 1 The three footswitch keys on the Footswitch can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window S Key Configuration Main Window Freeze Window Review Window 1 Function Curve Saving On Off X S2 Function Indicator On Off v 3 Function Filter Up v S4 Function S5 Function Units cm sec kHz X Cancel Fig
310. n velocity of the Doppler envelope The Mean velocity is a calculation of the average curve measured over the complete sweep of the enve lope You can choose three different combinations of measure ment results Figure 1 Sys Systolic The Sys box shows the peak Systolic flow which is the highest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope RI Resistance Index The RI box shows the Pourcelot measurement of pulsatility It is calculated as follows R I Psys Edia Psys where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow PI Pulsatility Index The PI box shows the Gosling s Pulsatility Index which is a measurement of pulsatility It is calculated as follows P I Psys Edia Mean where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow 1 Click on the Envelope softkey or press the corresponding S key on the remote control or press the F6 key on the key board until the desired display appears Dia Diastolic The Dia box shows the end Diastolic flow which is the lowest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope D Mean Delta Mean The D Mean Parameter Box shows the Delta Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra The Delta Mean velocity is a similar calculation to the standard Mean Velocity but this box is displayed as a percent of a standard value By using the Set Delta Mean function the 100 level for the Delta Mean box is taken from t
311. n Fast Curve Window Using the External Inputs and Outputs Note The display of the Fast Curve window in the monitoring acquire and review modes is configurable so users who do not wish to see it can toggle it off and get more space for their other windows When the window is not shown the splitter bar between the two curve windows is not displayed anymore Note When the Fast Curve window is not shown in the monitoring acquire the data saving should continue to run in the background When the Fast Curve window is turned back on in the monitoring acquire mode the spectral displays should clear out and all the displays should appear again and start sweeping from the left side of the display This will ensure that the displays are synchronized v Toolbar Spectral Palette gt Color M Mode Palette gt v Fast Curve Window Figure 1 View Menu 17 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Configuring the Display for External Curve Inputs After the curve inputs have been selected they still need to be configured for display in the trend and fast curve windows One of the following procedures should be used Method 1 1 Click on Configuration Figure 1 2 Click on Configure Trend or on Configure Fast Curves 3 Click on Curve Configura tion 4 Go to the next page Method 2 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair inside the Trend or Fast Curve wind
312. n fleas Papon windon Hop Se FE a Ea Pikl p a Curve __Sounctrak On ott_ Envelope __Specira Oniott J isan eve e a Figure 2 Example display with Spectra turned on fam Seti Yw Doppler Conon ers Popor Window Bop aa Z Fyak Figure 3 Click on Spectra On Off or press the corresponding S Key on the remote control S7 21 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Saving Spectral Snapshots There are five different methods to save spectral records Method 1 1 When you see a display you want to save for review press the Save key Figure 1 on the remote control Method 2 1 Press F1 on the keyboard Method 3 1 Click on the Save NYY Snapshot button Method 4 1 Click on Doppler and then on Save Spectral Snapshot Method 5 Monitoring Mode only 1 Enable the Indicator algorithm to automatically save the spectra each time a H I T S occurs e See Enabling the Indicator later in this chapter WY 7 22 AMPLITUDE SWEEP DEPTH SCALE Figure 1 Press the Save key on the remote control or press F1 on the keyboard to manually save the current Doppler screen to the hard disk Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recordin
313. n made for the step the number of saves will be displayed Extra saves for a step will be added to the end of the report printout Preparing the System for Diagnostics Comment column The ninth column displays the comments if any that have been created to describe each step Cursor bar The blue cursor if displayed identifies the present position in the Protocol list The bar can be moved up and down using the Up Down Arrow keys on the Key board and Remote Control You can also choose a step by clicking on the desired step Active Step indicator In cases where the Blue cursor is not the active step the active step is identified by a White cursor and a Red right pointing arrow appears in the active steps Step Number column Viasys WinTCD Monitoring Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 1 of 2 Patient Name Doe John Q Hospital Hospital X Patient ID 000001 Patient SS 123 45 6758 Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Column 1 Column 2 Row 1 Row 1 Column 1 Column 2 Row 2 Row 2 Column 1 Column 2 Row 3 Row 3 Comment Line 1 Figure 1 Report position matrix S6 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Saving Doppler DSP changes made to the active Protocol step After making adjustments to the Doppler DSP settings e g Depth Amplitude etc you can choose to save those changes permanently with the active highlighted
314. n on the page s at the end of the report Click on No to exclude those saved spectral displays Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files Report Text Report Graphics Report Export SoundTrak Figure 1 Click on Report and then on Graphics Report Graphics Report Configuration Comments v Footer Comment Conclusion Save to File Cancel Figure 2 Checkmark the Footer Comment and or Conclusion checkboxes and type in the desired information Click on Print when done WinTCD There are snapshots with undefined print positions Do you want to add them to the end of the protocol Yes No Figure 3 Click on Yes to include the unassigned saved spectral displays to the end of the report or No to exclude them Note The function button Save to File can be used as an alternative to the Print button In this case the report will be saved in PDF format and an additional entry will appear in the Nic Vue software for the file Refer to the section Exporting Reports to PDF 12 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Printing a Graphics report without defined print positions This type of Graphic report is always used in the monitoring mode but is only for Diagnostic exams which used a protocol without defined print positions The advantage of this procedure is that saves can be selected deselected for printing although
315. n option with the mouse 2 3 Selecting spectral multi depth channels 16 8 Selecting the Cursor Type 8 9 S8 16 S8 57 Selecting the M Mode color display palette S16 14 Selecting the M Mode Display Color Palette S16 6 Selection tab 12 8 separate scales S8 58 S8 64 serial port H3 7 H4 7 Servicing the Instrument H5 8 Set as Default S10 14 Set Delta Mean S 5 12 S6 13 S7 26 S7 27 Set the Copy Window S5 14 S6 16 Set the direction of blood flow 7 14 Set the display color 5 22 Set the Doppler color S5 22 Set the Event List window S5 14 Set the Fast Curve scales S8 49 Set the filter 7 14 Set the flow velocity scale S7 8 Set the M Mode depth scale offset zero S16 9 Set the M Mode depth scale range 16 9 Set the parameters and window sizes S9 4 Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions S5 5 S6 6 S8 6 Set the screen display 5 4 S6 5 Set the Trend curves scales 5 20 S8 41 Set the Trend display options 5 21 8 42 Set the Trend window S5 16 S5 21 S8 42 Set up the acquisition parameters S7 6 Setting Average Curve Cursors S8 61 Setting Differential Time Cursors S8 14 S8 37 S8 59 Setting Differential Velocity Cursors S8 13 Setting Dual Crosshair Cursors S 8 12 Setting Horizontal Curve Cursors 8 58 S8 59 Setting Horizontal Velocity Cursors S8 10 Setting the Delta Mean 100 Reference Level 7 26 Setting the HFE Breakpoint S7 20 Index 10 Setting Vertical Curve Cursors 8 60 Setting Vertical Time C
316. n the events you want displayed in the Trend window Figure 2 e Mode Change e Doppler Settings e Save Events HITS e User Defined Events Event types which are not checked will just be displayed as a tick at the top of the display with no text Toggle scale sharing 3 Check the Scale Sharing function to toggle the scale sharing on This will allow more than one trend curve to be displayed in the same scale section of the trend Leave the box unchecked to force each trend curve to have its own scale section in the trend Preparing the System for Monitoring Toggle background grid 4 Check the Show Background Grid function to toggle the background grid for the trend on and off Leave the box unchecked to hide the grid 5 When finished making your selections click on OK Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 1 Click on Display Options Trend Display Options Indicators Curve Recording etc Depth PW CW Scale etc Auto and Manual Save events H LT S User Defined Event Markers Scale Sharing Identical curves share same section of display Show Background Grid aa Cancel Figure 2 Make your choices by clicking on checkmarking the desired option s S5 21 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set
317. nalog Connection Box H4 7 Connecting an External DAT Recorder H4 7 Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System H4 8 Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System H4 9 Assembling the System H4 10 Mains Power Supply H4 12 Apply Power to the Pioneer TC8080 System H4 12 Information in this chapter is subject to change without notice H4 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H4 2 Labels and Symbols The following labels and symbols are affixed to the Pioneer TC8080 Warns the user to consult this manual and any other accompany ing documentation A Power Mains Supply OFF O Power Mains Supply ON Stereo Headphones 3 5mm jack socket Potential Equalization Terminal y Mouse Pointing Device Connec tion Keyboard Connection RJ 45 Network Connection USB Universal Serial Bus Connection Parallel Printer Connection VGA Monitor Signal Connection Pioneer TC8080 System RS 232 Serial Connnection lOlolo Line Out 3 5mm jack socket Line In 3 5mm jack socket lt gt Microphone In 3 5mm jack socket Vd H4 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual AG 2 gt 5 e 5 2 5 4 fp 3 es lo pey d i i Figure 1 Back Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 Power Mains Inlet N Fuse Drawer and Input Voltage Selector Isolated Power Mains Outlets WW Potential Equalization Termi 4 q nal 5S
318. nctions of the system and software only If information is needed on the basic principles and examination techniques please refer to the vast amount of literature available The standard work is Transcranial Doppler Sonography edited by Rune Aaslid published by Springer Verlag Wien New York 1986 For more information on available application training seminars please contact Nicolet or your local Nicolet distributor S1 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page S1 4 Chapter S2 Entering Commands Mouse commands Moving the mouse pointer Selecting an option with the mouse Using the touchscreen display Keyboard commands Underlined letter commands Pull down menu selections Entering text using the keyboard Text edit command keys Entering text using the mouse and keyboard Using the remote control Using the footswitch Resizing a window Moving a window Maximizing a window S2 3 S2 3 S2 3 S2 8 S2 9 S2 10 S2 10 S2 10 This chapter describes the various methods of entering commands to your system e Mouse Trackball e Touchscreen Display e Keyboard e Remote Control e Footswitch It will be very beneficial to read through this chapter and become familiar with the various methods You then can choose which method best meets your personal preference and continue with the next chapter Note Although there are three methods for entering commands not
319. nd column displays the vessel label including the side flag which identifies which side is being tested S6 18 Protocol List Example Protocol EME Step Vessel Label Probe 126 SiphonR i 27 VAPr L i 28 VA Di L 16 mmn c 6 Mm n c 4 30 VA Di R i 31 BA Pr i 32 BA Di 6 mm n c 6 mm n c 6 mm n c 2 MHz PW S1 68mm 10mm 10mm 39 0 1 ay 2 2 MHz PW S1 68 mm _ 10mm 10mm 39 g 0 e 0 0 0 Depth SV Tx Rx Power Report Pos Saved Comment 125 OphthPr R 2MHzPW S1 54mm 10mm 10mm 9 Page 5 1 2 1 Start Orbital Right Jump to Carotid Sip Start Suboccipital L Follow Vertebral n c Page 5 2 2 Page 6 1 1 n c Page 6 2 1 Follow Vertebral Jump to Basilar Follow Basilar Page 6 2 2 Page 6 3 1 Page 6 3 2 Figure 1 Protocol List window Transducer column The third column displays the transducer type and mode The possibilities are 1 6MHz PW 2MHz PW 4MHz PW 8MHz PW 16MHz PW 20MHz PW 4MHz CW and 8MHz CW If the transducer does not change from one step to the next a symbol will appear in the column until a different transducer is selected The steps showing a fixed depth setting will contain all the Doppler parameters Following the transducer type and mode is the socket number enclosed by parenthesis S1 S2 S3 or S4 into which the trans ducer is plugged e g 2MHz PW S1 If the transducer socket is configured as Any position S will foll
320. nd extracranial investigation e Extended term unilateral bilateral and multilateral cerebrovascular monitoring e Microvascular studies The systems can be used for the following applications e Intracranial stenosis e Detection of vasospasm due to subarachnoid hemorrhage e Detection of arteriovenous malformations AVMs e Assessment of collateral pathways e Document important sudden changes in flow velocities e Track and establish trends of flow velocities during drug administration in the operating room e Help improve surgical tech niques through immediate feedback of the results of interventional procedures including the study and documentation of possible microemboli which may result in stroke e Demonstrate the resulting effects of new or experimental drugs on intracranial blood flow velocities e Document the informative results of CO2 reactivity testing e Evaluate flow velocity profiles inside vessels during neuro or vascular surgery by placing microvascular transducers directly on vessels System Comparison The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system are essentially identical in their intended applications The main difference between the systems is that the Pioneer TC8080 system is intended as a desktop or cart based system and the Companion IMI system is designed as a portable system The Pioneer TC8080 system is the top of the line product including a
321. nd the Copy window In order for the methods described on this page to work the main Windows focus needs to be on the Spectral M Mode window Selecting spectral multi depth channels When one of the large spectral windows is focussed it is possible to rotate through the associated multidepth channels small spectral control windows by using the up down arrow keys Each time an arrow key is pressed the large spectral display window is filled with the contents of the next or previous multidepth channel At this point the Doppler parameters for this channel can be altered The title bar highlighting the small multidepth channel control window moves accord ingly At any time it is also possible to select the multidepth channels by clicking the mouse on the desired small spectral control window This works in a similar way to using the arrow keys If the small spectral control window is from the other socket then the focus on the large spectral window is also changed This is also the case if an M Mode window is highlighted At any time it is also possible to select the multidepth channels by clicking the mouse on the appro priate band label in the M Mode display Set the M Mode depth scale range Multiple depth scale settings are available for the M Mode display You can change the scale to adjust the vertical height of the M Mode channel bands When the M Mode display is highlighted focussed use the
322. nearly increasing dB value is added to the dB value coming from the DSP processor before the spectral color is assigned That is for every frequency bin above the break frequency an increasing dB value is added by default 2 8dB per bin When this mode is switched on the baseline zero line should be moved to the bottom of the screen so that the top of the screen is the maximum flow velocity The High Frequency Enhance HFE mode can be toggled on and off for the highlighted spectral display by using any one of the following methods S7 20 Method 1 1 Click on the High Frequency Enhance button z Method 2 1 Click on Doppler and then on HFE Mode Figure 1 Method 3 1 If one of the softkeys was assigned the HFE Mode On Off function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Setting the HFE Breakpoint For better fine tuning to match the signal at hand the HFE Breakpoint frequency can be altered by using the HFE Breakpoint s key The frequency can be changed from 2000 Hz up to 5000 Hz in steps of 1000 Hz Note The display of the spectral envelope curves will be turned off automatically when the HFE mode is activated They are reactivated automatically when the HFE mode is turned off The envelope curves can be manually turned on during the HFE mode if desired by using the standard Envelope function Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Sn
323. nections were made make the corrections as necessary and then click on Load You can choose to override the system and click on the Manual assignment checkbox and then make your selections from this panel The number of channels must however remain the same Settings Manager xl 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM 03 17 00 09 23 18 AM 03 17 00 08 12 14 AM 03 18 00 08 23 35 AM 03 18 00 09 11 06 AM 1 Channel EME 1 Channel HITS EME 1x2 MD HITS EME 1x4 MD HITS EME gt 2 Channel EME 2 Channel HITS EME 2x2 MD HITS EME 4 Channel EME Load Save Rename Delete Figure 1 Click on the Settings file you want to load and then click on Load Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 2 Click on the Settings menu and then on the Settings Manager menu point Probes and settings check r Result Setting OK r Probes in setting Ch 1 Ch 2 n a 2 MHz r Available prol Ch 1 I n a n a 2 MHz C uniairect 1 uniairect unigirect 2 unidirect a na na E na Enable Enable Enable Enable IV Autoload if check is successful Load Variable probe position F Manual assignment Cancel Figure 3 This panel does not appear if the probes are connected correctly to the system Pioneer TC8080 example
324. negative values Note The measurements described on this page are made every cardiac cycle Each signal calculation is made from the envelope of the Doppler signal The Mean velocity is derived from the envelope and is updated every second independent of the cardiac cycle For all calculations the parameters related to blood flow toward the transducer are displayed as positive values and those related to blood flow away from the transducer are Setting the Delta Mean 100 Reference Level When using the Delta Mean parameter box the 100 refer ence level must be set You can set the reference level for the delta mean calculation of the high lighted spectral display by using one of the following methods 1 If one of the softkeys is labeled Set Delta Mean click on that softkey or press the corre sponding S key on the remote control 0r 1 Click on Doppler and then on Set Delta Mean Or 1 Click on the Set Delta Mean button A Y 100 displayed as negative values regardless of the Direction setting Note In the cases where the signal quality is so poor that the envelope curve cannot properly follow the signal there is the possibility to manually calculate the parameter box values by setting cursors in the freeze or spectral review windows Refer to the section Manually Recalculating Values in Chapter S8 for more information on this topic S7 26 Mean Mean Velocity The Mean box shows the Mea
325. nfigure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 2 Click on Configuration and then on Save Configuration 8 39 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Configure the Trend curves display You can choose to have the Trend window display the long term monitoring curves of designated Doppler parameters Figure 1 The Trend window Figure 1 can display up to 11 trend curves per channel specified via the Config ure Trend window Figure 2 Method 1 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair anywhere inside the Trend window Figure 1 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Click on Curve Configuration Figure 2 3 Go to the next page Method 2 1 Click on Configuration Figure 3 2 Click on Configure Trend 3 Click on Curve Configuration Figure 4 4 Go to the next page S8 40 Figure 1 Right click inside the Trend window Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 3 Click on Configure Trend Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Prin
326. nfomnaton tains chapisics subject to change without notice Servicing the Instrument H5 8 H5 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H5 2 Cleaning the Equipment lt gt WARNING Disconnect from mains supply before cleaning the unit lt I gt CAUTION Care should be taken to allow NO liquid ingress into the unit the keyboard trackball the SVGA monitor or printer Keyboard e The keyboard case and keys may be cleaned using a damp soft lint free cloth e Do not use any petroleum based solvents such as ethanol as this may damage the plastic components used in the keyboard construction e Do not pour or spray cleaning solutions directly onto the keyboard as this could result in electrical failure of the keyboard Care and Maintenance of the Equipment Mouse e The ball and underside of the mouse should be regularly cleaned using a soft lint free cloth and mild detergent e Do not use any petroleum based solvents such as ethanol as this may damage the components used in the construction e To remove the ball turn the ball collar anti clockwise e The ball can now be removed by inverting the mouse to allow the ball to fall into the palm of the hand e Blow gently into the mouse housing or wipe out with a soft cloth to remove any dust or lint that might have col lected If the mouse remains sluggish try using a cotton swab to clean
327. ng Reports to PDF Automatically Saving PDF Reports Exporting SoundTrak data to WAV files Retrieving exported SoundTrak WAV files Capturing Screens Table of Contents 811 3 S11 4 11 5 S11 6 S11 7 11 8 12 1 12 1 12 3 12 4 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 8 S12 10 S12 11 S12 12 S12 13 S12 14 TOC xvii Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S13 Help Menu This chapter describes the Help menu function Chapter S14 System Menu This chapter describes the System menu function Chapter S15 Microvascular Option This chapter describes the 16 MHz PW and 20 MHz PW Microvascular options which have been designed to allow intraopera tive investigations of microvessels TOC xviii About WinTCD Exam Information Software license upgrade menu Using the infrared remote control Online probe test File Size Limitation Menu 16 MHz and 20 MHz probe operation notes 13 3 13 4 14 3 14 4 14 4 S14 5 S15 3 Chapter S16 Using the Color M Mode Display This chapter describes how to use the color M Mode display in conjunction with the multi depth monitoring mode Loading color M Mode settings Creating a new color M Mode settings file Spectral display window layout Color M Mode display window Color M Mode image Highlighting the appropriate window Selecting spectral multi depth channels Set the M Mode depth scale range Set the M Mode depth sc
328. ni Figure 1 Scale key Ctrl F2 Shift F2 gt ep ep apie MUTE FREEZE PRINT i D 0 0 O Gr gp erp D O Figure 2 Zero key Ctrl F3 Shift F3 16 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adjust the sample volume depth Since all the spectral channels are linked MD Link On when the M Mode display is present the depth settings of all channels can be changed simultaneously Use the Depth key Figure 1 to move the sample volume of all channels either deeper or shal lower You may also use Ctrl F1 to decrease or Shift F1 to increase the depth Altering the depth setting shifts the M Mode channel bands either up or down in the display The range of depth settings is limited by the pulse repetition frequency PRF setting so automatic scale reductions may occur Adjust the sample volume length Since all the spectral channels are linked MD Link On when the M Mode display is present the sample volume length of all channels can be changed simulta neously Use the Sample key to adjust the length of the sample volume of all channels Figure 2 You may also use Ctrl F6 to decrease or Shift F6 to increase the sample volume S16 10 The Sample volume is the axial length of the area from which Doppler signals are obtained The sample size can range from 1 to 15 mm and its lengt
329. nitor An extra external VGA monitor may be connected to the Com panion III Connect the monitor signal cable to the VGA Monitor Signal Socket socket 12 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Connecting Serial Devices Standard serial port compatible devices may be connected to the 9 way D type RS 232 connector socket 8 on the back panel of the Companion III Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Please note that use of the remote hand controller and footswitch precludes the use of other serial accessories Companion III System Connecting the Optional Analog Connection Box An optional analog connection box may be connected to the Companion III Connect the analog connection box 2 cables to the Analog Inputs Outputs Sockets sockets 10 11 Ensure that the cables are fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Connecting an External DAT Recorder If an external DAT recorder is to be used to record and playback the Doppler audio data via the analog connection box it needs to be properly connected Two channels of audio information for each Doppler FFT display are required and these need to be connected in the correct ord
330. nitoring Mode only not the Diagnostic Mode When switching into the monitor ing acquire mode the system automatically loads a default setting If the default Settings file is not the file you wish to use during the examination perform either of the following procedures to select a different Settings file To Create a New Settings file create a New Default Settings file Delete a Settings file or Rename a Settings file see the next page and or Chapter S9 in this guide WY Note Color M Mode displays are only available with 1x8 and 2x4 settings if a valid M Mode display software license is installed in the system See Chapter S14 in this guide Note Factory default settings containing an M Mode display always include the word M Mode in the setting name Using the Color M Mode Display Method 1 1 Click on the Settings Manager button ed ee 2 Click on the file usually has M Mode as part of the name you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note The current Settings file is identified with an Arrow prefix The Diamond prefix is the current default Method 2 1 Click on the Settings menu Figure 2 2 Select the Settings Manager menu point 3 Click on the file usually has M Mode as part of the name you want to use and then click on Load Figure 1 Note Figure 3 will not appear if the transducers are connected correctly to the system If incorrect con
331. nt even Deon Tine NI z We ver co feeving Figure 1 The Protocol List window Doppler Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Probe F10 SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Ctrl Alt F Squelch Noise Reduction HFE Mode Ctrl H Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 2 Click on Doppler and then on Probe Select a new probe x Available probes 2 MHz 4 MHz Socket Socket Figure 3 Click on the Socket button that corresponds to the probe you want to use Companion III example NSA Figure 4 Press the Probe button io JO L2 Adding New Steps This procedure will add a new step at the end of the current list of protocol steps 1 Right click anywhere inside the Protocol List window Figure 1 2 Click on Add New Step Figure 2 3 Go to the next page Inserting a new step Use this procedure to add a new step in front of the selected highlighted step 1 Right click on the step in front of which you want to insert a new step Figure 1 2 Click on Insert New Step Before Step Figure 2 3 Go to the next page Editing a step Use this procedure to edit the active step 1 Right click on the step that is highlight
332. nt time of the spectral display window is displayed at the far right side of the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar In the case of a static saved spectral display record the save time of the record representing the end time of the sweep is displayed This corre sponds with the event list time entry In the case that the spectral display window is playing back continuous SoundTrak data then the current data time is displayed and incremented every millisec ond Note For more information concerning the creation of Continuous SoundTrak data please refer to sections S9 S16 and S17 in this guide lt gt S a Figure 1 Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar S8 23 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual 44 lt gt 1 gt _ ee Figure 1 Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar Replaying Continuous SoundTrak Data At any point during the review session the user is able to start the playback of the continuous SoundTrak data by clicking on the play symbol third from left in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar The starting point of the playback is the time shown in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar The data from this part of the file is then read out and the Doppler parameters are displayed in the parameter boxes Figure 2 The FFT s are recalculated causing the spectral displays to start sweeping from the left side of the display The audio is heard just like in the original acquire mode The spectral title bar changes to
333. ntensity of 33 dB or more bright yellow corresponds to an intensity of 14 dB and black to an intensity of 9 dB or less sk I T Es ARRE ESEA Tr Previous Sip O Sea O O E on ee e Te winreo eera cs Figure 1 The intensity scale colors represent the signal intensity ranging from black lower dB value to red upper dB value S7 28 Adjusting the intensity scale You can adjust the intensity scale of the spectral display at any time to better match the type of signal by using one of the two methods below There are six possible ranges available for the intensity scale Weak Doppler signals should use a smaller spectral display range difference between top and bottom intensity values Strong Doppler signals should use a larger spectral display range Noisy Doppler signals are best displayed with the lower intensity value being larger Method 1 1 If one of the S keys at the bottom of the screen display is assigned the Display Range function click on the button or press the corresponding S key on the remote control to toggle through the six ranges Method 2 1 Click on Doppler and then on Display Range to toggle through the six ranges Figure 2 Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Ctrl Alt F Noise Reduction Link Channe
334. nter will change into a differential time cursor pointer when the mouse is positioned in the data section of the SoundTrak display Figure 1 General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 3 SoundTrak Right Click Menu S8 36 Figure 2 Right Click Inside of SoundTrak Display Measuring Time Differences in the SoundTrak Data continued Differential Time cursors are single value cursors which measure the time difference between any two points in the SoundTrak display This method is very useful when making time delay measurements Setting Differential Time Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time cursors may be set by 1 Clicking on the first of two points you want to measure and then holding down the Left mouse button Figure 1 2 Dragging the mouse until the highlighted box is over the second point and then releasing the mouse button Figure 1 An H Bar appears between the two points and the differential time value is displayed Figure 2 Saving Differential Time Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time Cursors may be saved by simply resaving the spectral record Reviewing Data Click and drag to create a box SodydTrak 2200 2300 fisec rak 2200 2300 msec Figure 2 SoundTrak Display Differential Time Cursor S8 37 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Working With S
335. o broadband loudspeakers or optional stereo headphones flow separated or non direc tional Noise reduction toggle for high sound quality Squelch gel mute control Boost control 2 or 3 levels Up to 8 depths on any channel Up to 4 transducers probes running simultaneously Choice of any 2 frequencies running simultaneously Inputs Outputs Specifications Companion III System e 2 Self detecting active Doppler transducer probe sockets e Infrared remote hand controller sensor e 6 way mini DIN mouse pointing device socket e 6 way mini DIN keyboard socket e Microphone socket e Line in socket e Line out socket e Stereo headphone socket e 2 USB sockets e RJ 45 network connector e 25 way parallel printer connector e SVGA monitor connector e Analogue Audio 8 channels in out 15 way D plug and socket e 2RS 232 serial port connec tors Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 System e 4 Self detecting active Doppler transducer probe sockets e Infrared remote hand controller sensor e 6 way mini DIN mouse pointing device socket e 6 way mini DIN keyboard socket e Microphone socket e Line in socket e Line out socket e Stereo headphone socket e 2 USB sockets e RJ 45 network connector e 25 way parallel printer connector e SVGA monitor connector e Analogue Audio 8 channels in out 15 way D plug and socket e RS 232 serial port conne
336. o the RJ 45 socket socket 9 on the back panel 10 If any USB peripherals are to be used with this unit connect them to the USB Sockets 10 on the back panel 11 Connect the remote hand controller to the Remote Hand Controller Socket 13 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 12 If the optional footswitch is to be used with this unit connect the footswitch to the RS 232 Serial Interface Socket socket 13 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connec tor jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 13 Connect the audio bypass lead to the Line Out Socket 15 and to the Line In Socket 17 14 If the optional analog connec tion box is to be used with this unit connect the analog connection box 2 cables to the Analog Inputs Outputs Sockets sockets 19 20 Ensure that the cables are fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance In addition make sure that the external device e g DAT recorder is also properly connected 15 Plug the Power Mains Lead into the Power Mains Inlet 1 on the rear of the unit and into a suitable wall socket 16 The unit is now ready to be switched on Pioneer TC8080 System Figure 1 Pioneer TC8080 system on a cart
337. of the Trend data The Fast Curve Position Indicator is a vertical white bar located in the Trend window which marks the center of the Fast Curve window You can jump the Indicator to the end or beginning of the Trend data The Fast Curve data window will automatically update to correspond to the Indicator s new location if the Indicator moves outside of the current range of the displayed Fast Curve data Method 1 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Figure 1 2 Click on Go to Trend End or Go to Trend Begin Figure 2 Method 2 2 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Figure 3 3 Click on Go to Trend End or Go to Trend Begin Figure 4 8 52 a Figure 1 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Figure 3 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 2 Click on Go to Trend Begin or Go to Trend End Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Go to Trend Begin or
338. of the Companion III next to the power input socket When the unit is off the switch should be at position O To switch on the Companion III ensure that a mains cable is connected to the system and a power socket and push the switch to position T Companion III System Figure 1 System power switch Note The unit will perform some self tests before booting into Windows the time this takes may vary depending on other software or peripherals added to the Companion III The Windows screen will be displayed when the unit is ready Please note that the exact number and type of icons shown on the screen may differ depending on the software or hardware installed H3 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page H3 12 Chapter H4 Pioneer TC8080 System Labels and Symbols H4 3 This chapter provides information concerning the assembly and set Back Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 H4 4 up of the Pioneer TC8080 system Front Panel of the Pioneer TC8080 H4 5 Connecting Accessories H4 6 Connecting the Keyboard H4 6 Connecting the Pointing Device H4 6 Connecting an External Printer H4 6 Connecting the Optional Footswitch H4 6 Connecting the Remote Hand Controller H4 6 Connecting a Set of Headphones H4 7 Connecting USB Peripherals H4 7 Connecting the Companion III to a Network H4 7 Connecting an External VGA Monitor H4 7 Connecting Serial Devices H4 7 Connecting Optional A
339. of the M Mode data the channel bands are labeled so the user can tell which band of M Mode data comes from which Doppler channel Next to the channel labels small arches are drawn in white to indicate where the channel bands start and stop These arches show the user the overlap or separation between channels Next to the active channel label the arch is filled in to indicate the channel which is focussed for keystrokes To the right of the channel bands labels a column is drawn to show which channel is being heard in the speakers This column has a speaker symbol next to the channel where the audio signal is coming from S16 6 Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 52mm 84mm Depth 50 Figure 1 Color M Mode display window To the far right of the display the special M Mode color scale is displayed The top half of the color scale is for flow toward the probe data and is shown in different shades of red orange yellow The flow toward the probe icon is located above these colors The bottom half of the color scale is for flow away from the probe data and is shown in different shades of blue green The flow away from the probe icon is located below these colors In the case that the M Mode display is configured for only one flow direction only one color scale is used See section Tog gling the M Mode Flow Direction Coding In the case that the M Mode display is configured for the tota
340. og Curve Input Settings Toggling the Fast Curves Window Configuring the Display for External Curve Inputs Choose the external inputs to be displayed Calibrate the external inputs External Curve Output Calibration Sample Rates Analog Outputs Sample Rates Analog Inputs Creating Continuous SoundTrak Settings Files Creating Files Containing Continuous SoundTrak Data Keeping Track of File Size Reconfiguring the Maximum File Size Reaching the Maximum File Size Index 17 3 S17 4 S17 6 S17 7 17 8 S17 9 S17 10 S17 12 S17 13 S17 14 S17 15 S17 15 S17 16 S17 16 S17 16 S17 17 S17 18 S17 19 S17 19 S17 20 Index 1 Chapter H1 Safety Summary Regulatory Compliance H1 3 This chapter provides information concerning the safety of the Precautions H1 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems Warnings H1 4 Cautions H1 7 Ultrasound safety H1 8 Factors influencing ultrasound power output H1 8 Amplitude H1 8 Sample H1 8 Scale H1 8 Display of Thermal Index H1 9 Cranial Bone Thermal Index TIC H1 9 Soft Tissue Thermal Index TIS H1 9 Description of Applied Parts H1 9 EMC Statement H1 10 Information in this chapter is subject to change without notice H1 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page Regulatory Compliance SciMed Ltd is an ISO 9001 2000 and ISO 13485 1996 and CMDCAS approved manufac turer of medical equipment
341. ointing Arrow identifies which protocol is currently loaded on the system Preparing the System for Diagnostics Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 Click on Protocol and then on Protocol Manager fi Protocol Manager x Example Protocol EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM Non Protocol Mode EME 03 16 00 09 58 06 AM gt Protocol 1 03 17 00 07 28 01 AM Protocol 2 03 17 00 08 17 58 AM Protocol 3 03 17 00 08 56 11 AM Load BENG CUE LUIS Delete Figure 2 Click on highlight the desired Protocol and then click on Load or just double click on the desired Protocol S6 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual The Protocol List window You can create a list of examina tion steps corresponding to spectral records to be saved which then are used to guide you through your routine examination Each step will contain configura tion information to automatically set up the system for the next vessel of interest Protocols reduce the number of keystrokes thus reducing the time needed for the examination The Protocol Step window contains nine columns Figure 1 Step and Flow Direction The first column contains the step numbers as well as a Flow Direction symbol red arrow flow toward blue arrow flow away Vessel label The seco
342. om of the screen display Figure 1 Each of the five keys have a specific function which when pressed will perform the assigned action Holding the key down will repeat the function The list of keys below depends on the mode of operation and is just a sample of the various functions The keys can be labeled in any order e Indicators On Off e Envelope e Filter Down e Filter Up e Toggle PW CW e Boost Mode e SoundTrak On Off e Spectra On Off etc You can customize the sequence of the keys to fit your personal preference For example you can assign Envelope to any one of the five softkeys by clicking the RIGHT mouse button on the softkey and then choosing from the list Instructions for labeling these keys is located in the next chapter The remaining keys on the remote control are assigned specific functions which are described in detail later in this guide S2 8 D Acq g data for Jone lej x Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help rai E Ma A D Event List AsStart E E WinTCD wiring 9 09 A M S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 td S eae O mo mat U D Figure 1 The five softkeys on the Remote Control correspond to the five keys displayed on the bottom of the screen display and can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window
343. on III User Manual Intended operator The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system are intended for trained and skilled personnel in collecting transcranial data and peripheral Doppler ultrasound from a test subject PR viii Structure of Manual This manual is divided up into two main parts The first part consisting of the chapters with page numbers beginning with H covers the hardware related issues for the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III systems The second part consisting of the chapters with page numbers beginning with S covers the functionality of the WinTCD software package which is used on both systems Chapter H1 Safety Summary This chapter provides information concerning the safety of the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion II systems Chapter H2 Common Hardware Components This chapter provides information concerning the various compo nents and accessories available as standard or optional with the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion II systems Regulatory Compliance Precautions Warnings Cautions Ultrasound safety Factors influencing ultrasound power output Amplitude Sample Scale Display of Thermal Index Cranial Bone Thermal Index TIC Soft Tissue Thermal Index TIS Description of Applied Parts EMC Statement Remote Hand Controller Infrared Remote Control Footswitch Keyboard Pointing Devices Transducers Analog Connection Box Printers Headphones Cons
344. on is moved etc During the time that the system does not have the correct number of cursors the parameter box values are displayed as with the color green Note The cursor values and the resulting PI and RI values are subject to rounding errors at times The values used in the formulas are often of higher precision than those of the displayed cursor values which are rounded off Note For information on how to set Horizontal Curve cursors please refer to the section Setting Horizontal Curve Cursors S8 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Using the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors Mode This section explains how Horizontal Velocity cursors may be used to allow manual recalcu lations of the parameter values using the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors mode Once the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors mode is activated it is possible to set three cursors or six in the case where above and below the zero line measurements are needed in the spectral display window in a similar way to the general cursor mode explained previously While the Recalculate Values 3 Cursors mode is active the system constantly inspects the spectral display to see if 3 valid Horizontal Velocity cursors all on the same side of the zero line have been set Other types of cursors are ignored As soon as three valid Horizontal Velocity cursors are found on one or both sides of the zero line the system sets the systoli
345. onents may differ from the examples shown above and in the remainder of this guide Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System The microvascular probes have been designed to be as small as possible thereby allowing access to microvessels in very restricted areas Because of the invasive nature of microvascular applica tions the probes are sterilizable Consequently the microvascular probe and the preamplifier pod have been separated lt gt CAUTION Never autoclave the microvascu lar pod preamplifier or immerse the pod in a liquid 1 Connect the microvascular preamplifier to the system as shown in Figure 1 using the same procedure as the standard transducers on the previous page 2 Connect the microvascular probe to the preamplifier as shown in Figure 2 by simply pressing the probe connector onto the preamplifier Companion III System cry Brown for 20 MHz Preamplifier 20 MHz Preamplifier 20 MHz Probe Figure 1 Two channel Companion III main unit showing the 20 MHz microvascular pod and the 20 MHz probe connected to Channel 1 Figure 2 Connecting the microvascular probe to the preamplifier Note The Strain Relief is WHITE on the 16 MHz preamp and BROWN on the 20 MHz preamp H3 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Assembling the System Refer to the Front and Back Panel diagrams and legend for socket connector and other loca
346. onjunction with your machine and that it is used in no other manner or ii that the copy is for archival purposes only and that all archival copies are destroyed in the event that your continued possession of this software should cease to be rightful c Sell this software and any archival copy only as part of the sale of all of your rights in this software except that adaptations so prepared may be transferred only with the authorization of Nicolet 2 You are not permitted to a Make copies of this soft ware or documentation except as described above b Alter modify or adapt this software or documentation except as described above c Distribute lease rent or sublicense this software or documentation PR iii Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Customer responsibility This product and its components will perform reliably only when operated and maintained in accordance with the instructions contained in this manual accom panying labels and or inserts A defective product should not be used Parts which may be broken or missing or are plainly worn distorted or contaminated should be replaced immediately with clean genuine replacement parts manufactured by or available from Nicolet The responsibility of Nicolet for a malfunctioning product is limited by the warranty set forth in this manual Should repair or replacement of this product become necessary after the warranty period the
347. onnecting the Optional Footswitch An optional footswitch may be connected to the Companion ITI Connect the footswitch to the RS 232 Serial Interface Socket socket 8 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Connecting the Remote Hand Controller Connect the Remote Hand Controller to the RS 232 Serial connector socket 8 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance Please note that use of the remote hand controller and the footswitch precludes the use of other serial accessories Connecting a set of Headphones Use stereo headphones with a 3 5mm 3 pole stereo Jack plug The connector socket 3 is on the rear of the Companion III The internal speakers will be automati cally disconnected The audio signals can now be heard via the headphones Connecting USB Peripherals Two USB compatible peripherals may be connected to the USB ports sockets 14 on the back panel Connecting the Companion Ill toa Network It is possible to connect the Companion III to a network Connect an RJ 45 compatible patch cable to the RJ 45 socket socket 13 on the back panel Consult a network administrator for setting up the networking protocols in the operating system Connecting an External VGA Mo
348. ooming in on the data When the mouse is used to draw the Zoom box in a spectral display the window focus automatically goes back to the SoundTrak display after the Zoom box position is chosen This allows fine adjustments later with the arrow keys without any focus problems S8 34 Click and drag to create a box Save 1 man CH 1A S1 2 K 34 Mean Figure 1 Drawing Spectral Zoom Box with Mouse Click and drag to create a box Figure 2 Drawing SoundTrak Zoom Box with Mouse Default Zoom Box Positions This section describes how the default Zoom box position and size is determined under the various circumstances Reading in H I T S Records When spectral snapshots contain ing H I T S events are read in the default size and position of the Zoom box is done automatically In the case that a H I T S event is present Auto save the Zoom box is placed around the first event in the record with the event centered in time The Zoom box is 1 second wide by default so it would start 1 2 a second before and end 2 a second after the event time as found by the FS1 algo rithm Reading in H I T S Events If a saved H I T S event is selected out of the event list the system automatically relocates the Zoom box positioned around the new event This is a quick way to switch between events and review them If the event is located inside the same spectral save just the position of the Zoom bo
349. or M Mode Display Loading color M Mode settings S16 3 This chapter describes how to use the color M Mode display in Creating a new color M Mode settings file 16 4 conjunction with the multi depth monitoring mode Refer to Spectral display window layout S16 5 Chapters S5 and S7 for descrip tions on the normal monitoring Color M Mode display window S16 6 mode functions Color M Mode image S16 7 Note The M Mode display is not Highlighting the appropriate window 16 8 available on the Companion HI LE model Selecting spectral multi depth channels S16 8 Set the M Mode depth scale range S16 9 Set the M Mode depth scale offset zero S16 9 Adjust the sample volume depth S16 10 Adjust the sample volume length S16 10 Adjusting the M Mode channel bands S16 11 Adjust the M Mode display gain S16 12 Adjust the M Mode color display range S16 12 Inverting the color M Mode velocity scale S16 12 Toggling the M Mode flow direction coding S16 13 Selecting the M Mode color display palette S16 14 Legends Toggling the M Mode display enhancement S16 15 Designates Monitoring Continued on the next page Mode only S16 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont Freezing the spectral M Mode display S16 16 Saving the spectral M Mode display S16 17 Post processing the color M Mode display S16 18 S16 2 Ry Loading color M Mode settings Note The procedures on this page are for the Mo
350. orizontal Cursors Mode The Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Mode for the trend display can be switched off by Method 1 1 Right clicking in the trend display window 2 Clicking on the function Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Off Figure 2 Method 2 1 Clicking on the s key function Calculate VMR H Cursors Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Off Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Background Figure 2 Calculate VMR Horizontal Cursors Mode Right Click Menu Reviewing Data Deactivating the Calculate VMR Average Cursors Mode The Calculate VMR Average Cursors Mode for the trend display can be switched off by Method 1 1 Right clicking in the trend display window N Clicking on the function Calculate VMR Average Cursors Off Figure 3 Method 2 p Clicking on the s key function Calculate VMR A Cursors Calculate VMR Average Cursors Off Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Background Figure 3 Calculate VMR Average Cursors Mode Right Click Menu S8 67 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page S8 68 Chapter S9 Ex Creating Monitoring Settings Files Creating a new Settings file S9 3 This chapter describes how to Assign the probe s and channel s S9 3 create a new Settings file delete Set the parameters and window sizes S9 4 an existing Settings file create a new default Se
351. ormation for each Doppler FFT display are required These audio channels are quadrature meaning they have a 90 degree phase relation to each other Proper quadrature separation is necessary for the accurate reproduction separation of flow toward and away from the transducer of a Doppler FFT from stored audio signals therefore a DAT Digital Audio Tape is recommended The connection of the external DAT recorder should be made via the optional Analog Connection Box Figure 1 which contains eight RCA standard audio input connectors and eight RCA output connectors Once connected the signals need to be properly configured via the External Connections configura tion menu see Creating Audio I O Settings later in this chapter Using the External Inputs and Outputs Once signals have been config ured they are savable to the settings files or the protocol files In this way numerous combina tions of signals are possible by just loading a new setting or protocol and the configuration is only done once The special setting and protocol files are clearly color coded as either recording red or playback green and by choosing one of these users can quickly set up the system for the desired functional ity Note The audio input and output facility requires that the optional analog input output circuit board is installed in the system If this board is not installed the external connections configuration menu
352. osition using the color light green and these will also be added to the event list Method 1 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair inside the Trend or Fast Curve window at the point in time where the marker should be set Figure 1 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Select either Insert S Marker or Insert I Marker out of the menu Figure 2 3 Select the appropriate marker out of the list Figure 3 using the mouse or use the up down arrow keys to select the label and press enter to save it Note Refer to section S5 in this manual for information on configuring the S Marker and I Marker lists Reviewing Data Figure 1 Right click inside the Trend window Insert S Marker Insert Marker Edit Event Delete Event Figure 2 Right click Trend window menu lower section Custom Marker Injection Diamox Biting Sneeze Embolus Artifact Probe Bump Custom Marker Hyperventilation Start Hyperventilation Stop Sleep Begin Sleep End X Clamp On X Clamp Off Figure 3 Event marker lists 8 55 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Ry Working With Event Markers Monitoring Mode only Saving Custom Markers At any point when one of the event marker lists is on the screen the user has the option to enter a custom marker by selecting this choice from the list Custom markers are to be used for unexpected
353. ot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PW CW Curve Recording SoundTrak Boost Mode Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Ctrl Alt F Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Filter Down Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 3 Click on Doppler and then on Print Spectral Window 12 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Hon Printing the Trend Curves window You can use this procedure to print a copy of the active Trend Curves window Note Make sure your printer is connected to the computer has power applied and is loaded with paper 1 Using the Right mouse button click in the Trend window Figure 1 2 Click on Print Curves Figure 3 12 4 By Printing the Fast Curves window You can use this procedure to print a copy of the active Fast Curves window while in the Review mode only Note Make sure your printer is connected to the computer has power applied and is loaded with paper 1 Using the Right mouse button click in the Fast Curves window Figure 2 2 Click on Print Curves Figure 4 Figure 1 Using the Right mouse button click on the Trend window Figure 2 Using the Right mouse button click on the Fast Curves window Curve Configuration Displa
354. oundTrak Differential Time Cursors Moving Differential Time Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time cursors may be moved by clicking the left mouse button on a cursor holding down the button and dragging the cursor to a new position and then releasing the button Resizing Differential Time Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time cursors may be resized by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then clicking the mouse on one of the small resize handles half way up the vertical boundary lines holding down the button dragging the boundary line to a new position and then releasing the button Deleting Individual Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time cursors may be deleted by first single clicking the left mouse button on a cursor to activate it and then pressing the delete key or right clicking the mouse on the cursor and then selecting Delete Selected Cursor from the menu Figure 1 S8 38 General Cursors Off Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Figure 1 SoundTrak General Cursor Mode Right Click Menu Deleting All Cursors All the displayed SoundTrak Differential Time Cursors may be deleted all at once from the display by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the display data and then selecting Delete All Cursors from the menu Figure 1 Displaying Cursor Units The units msec for the SoundTrak curso
355. ow Figure 2 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Click on Curve Configura tion Figure 3 3 Go to the next page 17 14 Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items Figure 1 Click on Configuration WinTCD Acquiring data for Jones W F Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help 56 Depth PI TOT EO SV Mean 39 Power Sys Fast Curve Window Event List Chi SYS Cht DIA H Nic Vue H winTcD Acquiring Figure 2 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Print Curves Curve Configuration Display Options Figure 3 Click on Curve Configuration Note Refer to section S8 in this handbook for more information on how to review the fast curve and trend data In section S8 the other curve configuration possibilities are explained Choose the external inputs to be displayed 1 Click on the External Inputs Configuration tab Figure 1 2 Choose the curve s you want displayed by clicking on checkmark its associated check box Figure 1 3 Select the curve colors by clicking the mouse
356. ow the transducer type and mode e g 2MHz PW S Depth column The fourth column displays the depth settings For complete steps the actual depth is shown CW probes will just show CW For relative steps the increase or decrease in mm is displayed If the next step consists only of a new vessel label n c for no change will appear in the column for that step Sample Volume S V column The fifth column displays the sample volume settings both the Tx and the Rx values The actual Sample Volume settings are shown in this column CW probes will just show CW If the next step consists only of a new vessel label n c for no change will appear in the column for that step Power column The sixth column displays the power settings The actual power is displayed in this column If the next step consists only of a new vessel label n c for no change will appear in the column for that step Report Position column The seventh column displays the position of spectral display record on the report printout Three numbers are used to define the Page Number Row Number and Column Number Figure 1 For example 5 1 2 will place the record on page 5 row 1 column 2 Saved column The eighth column displays the Save Status If a record for the step has been saved a will be displayed If no record for the step has been saved a O will be displayed If multiple saves have bee
357. ox shows the distance in millimeters of the sample volume axial center from the face of the transducer Use the Depth key Figure 1 to move the sample volume either deeper or shallower You may also use Ctrl F1 to decrease or Shift F1 to increase the depth The range of depth settings is limited by the pulse repetition frequency PRF setting so automatic scale reductions occur In Multi depth mode the depth separation between channels can be altered by using the functions MD Expand Depths and MD Contract Depths Note The Sample and Depth functions do not work in the CW mode Adjust the sample volume length The SV box shows for pulsed wave ultrasound the length of the sample volume Use the Sample key to adjust the length of the sample volume Figure 2 You may also use Ctrl F6 to decrease or Shift F6 to increase the sample volume The Sample volume is the axial length of the area from which Doppler signals are obtained The sample size can range from to 15 mm and its length is displayed in the Parameter box labeled SV It is important to remember that the size of the sample volume influences the ultrasonic power output The larger the sample volume the longer the duration of the pulse burst and consequently the higher the ultrasound output and power Note Always apply the ALARA principle use power levels that are As Low As Reasonably Achievable Note The Sample and Depth func
358. paring two Doppler windows at the same time 1 Click on the Window menu and then click on Tile Hori zontally Figure 2 The currently open windows are tiled horizontally on the screen display Figure 3 Also see Maximizing a window later in this chapter WW Multiple Window Screen Displays fate eb ne Figure 1 This example shows two Doppler windows cascaded on the screen display Move Vertical Splitter Move Horizontal Splitter Next Acquisition or Review Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically J 1 Reviewing monitoring data for test v 2 Acquiring monitoring data Figure 2 Click on Window and then on Tile Horizontally D MHz PW MCA R Ch 1 S1 2 MHz PW MCA R Figure 3 The two Doppler windows are displayed horizontally on the screen display 11 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Tiling multiple windows vertically When multiple windows are open Figure 1 on the screen display you can choose to tile them vertically so the windows can be viewed simultaneously This feature is particularly useful for visually comparing two Doppler windows at the same time 1 Click on the Window menu and then click on Tile Verti cally Figure 2 The currently open windows are tiled vertically on the screen display Figure 3 Also see Maximizing a window on the next page WW
359. password was created For example if the password is Mary neither of the following entries will be accepted MARY or mary because they do not have matching upper lower case letters Also if presented choose the domain in which your account is located If you need additional information click on the Help button Figure 1 5 Click on OK 6 After a short wait the Desktop screen display appears 7 Go to the next page Starting WinTCD Welcome to Windows i Press Ctrl Alt Delete to begin Ctrl Alt Delete helps keep your password secure Click Help for more information Help Figure 1 A window similar to this will appear while the systems boots When this prompt appears press and hold down the Ctrl Alt and Delete keys see Figure 2 and then release them Figure 2 Press and hold down all three keys Ctrl Alt and Delete and then release the keys Welcome to Windows Username administrator Password Log on using a dial up connection OK Cancel shutdown Options lt lt Figure 3 Enter the required information and then click on OK This illustration may vary accordingly for your networking configuration S4 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Start the program and open create a file The WinTCD program must have been installed on your system before the program can be started If you ordered your system from the factory it has a
360. port Window Hell sv PI DIA Protocol List Example Protocol EME Step Vessel Label Probe Depth Sv _ Power Report Pos Saved Comment f 427 VAPr L 2 MHz PW S1 68mm 10mm 39 Page 6 1 1 1 Start Suboccipic Next Step SS J PrintGoNet _ Boost Mode Start Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 A M Saved Spectral Snapshots Scroll Bar Use the scroll bar to view other Spectra that have been saved Figure 1 The Copy Window displays the various Doppler screen displays that have been saved to the hard disk S7 23 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Freezing the display You can freeze the current Spectral display at any time for closer inspection Figure 1 postprocess with Gain Zero etc and then if you wish save a Snapshot of the frozen display for later inspection Method 1 1 Press the Freeze key on the Remote Control Figure 2 Method 2 1 Press the F2 key on the keyboard Figure 3 Method 3 1 Click on Doppler and then on Freeze Spectral Snapshot Method 4 1 Click on the Freeze Spectral Snapshot button To save a snapshot of the frozen spectral display see Saving Spectral Snapshots earlier in this chapter WW S7 24 D Acquiring data for Jo Exam Protocol View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help enaa vA aia Balt CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L PE Frozen window E o
361. ppler Lib Interface X X X X Driver Version X X X X PCI Board Type X DSP Version X X X X Doppler BIOS X X X X I O Board Type X lODsp Version X X X X NPA Interface Supported X X OK Figure 2 When finished click on OK 13 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Exam Information Any items grayed out on the Exam Info menu are not available 1 Click on Help Figure 1 2 Click on Exam Info 3 When finished click on OK Figure 2 Note When creating Continuous SoundTrak files the information contained in the Exam Info menu is very important for estimating the amount of free recording space Whenever parameters are changed like the number of channels or the PRF scale setting the data rates change so users should always take a quick look in the Exam Info menu to make sure there will be enough recording space to finish the examination 13 4 Help Topics About WinTCD Exam Info Figure 1 Click on Help and then on Exam Info WinTCD Exam guid 449AEA2D 502A 11D4 A4D6 00D0B758A36B Trend display Resolution 1s Online buffer 08 00 00 Data drive D nicolet wintcd data Free disk space on data drive 716 Mbyte 4 Free disk space on configured media 593 Mbyte 99 Exam Size 16 Files 7 416 MByte 7 422 CD 7 434 DVD FFT Resolution 256 Continuous SoundTrak recording time available 1 7 hours Data rate 101 5840 KB sec ok Figure 2 When f
362. ppler gt Print Spectral Window menu function Prints out a hard copy of the spectral window Switch Displayed Envelopes Same as the Doppler gt Envelope menu function Toggles the envelope curves between above below both and off Change Scale Units Same as the Doppler gt Units menu function Toggles the scale units for the spectral display between cm sec and kHz Play SoundTrak Same as the Doppler gt Play SoundTrak menu function Allows audio Doppler data to be played back from the hard disk Print Text Report Same as the Report gt Text Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a text report Not Available About Button Spectra On Off Same as the Same as the Help gt About WinTCD Doppler gt Spectra menu function Displays a window with various information about on and off your WinTCD system Save Spectral Snapshot Same as the Doppler gt Save Spectral Snapshot menu function Saves the active spectral window to the harddisk S3 14 menu function Toggles the display of the spectral data Noise Reduction Same as the Doppler gt Noise Reduction menu function Toggles the audio noise reduction circuitry Show Vessel Label List Same as the Doppler gt Vessel Labels menu function Activates the vessel label menu Print Graphics Report Same as the Report gt Graphics Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a graphics
363. processing the color M Mode display The following post processing functions are available in the post processing mode for the M Mode display Software Gain M Mode Depth Range Scale M Mode Depth Scale Offset M Mode Velocity Scale Direction M Mode Color Display Range M Mode Flow Direction Coding M Mode Display Palette and M Mode Display Enhancement These function in a similar way to the real time M Mode display as previously explained in this chapter S16 18 Chapter S17 Using the External Inputs and Outputs Description of Audio Inputs and Outputs Creating Audio I O Settings Loading Settings and Protocols with External Connections Using the Record Mode Using the Playback Mode Description of Analog Curve Inputs and Outputs Creating Curve I O Settings Defining Analog Curve Input Settings Toggling the Fast Curves Window Configuring the Display for External Curve Inputs Choose the external inputs to be displayed Calibrate the external inputs External Curve Output Calibration Sample Rates Analog Outputs Sample Rates Analog Inputs Creating Continuous SoundTrak Settings Files Creating Files Containing Continuous SoundTrak Data Keeping Track of File Size Reconfiguring the Maximum File Size Reaching the Maximum File Size 17 3 S17 4 S17 6 S17 7 17 8 S17 9 S17 10 S17 12 S17 13 S17 14 S17 15 S17 15 S17 16 S17 16 S17 16 S17 17 S17 18 S17 19 S1
364. prt gt l Index Label z scan Global Maximum Index Value q Acoustic en o Dim of Aaprt fe Information Focal Length ny Operating Conditions data provided where global maximum displayed index exceeds 1 0 indicates that no data is reported because the associated index value lt H6 19 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 format of Pioneer TC8080 and Companion Ill Parameter 2 MHz PW 2 MHz PW 1 6 MHz 4MHz CW 15mm 10mm TCD lspta mW cm 356 1 222 9 505 8 590 0 System Settings P max max pr P max P max 8mm SVL 9mm SVL 12mm SVL max Ispta 12mm SVL srz Output Beam dimensions 7 mm half disk et E A E E E riareasonmoas of gt o i i aene l e oe oe luom dP Pe dP linn dP ed Ee ea OS T RGD Range Gated Depth SVL Sample Volume Length S Scale settings PRF P Power b denotes diameter c Controllable by user H6 20 Technical Specification Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 format of Pioneer TC8080 and Companion Ill cont Parameter 4 MHz PW 8 MHz cwD 8 MHz PW 16 MHz 1 5mm PW Microvascular p MPa 0 228 0 165 0 261 0 724 Iepta MW cm 183 2 539 9 147 1 519 6 System Settings P max P max max p prr 2 P max 4mm SVL max lsptar 1 4mm SVL prr 31 7 7mm SVL few i Pe a sw ee oe mm half disk half disk half disk awe o o o to o fy oo niazatonows o wo o Acoustic OutputFreeze no nw w
365. put voltages going to the system via the analog connection box do not exceed 10 Vpp If the system is not functioning properly do not operate it until all necessary repairs are made and the unit is tested for proper functioning in accordance with Nicolet Vascular Division of VIASYS Healthcare published specifications Do not attempt to reinstall the system software without consult ing a qualified Nicolet EME Service Representative first You can destroy data Follow the steps provided only under the direction of a qualified Service Representa tive Safety Summary lt T gt CAUTION Follow the Shutdown sequence described in this guide to turn off the system to ensure the integrity of your data files Leave at least 30 seconds between turning off the system using the Power Switch and switching it back on The customer is responsible for maintaining all system software CDs and or diskettes in a safe secure location H1 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Ultrasound Safety Factors Influencing Ultrasound Power Output With pulsed wave ultrasound a transducer sends a pulse of ultrasound into tissue and then waits for part of the pulse s energy to be reflected back Ultrasound waves dissipate energy in the form of heat and can therefore cause tissue warming Although this effect is extremely low with transcranial Doppler it is impor tant to know how to control an
366. r the selected backup media Storage has been stopped and all data saving abilities have been disabled The user is forced to choose OK If the user answers Override to the first dialog box then immedi ately a second dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 The dialog box says Overriding will create a file size that will exceed limits of selected backup media Are you sure The user is given the choice of Yes or No If the user answers No to the dialog box then the system reacts in the same way as Stop was handled If the user answers Yes to the dialog box then the system does not stop data saving when the maximum defined limit is reached The red warning mes sages for the maximum file size no longer appear The real time file size indicator is allowed to go over 100 and the MB GB number continues to increment If the user doesn t answer the original Override dialog or they do not confirm the Override in time the system stops data saving at the limit and changes the dialog to that in Figure 2 Maximum File Size Override File size will soon exceed the maximum defined limit for the selected backup media Data saving will be halted unless you choose to override Override Stop Figure 1 Maximum File Size Override Dialog File Size at Limit File size has reached maximum defined limit for the selected backup media Storage has been stopped and all data saving abilities have been disabled
367. radio buttons Figure 2 and select OK Figure 2 Note There are three choices for the maximum file size The first choice will limit the examination size to fit on a CD media The second choice will limit the examination size to fit on a DVD media The last choice will not limit the examination size at all so all the empty space on the harddisk can be used for the examination The System Menu Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items 14 Use Internal IR Remote Online Probe Test File Size Limitation v Auto PDF Text Report v Auto PDF Graphics Report Software License Upgrade Figure 1 Click on Configuration System and then on File Size Limitation File Size Limitation Use this configuration facility to define the maximum file size for patient examinations in order to avoid creating files which are larger than the back up medium The system will automatically disable the ability to save data when the maximum file size is reached Maximum File Size Limited to fit CD back up devices O Limited to fit DVD back up devices O No Limitation Network back up etc Figure 2 Click on one of the three radio buttons and when finished click on OK Note Refer to section S17 in this manual for more information on Keeping Track of File Size during monitoring examination
368. re the V 0 velocity value from any point on the spectra by ness peen is Method A 1 Selecting the Horizontal chee a Velocity cursor type as described previously to get the appropriate mouse pointer Figure 1 Horizontal Velocity cursor measurements are made with respect to the Velocity 0 reference Freeze Protocol Step 1 2 Positioning the mouse pointer on the point of interest and CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L then clicking the Left mouse 33 button Method B 5 ean 1 Selecting the Horizontal 49 Velocity cursor type as described previously to get the appropriate mouse pointer 2 Clicking and holding down the Left mouse button anywhere in the Sp ectral data then dragging SE E E ren ee the horizontal cursor line to a Vessel Labels Units SaveGonext envelope E new position and releasing the mouse button on the point of interest Figure 2 This example shows a single Horizontal Velocity cursor The line is drawn and the velocity with respect to V 0 is displayed Note Up to ten cursor measurements can be saved in a single spectral Figure 2 display window If you make more than ten measurements the oldest measurement will be removed from the display S8 10 Setting Vertical Time Cursors Vertical Time cursors are single line measurements which are made with respect to the T 0 reference Figure 1 The Spectral Vertical Time cursors may be set to measure t
369. re the window on the WinTCD icon to to its original size return the ees Rey CH1 S1 2Mhz PW MCA R Event List Parameter Boxes __ Spectraonvon _ jy Wis ST AStart Nic Vue ted E WinTCD Reviewi Softkey Status Bar Intensity Scale dB Identifies the function of Signal intensity can range the softkeys on the remote from 0 to 64 dBs control To change softkey functions click the Right mouse button on the soft key to view a menu v 4 6 9 09 A M Exit Window Button Close the window Exit the WinTCD program Speaker Mute Click on to mute speaker shows mute status Ben Copy Window Displays the saved Doppler screens captured when the Save key on the Remote Control or F1 on the key board is pressed to resave Parameter Boxes Shows the current Doppler parameters To choose from a menu of 12 options click the Right mouse button anywhere inside this area gt Event List Lists events saved records that occurred during the exam Message Bar Provides information to the user S3 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Menus Ctrl D v Toolbar Save Spectral Snapshot F1 gt Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Play SoundTrak Noise Reduction Patient Database Spectral Palette Color M Mode Palette p v Fast Curve Window SoundTrak Window Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes
370. rease shift F4 increase Adjusts the gain of the receiver amplifier or offline software gain scale Summaries Remote Control Functions Summary continued Arrow Keys Arrow keys on keyboard Moves menu highlight bar selects answers to various system questions adjusts various settings values positions cursors and positions text Left Right arrow key functions Pages display backward or forward in analog real time and trend windows selects menus and resizes windows Up Down arrow keys functions Moves the menu cursor up or down a list and resizes windows Escape Esc key on keyboard Cancels the selected task returns to the previous menus or answers no to system questions ee ee SAVE FREEZE PRINT DIRECTION DELETE AMPLITUDE DEPTH Window shift F10 Switches between display windows Menu Selects the pulldown menus At this point you can use the Arrow keys to navigate through the menus and then press the Enter key to make your menu selection Enter Enter or Return key Executes the selected task or answers yes to system questions S3 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page S3 18 Chapter S4 Starting WinTCD Log on to the system S4 3 Start the program and open create a file S4 4 Summary of steps S4 4 This chapter describes how to start the WinTCD software E Important
371. ree radio buttons The FFT resolution defines the number of vertical points bins in the spectral display The higher the FFT resolution the finer the frequency resolution of each bin will be 10 4 Figure 1 Click on the Opt button Common Settings for No Name not saved General Print Layout Comments Description CC Startup Conditions X SoundTrak On when protocol is started _ Search probe at any available socket OK Figure 2 Click on checkmark the checkboxes for those options you want to enable for the protocol Cancel Note Always perform the Opt step first in order to set up the com mon global settings which will be applied to all of the Protocol steps 10 11 Click on the Print Layout tab Figure 1 Click on the Layout Matrix radio button that corresponds with the desired number of Columns and Rows for the report in which you want to place the Saved Spectral displays Click on the Color or Grayscale radio button accordingly for the type of printout you want Checkmark the Left Right exchange box in the text report section of the display to configure the text report to print left side vessels on the right side of the report printout and visa versa Leaving this box unchecked will print left side vessels on the left side of the report printout and right side vessels on the right side of the report printout Click on OK Choose the probe 12
372. report Summaries Summary Continuous SoundTrak Screen Control Buttons Page Back Button Page Forward Button Examination Length Indicator Decrements the time position Increments the time position Graphically represents the length of the in the Continuous SoundTrak in the Continuous SoundTrak Continuous SoundTrak file The left side file by one spectral sweep file by one spectral sweep is the beginning of the file and the right and places the system in Pause mode KUGLER Play Button Starts the playback of the Continuous SoundTrak data starting at the time shown in indicator at the right side side is the end Pause Button Position Indicator Tab Stops the playback of the Points to the present time position Continuous SoundTrak data in the Continuous SoundTrak file Fast Forward Button Increments the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak file in a fast mode Rewind Button Stop Button Time Position Indicator Decrements the time position Stops the playback of the Displays the current time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Continuous SoundTrak data in the Continuous SoundTrak file file in a fast mode and places the system in Freeze mode S3 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Remote Control Functions The equivalent keyboard hotkeys are enclosed with brackets S1 S5 Alt 1 5 These keys are user program mable and their functions vary with the current
373. ron ment e Interface to Nic Vue patient database e Support for all Windows compatible printers e CRT TFT LCD color monitor with up to 1280 x 1024 resolution e IBM PS 2 style QWERTY keyboard with integral pointing device e See Chapter H1 Environmental Requirements Specifications Measurements and Weights Specifications Mains Supply Specifications Fuse Rating Specifications Companion Ill System e Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C e Storage humidity 8 to 80 relative non condensing e Storage atmospheric pressure 500 hPa to 1060 hPa e Operating temperature 10 C to 40 C e Operating humidity 15 to 80 relative non condensing e Operating atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa e 325 mm x 405 mm x 290 mm height x width x depth e Weight 9 kg approximately e 100 V to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 150 VA e 2x T2 5AH 250V 20mm to TEC Sheet III Technical Specification Pioneer TC8080 System Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage humidity 8 to 80 relative non condensing Storage atmospheric pressure 500 hPa to 1060 hPa Operating temperature 10 C to 40 C Operating humidity 15 to 80 relative non condensing Operating atmospheric pressure 700 hPa to 1060 hPa 180 mm x 495 mm x 455 mm height x width x depth Weight 15kg approximately 100 V to 120 V AC 50 60 Hz and 200 V to 240
374. rotocol Manager Example Protocol EME 03 16 00 09 57 34 AM Non Protocol Mode EME gt Protocol 1 Protocol 2 Protocol 3 03 17 00 08 56 Load Save Rename Delete Figure 1 Click on the Protocol file you want to load and then click on Load Load Protocol 32 Steps r Comment E Default Protocol Graphics Reports 3 X 2 r Requested probes 2 MHz 4 MHz r Currently available probes amz amz fo fo r Status Probe check every second Load Cancel Figure 2 If this panel appears insert the correct transducers and click on Load IV Autoload if check is successful Use probes at any socket Performing an Exam Method 2 1 Click on the Protocol menu Figure 3 2 Click on Protocol Manager 3 Click on the desired file click on Load Figure 1 4 If Figure 2 appears insert the correct transducers and then click on Load Protocol Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 3 Click on the Protocol menu and then click on Protocol Manager S7 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set up the acquisition parameters The following topics describe how to set up the various acquisi tion options that you will be using to acquire Doppler data from your subject Note When in M
375. rs Display Cursor Background Figure 3 General Cursor Mode Right Click Menu Horizontal Curve Cursor Differential Time Cursor Vertical Curve Cursor Average Curve Cursor Figure 4 Cursor Type Menu Note The general cursor mode must be activated on an individual window basis If the general cursor mode is on for the trend window it will not automatically be on for the fast curves window etc S8 57 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Setting Horizontal Curve Cursors Horizontal Curve cursors are single line measurements which are made with respect to the 0 scale reference in either the trend or fast curves window Figure 1 Since the displays can often have more than one scale there is a 0 reference for each scale The Horizontal Curve cursors may be set to measure the value from any point on the display by 1 Selecting the Horizontal Curve cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Clicking on the first of two points where you want the line to begin and then holding down the Left mouse button 3 Dragging the mouse until the other end of highlighted box is over the second point where the line should end and then releasing the mouse button The line is drawn and the cursor value with respect to the 0 reference is displayed Figure 2 S8 58 13 06 00 Figure 1 Horizontal Curve cursor measurements are made with respect to one of the
376. rs are moved in the trend display which are needed for the VMR calculation then the values recalculate automatically if the new position is valid for the calculation If the new position is not valid different S8 66 Trend Window 13 00 00 Figure 1 Invalid VMR Calculation for Channel 1 curve section etc then the move is not allowed and the cursor is returned to its original position If the text for the VMR calcula tion interferes with the cursors the user will need to page the trend display slightly or use a longer time scale Note See Section Working With Curve Cursors for more detailed information on the functionality of setting and editing cursors Note The cursor values and the resulting VMR values are subject to rounding errors at times The values used in the formulas are often of higher precision than those of the displayed cursor values which are rounded off Documenting the VMR Results The documentation for the VMR test is a printout of the trend display when the VMR values are on the screen The trend display can be printed out by 1 Right clicking in the trend display window 2 Clicking on Print Curves Figure 1 Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 1 Trend Display Right Click Menu Deactivating the Calculate VMR H
377. rs may be toggled on for a record by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the SoundTrak display data and then selecting Display Cursor Units from the menu The units may be toggled off by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the SoundTrak display and then selecting Remove Cursor Units from the menu Clearing Cursor Background At times the cursor values may be difficult to read if the numbers are written directly over the curve data For this reason it is possible to clear the background data for the cursor value by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the SoundTrak display data and then selecting Clear Cursor Background from the menu Figure 1 The back ground may be toggled back on by General Cursors Delete Selected Cursor Delete All Cursors Display Cursor Units Display Cursor Background Hide Cursors Figure 2 SoundTrak Right Click Menu right clicking the mouse anywhere in the display data and then select ing Display Cursor Background from the menu Figure 1 Deactivating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for the SoundTrak display can be switched off by 1 Right clicking in the SoundTrak display window 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Off Figure 1 Hiding Cursors The SoundTrak Differential Time cursors may be temporarily re moved from the display by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the SoundTrak display data and then selecting Hide Cursors from the menu
378. rsor Background At times the cursor values may be difficult to read if the numbers are written directly over the spectral data For this reason it is possible to clear the background data for the cursor value by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Clear Cursor Back ground from the menu The background may be toggled back on by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Display Cursor Background from the menu Hiding Cursors All the different types of spectral cursors may be temporarily removed from the display by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Hide Cursors from the menu The cursors may be toggled back on by right clicking the mouse anywhere in the spectral display data and then selecting Show Cursors from the menu Note The Hide Cursors and Show Cursors functions are only available when the General Cursor Mode is switched off S8 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Manually Recalculating Values In cases where the signal quality is so poor that the envelope curve cannot properly follow the signal the WinTCD software has the ability to allow the automatically calculated Mean Systolic Diastolic PI and RI values to be overridden and replaced with manually recalculated values by setting horizontal cursors in the spectral displays There are two generally accept
379. rsor type Deactivating the general cursor mode Setting horizontal curve cursors Setting differential time cursors Setting vertical curve cursors Setting average curve cursors Working with curve cursors Moving cursors Resizing cursors Deleting individual cursors Deleting all cursors Saving cursors Continued on the next page S8 42 S8 43 S8 44 S8 45 S8 46 S8 46 S8 47 S8 47 S8 48 S8 49 S8 49 S8 49 S8 50 S8 50 S8 50 S8 50 S8 51 S8 52 S8 53 S8 54 S8 54 S8 55 S8 56 S8 56 S8 56 S8 56 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 57 S8 58 S8 59 S8 60 S8 61 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 62 S8 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Table of Contents cont Clearing cursor background S8 62 Hiding cursors S8 62 Calculating the vasomotor reactivity VMR S8 63 Activating the calculate VMR mode S8 63 Recognizing the calculate VMR mode S8 63 Using horizontal curve cursors to calculate VMR S8 64 Using average curve cursors to calculate VMR S8 65 Description of calculate VMR mode S8 66 Documenting the VMR results S8 67 Deactivating the calculate VMR horiz cursors mode S8 67 Deactivating the calculate VMR average cursors mode S8 67 S8 4 Start the program and open a file for review The WinTCD program must be installed on your system before the program can be started A summary of steps for the NicVue is included on this page If you need additional help please refer to the NicVue
380. rsors may be set to measure the time and velocity values from any point on the spectra by 1 Selecting the Dual Crosshair cursor type as described previously to get the appropri ate mouse pointer 2 Positioning the mouse pointer on the point of interest and then clicking the Left mouse button The time with respect to T 0 and velocity with respect to V 0 are displayed and the selected point is marked with a Figure 2 8 12 T 0 gS aS MEHE Jaj V 0 Event Description Time Spectra OnO Unts VesselLabels Distant Tea M WinTCD Reviewing Figure 1 Single point measurements are made with respect to the Time 0 and Velocity 0 references Freeze Protocol Step 1 xi CH 1 S1 2 Mhz PW VA Pr L 34 60 050 Mean 49 E E a ees Vessel Labels A SaveGoNext E E Figure 2 This example shows a single point measurement Setting Differential Velocity Cursors Differential Velocity cursors are single value cursors which measure the velocity difference between any two points on the Spectra This method is very useful when making peak to peak measurements The Spectral Differential Velocity cursors may be set to measure the relative velocity difference between any two points on the Spectra by 1 Selecting the Differential Velocity cursor type as described previously to get the appropriate mouse pointer 2 Clicking on the first of two
381. rts done automatically The advan tage of this approach is to ensure that PDF report files are made for all examinations and that the information is always up to date The automatic generation of PDF text and graphics reports can be configured individually Use the following steps to activate the automatic generation of PDF reports 1 Click on Configuration and then on System Figure 1 2 Click on Auto PDF Text Report or Auto PDF Graph ics Report Figure 1 When the Auto PDF Text Report menu point is chosen then it receives a check mark next to it to show that it is selected and that the automatic saving feature is active By choosing the menu point again the function can be toggled off and the check mark can be removed The same applies to the Auto PDF Graphics Report menu point Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items 14 Use Internal IR Remote Online Probe Test File Size Limitation v Auto PDF Text Report v Auto PDF Graphics Report Software License Upgrade Figure 1 Click on Configuration then on System and then select one of the Auto PDF report functions The automatic saving feature functions in two ways 1 When you select the Print function out of a report dialog the text or graphics report is pr
382. rve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves m O L UULU Figure 3 Click on the desired time scale Figure 2 Right click inside the Fast Curves window Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Configure S Keys 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Save Configuration System Print Curves Figure 5 Click on the desired time scale Figure 4 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Fast Curves Ry Saving Event Markers Monitoring Mode only There are two types of user defined event markers which are supported in the WinTCD software package The first type of marker is intended for interval events I Markers These events are start stop type markers which describe events that happen over an interval of time The second type of marker is intended for single events S Markers These events are one shot markers which describe events that only happen at one moment in time Markers are usually saved during the acquire mode but can also be saved in the review mode by using the method described on this page The set markers will be drawn in the curve displays at the chosen time p
383. s 14 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 14 6 Chapter S15 Microvascular Option 16 MHz and 20 MHz probe operation notes 15 3 This chapter describes the 16 MHz PW and 20 MHz PW Microvascular options which have been designed to allow intraopera tive investigations of microvessels The microvascular probes can be sterilized see Sterilizing 16 MHz and 20 MHz Probes in Chapter H5 and therefore may be used invasively during surgical or endoscopic procedures 15 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page 15 2 16 MHz and 20 MHz probe operation notes p The use of the microvascular option is associated with an increased safety standard due to the invasive nature of the application Proper sterilization and electrical safety precau tions should be followed as stated in Chapter H1 of this manual Please refer to this information on proper safety precautions when using the microvascular probes 2 Refer to Chapter H3 or H4 of this manual for information on properly connecting the microvascular probes and preamps to the system 3 The 16 and 20 MHz transduc ers should be treated with extra care as they are delicate and expensive to replace 4 All standard features of the system software apply including the Printing and Monitoring mode of operation 5 It is important to note that the 16 and 20 MHz probes are Pulsed Wave Doppler
384. s are still plugged in If the probes are removed during operation the system will automatically notify the user This function can be activated by using the procedure below It is recommended to keep this function switched off 1 Click on Configuration and move to System Figure 1 2 Click on Online Probe Test A checkmark should appear indicating that the probe check has been activated Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items Figure 1 Click on Configuration System and then on Use Internal IR Remote or Online Probe Test S14 4 System ka Use Internal IR Remote Online Probe Test File Size Limitation v Auto PDF Text Report v Auto PDF Graphics Report Software License Upgrade File Size Limitation Menu In many cases especially when the continuous SoundTrak feature is used the WinTCD examination file sizes can get quite large Depending on the type of backup media used for archiving pur poses users may want to limit their file sizes so they will fit onto the backup media In order to configure the maximum file size the following procedure should be used 1 Click on Configuration and move to System Figure 1 2 Click on File Size Limitation and the configuration dialog will appear Figure 2 3 Click the mouse on one of the three
385. s to scroll through the Trend data SSA Press to scroll through the gP gt Trend data p Figure 3 Press the Left or Right Arrows to scroll through the Trend data S8 45 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Zooming in on the Trend data You can zoom in on the Trend Curves for closer inspections 1 Left click inside the Trend window and hold down the mouse button Figure 1 Drag the mouse to create a box inside the window and then release the mouse button The Trend Curve display expands horizontally Repeat steps 1 and 2 as desired If the message Selected zoom not supported for Trend data appears on the Status Bar directly above the Softkeys make the box you are drawing longer Unzooming the Trend display To return the Trend data display to its original length Method 1 Right click inside the Trend window Figure 2 Click on the desired time scale Figure 3 Method 2 Click on Configuration and then on Configure Trend Figure 4 Click on the desired time scale Figure 5 S8 46 Click and drag to create a box Trend Window Trend Window 4 Minutes Figure 1 Clicking inside the Trend Window and then dragging the mouse to create a box results in zooming in expanding the Trend data as illustrated in the lower figure Curve Configuration
386. s vertically Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display Depth SV Sample Volume Length Gain Filter Ampl Amplitude Power TIC TIS Mean Mean Velocity Sys Systolic Dia Diastolic PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index H LT S D Mean Delta Mean Display the Toolbar Set the Copy Window Set the Event List window Configure the User Defined Event Marker Lists Set the Trend window Choose the Trend window curves Systole Diastole Mean PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index H LT S Choose the Trend curves for display and curve colors Set the Trend curves scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the Trend display options Choose which events will be displayed Toggle scale sharing Toggle background grid Set the Doppler color S5 3 S5 4 S5 5 S5 6 S5 7 S5 8 S5 9 S5 9 S5 10 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 11 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 12 S5 13 S5 14 S5 14 S5 15 S5 16 S5 17 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 18 S5 20 S5 20 S5 20 S5 21 S5 21 S5 21 S5 21 S5 22 Chapter S6 Preparing the System for Diagnostics This chapter describes how to setup the basic screen displays for Diagnostic acquisitions Table of Contents Choose the diagnostic mode protocol Activate the transducer s Set the screen display Set the Remote Control S1 S5 key functions Set the Footswitch functions Customizing the window sizes Splitting the windows horizontall
387. sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds H6 25 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual 8 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 038 0 004 0 038 0 004 0 038 0 004 0 004 2 418 0 248 2 418 0 248 2 418 0 248 0 081 cm sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds 16 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 019 0 004 0 019 0 004 0 019 0 004 0 004 1 209 0 248 1 209 0 248 1 209 0 248 0 081 cm sec kHz cm sec kHz cm sec kHz Seconds 20 MHz Operation Best Case Accuracy Worst Case Accuracy Unit of Measure Mean Velocity MEAN Mean Frequency MEAN Peak Systolic Velocity SYS Peak Systolic Frequency SYS End Diastolic Velocity DIA End Diastolic Frequency DIA Spectral Time Resolution 0 015 0 004 0 015 0 004 0 015 0 004 0 004
388. ser Manual Turning the speaker on off You can turn the speaker s on off while collecting Doppler data using either of these methods Note The Speaker symbol on the spectral display Figure 1 identifies whether the speaker is muted Method 1 1 Click on the Speaker symbol Figure 1 Method 2 1 Press the Mute button on the remote control Figure 2 Note Depending on the number of channels transducers used while recording the Doppler with SoundTrak turned on either the left right or both speakers may play back the SoundTrak when reviewing the Doppler This is determined automatically by the system S7 16 Figure 1 The speaker symbol shows if the speaker is muted You can turn the speaker on or off by clicking on the speaker symbol Mute button 0 0 SAMPLE aP qP ae Figure 2 Press the Mute button to turn all speakers on or off Adjusting the audio volume The Audio volume can be adjusted for both the running Spectral displays as well as the Soundtrak records These are independent adjustments the focussed window receives the adjustment Use the following control to adjust the audio volume level 1 Adjust the Volume knob on the remote control Figure 1 Volume knob st s2 S3 S4 gt a Deo SAVE FREEZE MUTE PRINT PROBE DIRECTION DELETE SAMPLE ZERO
389. signal calculation is made from the envelope of the Doppler signal The Mean velocity is derived from the envelope and is updated every second independent of the cardiac cycle For all calculations the parameters related to blood flow toward the probe are displayed as positive values and those related to blood flow away from the probe are displayed as negative values regardless of the Direction setting 5 12 Display the Toolbar You can choose to display Figure 1 or not display Figure 2 the Toolbar which provides another way to execute commands to the system Most users will display the Toolbar Turning the Toolbar off provides more space for the display windows 1 Click on View Figure 3 2 Click on Toolbar A check mark Enabled Preparing the System for Monitoring Fle Pe Sp ale ee Exam Settings View Doppler Conf ation Indicators Report Window Help maal Te esol Pte S iF Fil __Souatiak ovo Envelope Spectra ow Astart I Nic Vue E WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM Figure 1 Example display with Toolbar turned on Exam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help D __Soundtak wom Envelope Spectra ONOR CAstart MI Nic Vue IM WinTCD Acquiring 9 09 AM Figure 2 Example display with Toolbar turned off v Toolbar Spectral Palette gt Color M Mode Palett
390. sing the External Inputs and Outputs Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on the Monitoring Configuration menu and then on the External Connections menu point Configure External Connections Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Digital Outputs Continuous SoundTrak Recording oN fh ox a Figure 2 External Connections dialog box digital output tab Configure the Continuous SoundTrak Recording combo box to On by clicking the mouse on the arrow and selecting On Figure 2 When finished click on OK Save the active setting with the Save or Save As functions in the Settings menu Note The external connections dialog box is only available in the acquire mode and only before any data has been saved Note Continuous SoundTrak is only available in the monitoring mode and only if there is a valid software license installed on the system which contains the option Note Continuous SoundTrak settings will be colored blue in the list of settings in the settings manager They will also have a blue dot next to the name 17 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Creating Files Containing Continuous SoundTrak Data When a Continuous SoundTrak setting is loaded everything continues to function in a very si
391. sistance Index shows a second measurement of pulsatility It is calculated as follows R I Psys Edia Psys where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow See Note 1 D Mean Delta Mean The D Mean Parameter Box shows the Delta Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra The Delta Mean velocity is a similar calculation to the standard Mean Velocity but this box is displayed as a percent of a standard value By using the Set Delta Mean function the 100 level for the Delta Mean box is taken from the present Mean value After this time the Delta Mean parameter box will display a percent value relative to this level which essentially displays the change in the mean velocity with respect to the point in time where the Set Delta Mean was used The measurements described on this page are made every cardiac cycle Each signal calculation is made from the envelope of the Doppler signal The Mean velocity is derived from the envelope and is updated every second independent of the cardiac cycle For all calculations the parameters related to blood flow toward the probe are displayed as positive values and those related to blood flow away from the probe are displayed as negative values regardless of the Direction setting S6 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Choose the Doppler colors You can choose to view the displayed Doppler spectrum in either color or grayscale 1 Click on View Figure 1
392. smit pulse length TX The Sample key on the remote control adjusts the transmit length but under certain circumstances can also affect the receiver gate time When the boost mode is Off the receiver gate normally has a fixed length This is 5mm for 1 6 2 4 and 8 MHz and 0 8mm for 16 and 20 MHz The normal case is when the transmit pulse is longer than the fixed receiver gate length In the case that the transmit pulse is shorter than the fixed receiver gate length the receiver gate is set to the same length as the transmit pulse when the boost mode is Off When the boost mode is On the receiver gate has a minimum length but is able to vary with the transmit sample length The minimum value is 6mm for 1 6 2 4 and 8 MHz and 0 9mm for 16 and 20 MHz If the transmit sample length is greater than the minimum receiver gate length the receiver gate length is set to the same length as the transmit sample length Since you usually have quite a large transmit sample length when deciding you need boost there is a strong increase in the signal strength when toggling the boost on Technical description of the sample volume There is often confusion in understanding how the sample volume length is defined and what it really means In simple terms the sample volume is the length of the area from which the Doppler signals are obtained The depth setting is the distance of the axial center of the sample volume from the face
393. sories list later in this chapter for availability Analog Connection Box The system may be supplied with an optional analog connection box to simplify the use of the eight analog inputs and eight analog outputs See Figure 1 For convenience the connection of external devices should be made via the Analog Connection Box which contains eight standard RCA input connectors and eight standard RCA output connectors Refer to Chapter H3 or H4 for a description of the proper connec tion procedure for the analog connection box The Pioneer TC8080 and Com panion III systems support the ability to record and playback the audio Doppler data using an external DAT recorder The configurability and functionality of the external inputs and outputs is described in chapter S17 in this manual Common Hardware Components ee nor DD omor ee oe oo ae 9 ANALOG CONNECTION BOX ANALOG VERMNDUNCSSON BOITIER OF CONNECTION ANALNE At Figure 1 Analog Connection Box H2 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Printers Various types of printers are supported by the system Essen tially all printers which are supported by the Windows operating system can be used In the case that a color inkjet printer is used it is recommended that the printer have both a color ink cartridge as well as a black ink cartridge Headphones Standard audio headphones are supported by the system Cons
394. ss the F2 key to freeze the spectral M Mode display Saving the spectral M Mode display There are five different methods to save spectral M Mode display records just like the normal spectral record saves Method 1 1 When you see a display you want to save for review press the Save key Figure 1 on the remote control Method 2 1 Press F1 on the keyboard Method 3 1 Click on the Save NYY Snapshot button Method 4 1 Click on Doppler and then on Save Spectral Snapshot Method 5 1 Enable the Indicator algorithm to automatically save the spectra each time a H I T S occurs See Enabling the Indicator in chapter S7 NY Using the Color M Mode Display AMPLITUDE SWEEP GAIN SCALE Figure 1 Press the Save key on the remote control or press F1 on the keyboard to manually save the current Spectral M Mode screen to the hard disk Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Freeze Spectral Snapshot F2 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Toggle PWICW Curve Recording SoundTrak eee Ctri Alt F Flow Separation Squelch Noise Reduction Link Channels in MD Mode Filter Up Shift F9 Filter Down Ctrl F9 Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra F9 Envelope F6 Units F8 Display Range Set Delta Mean Ctrl D Figure 2 Click on Doppler and then Save Spectral Snapshot S16 17 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Post
395. ssibility of personal injury damage to your system or lost data observe these safety precautions during system operation In this manual two labels identify potentially dangerous or destruc tive conditions or procedures lt gt WARNING The WARNING label identifies conditions or practices that may present danger to the patient and or user lt gt CAUTION The CAUTION label identifies conditions or practices that could result in damage to the equipment Notes These help you identify areas of possible confusion and avoid potential problems during system operation H1 3 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual O WARNING This device uses a three wire power cord with a hospital grade plug for international applications IEC 601 1 ap proved plug The chassis is earth grounded For grounding reliability connect the device to a hospital grade or hospital only receptacle for international applications IEC 601 1 ap proved receptacle Connection of the system to any mains powered electrical accessories must be in accor dance with IEC 601 1 1 2000 This standard describes the safety requirements for medical electrical systems to provide protection to the patient the operator and the surroundings The system must be connected to a mains plug that conforms to all valid safety regulations Do not use extension cords for the system Extension cords can cause ground integrity and impe
396. st double click on the desired Protocol 7 35 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Stepping through a Protocol Once the desired Protocol is loaded you can begin the exam The first step is selected automati cally when the Protocol is loaded There are several ways of step ping through a Protocol Load the next previous step You can use either of these methods to step forward step backward through the list of Protocol steps The newly selected step will become the Active step and the system will load all the configuration points specified by that step Method A 1 If one of the softkeys has been assigned the Next Step Previous Step function click on that button or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Method B 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Next Step Previous Step Method C 1 Click on either the Previous Step or Next Step buttons S7 36 Save active spectral display and load the next step You can instruct the system to save the active spectral display and then advance to the next step using either of these methods The Saved column will change from 0 to 1 Figure 2 Method A 1 If one of the softkeys has been assigned the Save Go Next function click on that button or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Method B 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Save Go Next Method C 1 Click on the Save Go fix Next bu
397. system function and configuration Freeze F2 Freezes a spectrum for labeling or online post rocessing Print Mute Ctrl P F5 o Prints the highlighted Mutes the audio signal window Works only for Spectral Windows N Save F1 Delete Saves active spectra Delete to disk a Deletes the saved spectrum J highlighted in the Event List Probe Direction F4 Changes the displayed direction of flow in the active Doppler window Sample ctrl F6 decrease shift F6 increase Adjusts the axial length of the sample volume Amplitude ctrl F5 decrease shift F5 increase Adjusts the amplitude power setting of the ultrasound signal S3 16 Activates m S available channels _ oe gt Depth ctrl F1 decrease shift F1 increase Adjusts the depth of the sample volume 7 nUBE DIRECTION SAMPLE AMPLITUDE GAIN Volume Knob ctrl F7 decrease shift F7 increase Adjusts the volume of the Doppler signal DELETE Zero ctrl F3 decrease shift F3 increase Adjusts the zero line position of the spectral display SWEEP Sweep Vin ctrl F8 decrease ENTER shift F8 increase f Scale velocity ctrl F2 decrease shift F2 increase Adjusts the spectral Adjusts the spectral sweep speed Gain ctrl F4 dec
398. system will automatically select the system parameters saved in that file For example if the default Settings file has the Depth parameter set to 38 the system automatically sets the Depth to 38 each time the acquisition mode is started Method 1 1 Either create a new Settings file see previous page or open an existing Settings file Chapter S5 that you want to become the default file 2 Click on Settings Figure 1 3 Click on Set as Default Managing the System Settings Settings Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 1 Click on Settings and then click on Set as Default S9 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Renaming a Settings file If you wish you may rename an existing Settings file using either of the methods on this page The system parameter settings saved in the file will remain unchanged Note Default and Read Only Settings files cannot be renamed or deleted without confirming the change one additional time S9 6 Method 1 1 Click on Settings Figure 1 and then on Settings Man ager Or 1 Click on the Settings Try Manager button 2 Click on the Settings file you want to rename and then click on Rename Figure 2 3 Type in the new file name and then click on OK Figure 3 4 Click on Exit Figure 2 Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager
399. t button associated with the transducer you want to use Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III examples 10 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual 14 Using the Remote Control adjust the Doppler settings you want to use for the first Protocol step you are now creating Create the protocol step 15 Click on the 2 button Figure 1 16 Click on the Vessel name show menu Arrow button and then click on the desired Vessel name from the list of options Figure 2 17 Click on the Side show menu Arrow button and then click on the desired option Left Right None 18 If desired type in a short comment description for that step 19 If you want to include the spectral record in your report click on checkmark the Print step in report check box 20 Using the Up Down Arrow buttons choose on which page row and column you want the spectral record to appear 10 6 21 22 In the Select for save box click on the All Params Rel Depth or Vessel only radio button e All Params All the relevant Doppler and DSP settings are saved and later recalled when loading the protocol step This option is also referred to as a Complete step Rel Depth Relative Depth steps are protocol steps where only a relative depth adjustment setting is saved When loading a Relative Depth step the system uses all the Doppler settings presently active from the previous protocol step but adjusts the Dep
400. t Curve window Figure 2 e Mode Change e Doppler Settings e Save Events HITS e User Defined Events Event types which are not checked will just be displayed as a tick at the top of the display with no text Toggle scale sharing 3 Check the Scale Sharing function to toggle the scale sharing on This will allow more than one curve to be displayed in the same scale section of the display Leave the box unchecked to force each curve to have its own scale section in the display S8 50 Toggle background grid 4 Check the Show Background Grid function to toggle the background grid for the fast curve display on and off Leave the box unchecked to hide the grid 5 When finished making your selections click on OK Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 1 Click on Display Options Fast Curve Display Options Mode Change Event Markers Indicators Curve Recording etc Doppler Parameter Changes Depth PW CW Scale etc Save Event Markers Auto and Manual Save events H LT S User Defined Event Markers Scale Sharing Identical curves share same section of display Show Background Grid K Cancel Figure 2 Make your choices by clicking on checkmarking the desired option s Choosing the Fast Curves time scale display You can choose from five time s
401. t Curves Figure 2 Click on Curve Configuration Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Curve Configuration Choose the Trend curves for display and curve colors Any combination of six curve choices for display flowing toward or away from the trans ducer can be assigned one of eight possible colors e Systole e Diastole e Mean e PI Pulsatility Index e RI Resistance Index HITS 1 Choose the trend curve you want displayed by clicking on checkmark its associated check box and then choose with which color you want the curve displayed Figure 1 Click on the next Channel tab and repeat as necessary Set the Trend curves scales 2 Click on the TCD Scale Limits tab and set the Mini mum and Maximum Y scale ranges Figure 2 Choose the external inputs to be displayed 3 Click on the External Inputs Configuration tab if available and then checkmark the curves to be displayed their colors and their scale limits Figure 3 4 When finished making your selections click on OK Reviewing Data Configure Trend Channel1 Channel 2 TCD Scale Limits External Inputs r Curves pr Toward r Away S Systole ra vi Diastole v Mean hd v PI
402. t the separation between the M Mode channel bands by using the S key functions MD Expand Depths or MD Contract Depths These adjustments are the equivalent of adjusting the depths on all channels so the difference in depths between channels gets larger or smaller See Figures 1 and 2 Expanding the depths increases the depth separation between spectral channel bands in 2 mm increments Contracting the depths decreases the depth separation between spectral channel bands in 2 mm incre ments When adjustments will cause empty spaces between bands i e when SV is less than the depth separation the background gray is displayed between the bands The overlap between channel bands is limited to 50 Using the Color M Mode Display Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 56mm 78mm T Depth Color Doppler M Mode Display 8 Chan Depth Range 52mm 84mm Depth Dia 18 Dic DAL Dae DAL Figure 2 Color M Mode display window after Expand Depths S16 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adjust the M Mode display gain When the M Mode display is highlighted focussed it is possible to adjust the software gain for the M Mode display Use the Gain key Figure 1 to adjust the software gain either higher or lower You may also use Ctrl F4 to decrease or Shift F4 to increase the gain Increasing the software gain strengthens the signal readjust the colors
403. t window for viewing Method 1 1 Click on the Minimize button Figure 1 Figure 1 Click on the Minimize button to return the window to its Method 2 original size 1 Double click on the window s Title bar Figure 2 Figure 2 Double click on the window s Title bar to return the window to its original size 11 8 Chapter S12 Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files Backing up files 12 1 This chapter describes how to Legends 12 1 print reports Printing the spectral window 12 3 ii If you need help using the keyboard commands Printing the trend curves window 12 4 Alt letter see Chapter 2 in Printing the fast curves window 12 4 this guide Printing a text report 12 5 Printing a graphics report Backing up files with defined print positions S12 6 without defined print positions S12 8 To copy backup patient files to a Exporting Reports to PDF S12 10 storage device e g CD you must use the NicVue program Automatically Saving PDF Reports S12 11 See the NicVue Software Guide that shipped with your system for Exporting SoundTrak data to WAV files S12 12 instructions Retrieving exported SoundTrak WAV files S12 13 To copy backup configuration files to a floppy diskette use the Capturing Screens 12 14 Copy Config icon located on the Windows desktop To later restore these configuration files to the harddisk use the Restore Config icon located on the Windows d
404. ta By recalling any event out of the event list or trend display the user is able to jump to any position in the continuous SoundTrak data file This procedure stops the continuous SoundTrak playback mode and recalls one sweep of spectral and audio data from this time position if a spectral record was recalled If the event was not a spectral record then the system just jumps to the new time position and continues in the same mode either playing back or in pause mode Reviewing Data Note If a spectral record which was saved at a time when the curve data saving was turned off is read in then the continuous SoundTrak functionality should be temporarily disabled lt gt gt szasa Figure 1 Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar S8 27 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Postprocessing Continuous SoundTrak Data While continuous SoundTrak data is playing back the user is able to stop the playback of the data by clicking on the stop symbol or by using the Freeze function The transfer of the continuous SoundTrak data then stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar stops incrementing The spectral displays freeze but not in a pop up window like in the acquire mode At this point the standard post processing functionality is all available like in the standard review mode The user is even able to save to get an additional saved spectral record by pressing save By pr
405. ta Configure Fast Curves Channel 1 Channel 2 TcD Scale Limits External Inputs 4 E BA Envelopes Curves a a H 4 o 0 J Cancel Figure 1 Click on checkmark each of the fast curves checkboxes you want displayed and then click on the Show Menu arrow button and choose with which color you want each curve displayed Configure Fast Curves Channel 1 Channel 2 TCD Scale Limits Curves Envelopes Figure 2 Click on the Up Down Arrow buttons to choose the desired Minimum and Maximum scale ranges with which you want each curve displayed External Inputs Minimum Maximum 0 al 150 4 Cancel Configure Fast Curves Channel 1 Channel 2 TCD Scale Limits External Inputs m Curves p Colors inimum gt pMaximum r Units DE mam be A LF i mmHg Vol Figure 3 Click on checkmark each of the external inputs you want displayed and then click on OK S8 49 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Set the Fast Curves display options 1 Click on the Display Options menu point in the Fast Curve configuration menu Figure 1 and the Fast Curve Display Options dialog will appear Figure 2 Choose which events will be displayed 2 Click on the events you want displayed in the Fas
406. ted and then press Enter Indicators Settings Algorithm Setup _H IT S Confidence 70 a Artifact Confidence OFF 4 Channel Selection Socket 1 to 4 1 channel selected OK Cancel Figure 2 The Indicators Settings window appears Entering text using the keyboard When using the keyboard to select a text area for editing you will typically use the Tab Shift Arrow and Backspace keys see descriptions below 1 When the desired text area is highlighted or the desired characters have been deleted type in the new text or value Text edit command keys Tab Press the Tab key to move the text cursor forward to the next text entry area Shift Tab Hold down the Shift key and press the Tab key to move the text cursor backwards to the preceding text entry area Left Right Arrows Use the Left Right Arrow keys to move the text cursor left right without deleting any characters Up Down Arrows For numerical entry areas use the Up Down Arrow keys to increment decrement the value by predefined steps set by the program Backspace Press the Backspace key to delete the character to the left of the text cursor Entering text using the mouse and keyboard You can use the mouse to select the text area into which you want to enter text or to edit You will however still have to use the keyboard to type in the new information 1 Position the mouse pointer inside the te
407. tering Display Parameters During C SoundTrak Playback S8 25 Adjusting the Time Position for C SoundTrak Playback Jumping the Time Position for C SoundTrak Playback Postprocessing Continuous SoundTrak Data Reviewing H I T S data Monitoring Mode Only Turning the labeling text off Viewing the advanced H I T S information Show event list statistics The SoundTrak display Activating the SoundTrak display Adjusting the SoundTrak data amplitude scale The spectral zoom box Adjusting the size and position of the spectral zoom box Default zoom box positions Reading in H I T S records Reading in H I T S events Reading in manually saved records Saving the default zoom box positions for a saved record Measuring time differences in the SoundTrak data Activating the general cursor mode Setting differential time cursors Saving differential time cursors Working with SoundTrak differential time cursors Moving differential time cursors Resizing differential time cursors Deleting individual cursors Deleting all cursors Displaying cursor units Clearing cursor background Deactivating the general cursor mode Hiding cursors Reviewing Trend data Monitoring Mode Only Saving the trend configuration Configure the trend curves display Choose the trend curves for display and curve colors Set the trend curve scales Choose the external inputs to be displayed Set the trend display options Choose which events will be displayed
408. ternative to the Print button In this case the report will be saved in PDF format and an additional entry will appear in the NicVue software for the file Refer to the section Exporting Reports to PDF 12 5 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Protocol List Example Protocol EME Diag Printi nga Step Vessel Label Probe Depth SV Tx Rx Power Report Pos Saved Comment Onl G h t 1 25 Ophth Pr R 2 MHzPW S1 54mm 10mm 10mm 9 Page 5 1 2 1 Start Orbital Right t 26 SiphonR 16 mmn c n c Page 5 2 2 0 Jump to Carotid Sip rap ICS repor gt 27 VAPr L 2 MHz PW S1 68mm_ 10mm 10mm 39 Start Suboccipital L 1 1 1 i 28 VA Di L a 6mm n c nc A Follow Vertebral with defined print ZOVAPEA ZUHAPWISI Gomm Idan limn ae Pape EE uy z i 30 VA Di R a 6mm n c n c A Follow Vertebral positions Diagnostic i 31 BA Pr S 6 mm n c n c Jump to Basilar i 32 BA Di ii 6 mm n c n c Page 6 3 2 Follow Basilar mode only Figure 1 If no page location has been assigned for a protocol step the Saved Spectral record can still be printed by answering Yes in step 5 on th t This type of Graphic report is ARAS DABS only for Diagnostic exams which used a protocol with defined print Viasys WinTCD Monitoring Report Created on 20 01 2004 at 10 27 Page 1 of 2 Pat Date of Birth 11 10 1950 Exam tme 1801 00 10 25 07 TE Column 1 Column 2 Note For exams whic
409. th Up or Down by the amount of mm you will select in Step 22 Vessel only All the settings presently active are used and only the vessel label for the protocol step is altered If you selected Rel Depth in the previous step click on the Relative Depth Up Down arrow buttons until the desired depth change in mm is displayed The system will then adjust the Depth setting from the previous step up or down by the value you choose here New Protocol Wizard Select a probe and start the Doppler Change the current settings power depth sweep zero line softkeys etc if necessary Add new steps with the current settings Setup common protocol settings that apply to all steps optional Preferably done first before adding any steps since these settings can influence the properties of the steps Please repeat steps 1 and 2 or just step 2 as many times as needed Select the protocol window and click the right mouse button to edit delete or insert steps Finish Cancel Figure 1 Click on the 2 button Add Insert New Step 4 MHz CW r Vessel name and side CCA Di z r Relative Depth 7 r Comment v r Select for save 7 All Params Print step in report ORel Depth es O Vessel only Page Row La Save Step Cancel Figure 2 Make yo
410. the SoundTrak data for a complete examination is available a significant amount of new possibilities become available in the review mode and the need for an external DAT recorder is eliminated Once a patient file which contains continuous SoundTrak data has been read into the review mode the only difference the user initially sees is the addition of the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar as shown in Figure 1 If continuous SoundTrak data is present the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar is placed under the normal review mode toolbar The seven CD player control symbols displayed in the left side of the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar are used to control the playback of the continuous SoundTrak data These functions are explained in the following sections The light blue color line drawn between the CD player symbols and the current time graphically represents the complete length of the recording The left end of the line is the exam start time The right end of the line is the exam end time A square tab position indicator is placed above this line This indicator points to the present file position and slowly moves to the right during the playback process If the continu ous SoundTrak data file is segmented since it was recorded using intermittent monitoring the line is drawn in segments The light blue color is used for areas containing data and gray is used for areas not containing data Reviewing Data The curre
411. through soft tissue only is displayed for the 4 MHz and 8 MHz extracranial transducers as well as the 16 Mhz and 20 MHz microvascular transducers Note The higher the TIC or TIS value the greater the tissue warming will be Adjustments of the Sample Amplitude and the Scale parameters will cause the thermal index numbers to change Note Refer to Chapter H1 for more information concerning this index Note The TIC TIS box is always displayed on systems in the USA and cannot be configured OFF in the acquire mode Mean Mean Velocity The Mean Parameter Box shows the Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra The Mean velocity is a calculation of the average curve measured over the complete sweep of the envelope Sys Systolic The Sys Parameter Box shows the peak Systolic flow which is the highest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope See Note 1 Dia Diastolic The Dia Parameter Box shows the end Diastolic flow which is the lowest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope See Note 1 Note 1 Signal Calculations Preparing the System for Diagnostics PI Pulsatility Index The PI Parameter Box shows the Gosling s Pulsatility Index which is a measure of pulsatility It is calculated as follows P I Psys Edia Mean where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow See Note 1 RI Resistance Index The RI Parameter Box Pourcelot Re
412. tionality Note If you have original hardware and the TX RX Linkage s key is not available this can be activated by using Regedit and setting a DWord registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Nicolet Biomedical WinTCD Settings ToggleTXRXLink to the value 1 S7 10 Original hardware In the original systems the SV box normally shows the length of the sample volume displayed as one value This value represents both the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time since in the normal mode of operation the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time are set to equal lengths The normal mode is active when the TX RX Linkage is set to On If you would like to adjust the transmit pulse length and the receiver gate time independently you can turn the TX RX Linkage Off by using the TX RX Linkage s key In this mode the SV box shows two numbers representing the transmit pulse length TX and the receiver gate time RX When unlinked the Sample key on the remote control will no longer adjust the transmit length but only adjust the receiver time The transmit length can be adjusted by using the s keys Inc TX Pulse Width and Dec TX Pulse Width In addition the receive length can be adjusted by using the s keys Inc RX Pulse Width and Dec RX Pulse Width MK2 hardware In the MK2 hardware systems the SV box shows the length of the sample volume displayed as one value representing the tran
413. tions 1 Carefully unpack all of the system components and make sure none are missing or damaged refer to the shipping list supplied with the system 2 Ensure that the Power Mains Switch 16 is in the O Off position before continuing the set up procedure 3 If a printer is to be used plug the 25 way Centronics printer cable from the printer to the 25 Way Parallel Printer Socket 7 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compliance 4 Connect the keyboard plug to the Keyboard Socket 2 on the back panel 5 Connect the pointing device mouse or track ball to the Pointing Device Socket 1 on the back panel H3 10 6 If the unit is to be connected to a network plug an RJ 45 compatible patch cable into the RJ 45 socket socket 13 on the back panel 7 If any USB peripherals are to be used with this unit connect them to the USB Sockets 14 on the back panel 8 Connect the remote hand controller to the Remote Hand Controller Socket 9 on the back panel Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connector jackscrews are fully tightened This will ensure reliability and EMC compli ance 9 If the optional footswitch is to be used with this unit connect the footswitch to the RS 232 Serial Interface Socket socket 8 Ensure that the cable is fully screened and the connec tor jac
414. tions do not work in the CW mode The power setting is only a function of the amplitude Performing an Exam e oeo as m oe e e ee DN ai CI Cry AMPLITUDE SWEEP dh GAIN ESCAPE ENTER Figure 1 Depth keys Ctrl F1 Shift F1 6 x ESCAPE Figure 2 Sample key Ctrl F6 Shift F6 Note The sample volume setting is displayed in parenthesis for multi depth receiver channels Note See Sample Volume Clarification S7 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Sample volume clarification The sample volume control varies slightly depending on the version of the Doppler hardware and the software functions used to control the feature The Pioneer TC8080 system and the Companion III system each have two versions of the Doppler electronics The original version contained a boost function which was independent of the sample volume control The present version contains a boost function which is tied together with the sample volume control By looking in the About WinTCD dialog you can determine the version of hardware in your system The original systems say either Companion III hardware or Pioneer III hardware The present systems say either Companion HI MK2 hardware or Pioneer III MK2 hardware The following sections explain the differences in the sample volume func
415. tolic flow which is the lowest velocity in the spectral display as measured by the envelope See Note 1 Note 1 Signal Calculations PI Pulsatility Index The PI Parameter Box shows the Gosling s Pulsatility Index which is a measure of pulsatility It is calculated as follows P I Psys Edia Mean where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow See Note 1 RI Resistance Index The RI Parameter Box Pourcelot Resistance Index shows a second measurement of pulsatility It is calculated as follows R I Psys Edia Psys where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow See Note 1 H I T S The H I T S Parameter Box shows the current number of HITS High Intensity Transient Signals that have been detected during the test D Mean Delta Mean The D Mean Parameter Box shows the Delta Mean velocity of the Doppler spectra The Delta Mean velocity is a similar calculation to the standard Mean Velocity but this box is displayed as a percent of a standard value By using the Set Delta Mean function the 100 level for the Delta Mean box is taken from the present Mean value After this time the Delta Mean parameter box will display a percent value relative to this level which essentially displays the change in the mean velocity with respect to the point in time where the Set Delta Mean was used The measurements described on this page are made every cardiac cycle Each
416. ton when finished Maximizing a window If when you first open a file the window does not fill the entire screen it is recommended that you maximize the window to fill the entire screen for enhanced visibility 1 In the upper right corner of the window click on the Restore button Figure 5 2 The window enlarges and fills the entire screen Figure 6 3 Clicking on the same area again minimizes the screen to its original smaller size BER ER gt f TEDI a sE BoE TE Figure 3 Figure 5 BEL aixi C s EE A Start 17 08 AM Figure 2 A Asen rasan Figure 4 Figure 6 Chapter S3 Summaries Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Overview Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Menus Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Overview Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Menus Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Overview Summary Diagnostic Review Screen Menus Summary Monitoring Review Screen Overview Summary Monitoring Review Screen Menus Summary Screen Control Buttons Diagnostic Acquisition Mode Monitoring Acquisition Mode Diagnostic Review Mode Monitoring Review Mode Continuous SoundTrak Summary Remote Control Functions S3 3 S3 4 S3 5 S3 6 S3 7 S3 8 S3 9 S3 10 S3 11 S3 11 S3 12 S3 13 S3 14 S3 15 S3 16 This chapter contains brief summaries of the various screen displays and r
417. trength at the edges of the sample volume some additional image processing is needed to optimize the M Mode image The eight possible channel bands in the M Mode display are expanded out to include additional bands between the true bands These additional bands extra depth settings are based on data which is interpolated from the two adjacent bands Three different types of depth interpolation are provided to the user to choose from These are a no interpolation option a Display Enhancement A option and a Display Enhancement B option The different types of depth interpolation are configurable by using the following method Method 1 1 Right click on the M Mode display to get the Color M Mode Menu Figure 1 and select the display enhancement from the list Using the Color M Mode Display Display Enhancement Disabled Display Enhancement Option A Display Enhancement Option B Palette 1 Palette 2 Palette 3 Figure 1 Right click on the M Mode display and then select one of the three display enhancements from the list 16 15 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Freezing the spectral M Mode display You can freeze the current Spectral M Mode display at any time for closer inspection postprocess with Gain Zero etc and then if you wish save a Snapshot of the frozen display for later inspection In the pop up freeze window both the spectral displays and M Mode display are present an
418. ttings file and Creating a new default Settings file S9 5 rename a Settings file Renaming a Settings file S9 6 ii For instructions on choosing an existing Monitoring Settings File please refer to Choose the monitoring mode settings in Chapter S5 of this guide Deleting a Settings file 89 7 A For setting the system language that will be displayed on the screen see Language options tab in the NicVue Reference Guide See the Window s NT Regional Settings for setting the system language to German Legends py Designates Diagnostic ONE Mode only Designates Monitoring Mode only S9 1 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Blank Page S9 2 Creating a new Settings file A Settings file contains various default settings which when selected automatically sets the previously defined system parameters This helps reduce the amount of setup time Note Transducers must be attached to the system in order to create settings Assign the probe s and channel s Use this procedure to assign connected probes to the intended channel s 1 Click on Settings Figure 1 2 Click on Create a New Setting 3 Click on the Enable button s Figure 2 accordingly for the probe you want to assign to the channel s or select the number of depths multidepth capabil ity wanted for the channel by clicking the small up down arrows Managing the System Settings 4 Choose the FFT resol
419. tton a gt Print active spectral display and load the next step You can instruct the system to print a hardcopy of the active spectral display and then advance to the next step using either of these methods The Report Print positions are ignored for these types of hardcopies Method A 1 If one of the softkeys has been assigned the Print Go Next function click on that button or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Method B 1 Click on Protocol Figure 1 2 Click on Print Go Next Note It is recommended that you use the Graphics Report printout instead of the Print Go Next command to produce a more compact report Create a New Protocol Save Save As Set as Default Load Default Save Step Settings Next Step Previous Step Save Go Next Print Go Next Protocol Manager Figure 1 The Protocol menu Protocol List Example Protocol EME Rx This step was saved and the system advanced to the next step Figure 2 The Saved field for the Active step will increment by 1 each time you execute the Save Go Next command or the Save command Performing an Exam Loading a step manually Protocol List Example Protocol EME Step Vessel Label Probe Depth SV Tx Rx Power Report Pos Saved Comment g 25 Ophth Pr R 2MHzPW S1 54mm 10mm 10mm 9 Page 5 1 2 1 Start Orbital Right You can load ay stepan the list 126 SiphonR 16 mmn c l n c Page 5 2
420. tton Save to File can be used as an alternative to the Print button In this case the report will be saved in PDF format and an additional entry will appear in the Nic Vue software for the file Refer to the section Exporting Reports to PDF 12 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Exporting Reports to PDF Both text and graphics reports can be exported to PDF format by using a very similar procedure to the normal report print sequence as explained in the previous sections Instead of selecting Print from one of the many possible report dialogs you should choose Save to File instead Example in Figure 1 When you select the Save to File function the system creates the PDF report file and writes it to disk instead of printing it out If a PDF report already exists and you try to save another the system prompts you to overwrite the file as shown in Figure 2 If you choose Yes to overwrite then the new report replaces the old report If you choose No to not overwrite then the report function is cancelled Both the text reports and the graphics reports each get their own entry in NicVue These appear to you as if additional examinations have been made The date and time of the report examinations are the same as the original examination 12 10 Graphics Report Configuration Selection Print Layout Comments Snapshot Label Time 15 46 42 Save 2 Manual 15 47 12 Save 3 Manual 15 48 0
421. ultichannel Monitoring the correct Spectral display must be highlighted for the following functions to work The Probe key toggles the focus from one Spectral channel to another If multidepth channels are active the Link Channels in MD Mode function can be used to allow adjustments e g Gain to be performed on all multidepth channels pertaining to one transducer simultaneously Toggle this function on and off with one of the following methods 1 Click on the Link Channels in MD Mode button or 2 Click on Doppler and then click on Link Channels in MD Mode Figure 2 Or 3 If one of the softkey functions has been assigned Multi Depths Link On Off click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the remote control S7 6 Choose the transducer mode PW CW The continuous CW transducers may also be used in a pulse wave PW mode By toggling between PW CW you can control the mode of the active transducer 1 Click on the Toggle PW CW button Or 2 Click on Doppler and then click on Toggle PW CW Figure 2 0r io If one of the softkey functions has been assigned Toggle PW CW Figure 1 click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the remote control Figure 1 If one of the softkeys is labeled Toggle PW CW click on that button or press the corresponding S key on the remote control S
422. umables Standard Pioneer Accessories Standard Companion Accessories Optional Accessories Table of Contents H1 3 H1 3 H1 7 H1 8 H1 8 H1 8 H1 8 H1 8 H1 9 H1 9 H1 9 H1 10 H2 3 H2 3 H2 4 H2 4 H2 5 H2 6 H2 7 H2 8 H2 8 H2 8 H2 8 H2 8 H2 9 TOC i Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter H3 Companion Ill System This chapter provides information concerning the assembly and set up of the Companion III system TOC ii Labels and Symbols Rear View of Companion III Front Quarter View of Companion III Connecting Accessories Connecting the Keyboard Connecting the Pointing Device Connecting an External Printer Connecting the Optional Footswitch Connecting the Remote Hand Controller Connecting a Set of Headphones Connecting USB Peripherals Connecting the Companion HI to a Network Connecting an External VGA Monitor Connecting Serial Devices Connecting Optional Analog Connection Box Connecting an External DAT Recorder Connecting the Standard Transducers to the System Connecting the Microvascular Probes to the System Assembling the System Mains Power Supply Apply Power to the Companion III System H3 3 H3 4 H3 5 H3 6 H3 6 H3 6 H3 6 H3 6 H3 6 H3 7 H3 7 H3 7 H3 7 H3 7 H3 7 H3 7 H3 8 H3 9 H3 10 H3 11 H3 11 Chapter H4 Pioneer TC8080 System This chapter provides information concerning the assembly and set up of the Pioneer TC8080
423. umables The only available consumable for the system is a 250 ml bottle of ultrasonic coupling gel Note Only accessories or consumables that are supplied or recommended by Nicolet EME or Nicolet Vascular should be used with the system H2 8 Standard Pioneer Accessories The Pioneer TC8080 system is delivered as follows e Main unit with CD RW 3 5 inch floppy drive four Doppler sockets and stereo speakers e External Monitor with cables e Keyboard e Mouse e 2m Power mains lead e Microsoft Windows XP pack plus driver and installation disks and CDs e Adhesive Probe Holder e User Manual e NicVue Patient Administration Software CD and Manual e Bottle of Gel Note Please ensure that the disks and CDs are kept with the system A charge will be made for replacements Standard Companion Accessories The Companion III system is delivered as follows e Main unit with CD RW 3 5 inch floppy drive two Doppler sockets stereo speakers and probe holder e Internal Touchscreen Monitor e Keyboard e Mouse e 2m Power mains lead e Microsoft Windows XP pack plus driver and installation disks and CDs e User Manual e NicVue Patient Administration Software CD and Manual e Bottle of Gel Note Please ensure that the disks and CDs are kept with the system A charge will be made for replacements Note The Companion HI LE model does not support the touchscreen display Th
424. unter by one full spectral sweep but does not automatically start sweeping again The user is able to fast forward the playback of the data by clicking on the fast forward gt gt symbol In this case the data being heard and shown in the spectral windows stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar starts incrementing at a faster rate By pressing stop or the fast forward button again the fast forwarding is stopped If play is then pressed the system starts playing back from the new time position If the spectral window is not sweeping when the fast forward button is pressed it stops at the new time position If the spectral window is sweeping when the fast forward button is pressed it continues playing back at the new time position The user is able to rewind the playback of the data by clicking on the rewind lt lt symbol In this case the data being heard and shown in the spectral windows stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar starts decrementing at a faster rate By pressing stop or the rewind button again the rewind ing is stopped If play is then pressed the system starts playing back from the new time position If the spectral window is not sweeping when the rewind button is pressed it stops at the new time position If the spectral window is sweeping when the rewind button is pressed it continues playing back at the new time position While continuo
425. ur selections on the Add Insert New Step panel and then click on Save Step Note The first step for a new probe must be a complete step The system will limit the choice automatically 23 24 25 26 21 28 Select Save Step to save all the parameters for the new protocol step A line will be added to the protocol list window with the main information for the step Repeat starting at step 12 if you want to select a different probe or repeat from step 14 if you want to use the same probe for the next Protocol step When all required steps have been added to the new Protocol click on Finish Figure 1 Click on Yes Figure 2 Type in the name with which you want to label the new Protocol Figure 3 The system saves the new Protocol Creating Diagnostic Protocols New Protocol Wizard Select a probe and start the Doppler Change the current settings power depth sweep zero line softkeys etc if necessary Add new steps with the current settings Setup common protocol settings that apply to all steps optional Preferably done first before adding any steps since these settings can influence the properties of the steps Please repeat steps 1 and 2 or just step 2 as many times as needed Select the protocol window and click the right mouse button to edit delete or insert steps Finish Cancel Figure 1 Click on the Finish button WinTCD AN Do
426. ure 1 using the same color as the curve Depending on whether the 2 or 3 cursor method was used the text is VMR2 or VMR3 Note For information on how to set Average Curve cursors please refer to the section Setting Average Curve Cursors Note See Section Description of Calculate VMR Mode for more detailed information on the functionality of the Calculate VMR mode S8 65 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Description of Calculate VMR Mode During the time that the system does not have the correct number of cursors too many cursors have been set or two or more cursors have exactly the same start time the VMR values are displayed as Figure 1 If the trend display is paged or updated when the VMR calcula tion is written on the display the displayed text remains but the values may be set to new values or depending on whether the cursors are still validly displayed The calculation only works for cursors actually displayed in the trend This applies to all types of trend redraws new trend time base paging etc Depending on the number of cursors shown the 2 or 3 cursor method is automati cally used When a VMR Calculate mode is on and pertinent cursors are deleted from the trend display which are needed for the VMR calculation the VMR calculate mode remains on but this results in the values being drawn as Figure 1 until the user redoes the cursors If pertinent curso
427. ure 2 The five remote control S keys can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window in a similar way to the footswitch S6 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Customizing the window sizes You can resize the various windows on the screen display by moving the Splitter Bars This lets you increase the display area of a particular window to enhance your ability to inspect it s con tents For example Figure 2 shows the effect of resizing the Spectral window in Figure 1 1 Click on and hold down the mouse button on the Splitter Bar 2 Drag the mouse until the desired window size is reached and then release the mouse button Figure 3 shows the Splitter Bars that can be used to resize the various windows Also see the next page for additional methods which WW can be used to resize the windows S6 8 Figure 1 Click and hold down the Left mouse button on the Splitter Bar and then drag the mouse to left or right to resize the window Hb lt Figure 2 After enlarging the window the Spectral data is more easily inspected Exam a Air Depr TET Report Window Help E wr eae EAR E c an a D Step Vessel Label _ Probe Depth Sv Powe Report Pos Saved Comment Event Description fe ii r ii Figure 3
428. ursors S8 11 Settings S9 3 S9 4 S16 4 settings 5 3 Settings and Protocols with External Connections 17 6 Settings file S9 3 S9 5 S16 4 Settings Manager S5 3 S7 4 S9 4 S17 6 Settings menu 5 3 Shift F1 S7 9 S7 14 S16 10 Shift F11 S16 12 Shift F2 S7 8 S8 31 S8 33 S16 9 Shift F3 S7 13 S8 25 S16 9 Shift F4 S8 25 S16 12 Shift F5 S7 8 Shift F6 S7 9 Shift F8 S7 12 S8 25 S8 33 Shift F9 S7 14 Shift tab 2 7 Show Advanced H I T S Information 8 29 Show Background Grid 5 21 S8 42 S8 50 Show Cursors S8 15 S8 38 S8 62 Show Event List Statistics 8 29 Side 10 6 Signal Calculations S5 12 S6 13 signal strength 7 19 S16 12 SIN S8 31 Single point Spectra measurements S8 12 Single click 2 3 sobox isolation Transformer 17 9 Soft Tissue Thermal Index TIS H1 9 S5 11 S6 12 softkey S5 5 S6 6 Software copyright protection PR iii Software Gain S16 16 S16 18 Software gain S 8 25 software gain S7 28 S16 12 Software License Upgrade Menu S 14 3 Software warranty PR iii SoundTrak S7 15 SoundTrak Data Position Indicator 8 32 SoundTrak Differential Time cursors 8 37 S8 38 S8 59 SoundTrak Display 8 30 S8 31 SoundTrak display S8 32 S8 33 S8 36 SoundTrak file 12 13 SoundTrak On when protocol is started 10 11 SoundTrak Zoom Box S8 34 speaker S7 16 Speaker symbol S7 16 speaker symbol S16 6 Specifications H6 1 Spectra 7 21 Spectral Cursor Mouse Pointers S8 9 S8 16 Spectra
429. us SoundTrak data is playing back the user is able to pause the playback of the data by clicking on the pause symbol fourth from left The transfer of the continuous SoundTrak data then stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar stops incrementing The spectral displays stop sweeping and remain in this state until the user selects another function Note The CD player symbols are grayed out when the functions are not available Depending on the situation different combinations of functions are grayed out e g When the time position is at the end of the file the fast forward play and page forward functions are not available Jumping the Time Position for Continuous SoundTrak Playback The user can also jump the playback time position for the continuous SoundTrak data to a different part of the examination By clicking the left mouse button on the position indicator tab over the blue time line Figure 1 holding and dragging this symbol to a new position the user is able to jump to any position in the continuous SoundTrak data file This procedure temporarily stops the continuous SoundTrak playback mode and restarts it from the new time position If the system was not playing back then just the time indicator is altered If the continuous SoundTrak data file is segmented and the user moves the indicator to a gray area not containing data the system always jumps to the next position which has da
430. ution Figure 2 by clicking on one of the three radio buttons The FFT resolution defines the number of vertical points bins in the spectral display The higher the FFT resolution the finer the frequency resolution of each bin will be In multi channel applications a lower FFT resolution will allow faster spectral sweep speeds 5 If 8 depths are selected choose whether you want an M Mode display by checking the box 6 Click on Load Figure 2 Note A channel selection can be deselected by clicking on the Disable button Create a New Setting Result of settings and probe check Setting OK Channels 1 Current assignment of available probes k Ch 2 Ch 1 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 Depths H Disable FFT Resolution O64 O 128 256 Load M Mode L Display Enabled Cancel M Mode LJ Enabled O64 O128 256 Note If an M Mode display is added please refer to Chapter S16 in this guide for all the details on using the M Mode display Note Refer to Chapter S17 in this guide for additional information on creating special settings to record or playback audio data from a DAT tape or to use the Continuous SoundTrak option which records all the audio data in digital format Create a New Setting Save Save As Set as Default Settings Manager Figure 1 Click on Settings and then on Create a New Setting ix Create a New Setting Result of settings and probe check Setting OK Chann
431. velope menu function Toggles the envelope curves between above below both and off F Exam View D ppler Config iration Repor Window Hel E MinTCD Redwing aon data tor oew f Change Scale Units Same as the Doppler gt Units menu function Toggles the scale units for the spectral display between cm sec and kHz Play SoundTrak Print Text Report Same as the Same as the Doppler gt Play SoundTrak Report gt Text Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a menu function Allows audio Doppler data to be played back from the hard disk text report EEK About Button Spectra On Off Same as the Same as the Help gt About WinTCD Doppler gt Spectra menu function Displays a window with menu function Toggles the display of the spectral data various information about on and off your WinTCD system Save Spectral Snapshot Same as the Doppler gt Save Spectral Snapshot menu function Saves the active spectral window to the harddisk wrs REMH ooo ooo Print Graphics Report Same as the Report gt Graphics Report menu function Opens dialog box to allow the printing of a graphics report Show Vessel Label List Same as the Doppler gt Vessel Labels menu function Activates the vessel label menu 3 13 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Monitoring Review Screen Control Buttons Print Spectral Window Same as the Do
432. verage Curve Cursors to Calculate VMR This section explains how Average Curve cursors may be used to calculate the VMR Once the Calculate VMR Aver age Cursors Mode is activated it is possible to set either two or three cursors in the trend in a similar way to the general cursor mode explained previously The system constantly inspects the trend display to see if either 2 or 3 valid cursors for a mean curve have been set in the presently displayed trend time segment As soon as two valid Average curve cursors are found in the trend display the system auto matically calculates the VMR value for each mean curve with the following formula VMR 100 Vhyper Vnorm Vnorm The first cursor value is the Vnorm phase baseline value The second cursor value is the Vhyper phase value The starting time point of the cursors is used to decide which cursor is first If a third valid Average cursor is set in the trend display the system calculates the VMR value for each mean curve with the following formula VMR 100 Vhyper Vhypo Vnorm The first cursor value is the Vnorm phase baseline value The second cursor value is the Vhyper phase value The third cursor value is the Vhypo phase value Trend Window Reviewing Data Figure 1 Calculating VMR using two Average Curve cursors The system displays the VMR values for each mean curve in the top left of the trend display as a percent as shown in Fig
433. ves of designated Doppler parameters and or analog information CH 1 S1 2 MHzZPW MCAR Window Size Button Exit Window Button Reduce the size of the Close the window Exit the window Restore the window WinTCD program to its original size Speaker Mute Click on to mute speaker shows mute status Copy Window Displays the saved Doppler screens captured when the Save key on the Remote Control or F1 on the key board is pressed to resave sgg Parameter Boxes Shows the current Doppler parameters To choose from a menu of 13 options click the Right mouse button anywhere inside this area Event List Lists events saved records etc that occurred during the exam Message Bar Provides information to Softkey Status Bar Identifies the function of the softkeys on the remote the user control To change softkey functions click the Right 5 s Intensity Scale dB mouse button on the soft key to view a menu Signal intensity can range from 0 to 64 dBs S3 9 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Monitoring Review Screen Menus Gina Save Spectral Snapshot F1 Print Spectral Window Ctrl P Spectral Palette gt Play SoundTrak Color M Mode Palette v Fast Curve Window SoundTrak Window Ctrl D Patient Database Noise Reduction Vessel Labels Parameter Boxes Spectra Envelope F8 Units Display Range _ NWinTCD Re
434. viewp fionitoring data for Doe John D ey Ae F Exam View Doppler Configuration Report Window Help Window Configure Event List Text Report 7 Help Topics rede past T Graphics Report Move Horizontal Splitter About WinTCD Configure S Keys Export SoundTrak Ne ao or Review Window Exam Info Configure Footswitch User Definable Items Tile Horizontally Save Configuration Tile Vertically v1 Acquiring data for Doe John D S3 10 Summaries Summary Diagnostic Acquisition Screen Control Buttons About Button Protocol Manager Same as the Same as the Help gt About WinTCD Protocol gt Protocol Manager menu function Displays a window with various information about your WinTCD system menu function Lets you load rename or delete an existing protocol or save a new protocol Save Spectral Snapshot Toggle PW CW Same as the Same as the Doppler gt Save Spectral Snapshot Doppler gt Toggle PW CW menu function Saves the running spectral window to the harddisk Previous Step Same as the Protocol gt Previous Step menu function Jumps to the previous protocol step Boost Mode Same as the menu function Toggles the mode of the transducer between PW and CW when possible Doppler gt Boost Mode menu function Toggles the boost mode level Noise Reduction Same as the Doppler gt Noise Reduction menu function Toggles the audio noise reduction circuitry
435. w ww i d e y oe f o f e fim S e f o f o f oi i E RGD Range Gated Depth SVL Sample Volume Length S Scale settings PRF P Power b denotes diameter c Controllable by user H6 21 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Acoustic Output in IEC 1157 format of Pioneer TC8080 and Companion Ill cont Parameter 16 MHz 2mm 20 MHz 1 5mm 20 MHz 2mm PW PW PW Microvascular Microvascular Microvascular lepta W cm 549 1 268 8 316 15 Po i 1 4mm SVL 1 4mm SVL 1 4mm SVL hem ts e le T me mia e Tt Pe jw le _ e fe oe mm fam S to moo s o Acoustic Power up fraction ow ow o acoustic miarzaon aston 100w moon wos Maximum Power mw 198 os ose owe f e rr o Powerupmode v w w iniiatzationMode o o o cowie owuro w nw w wmo o oo d o o o f o d lnm oo o o a a Ee ee RGD Range Gated Depth SVL Sample Volume Length S Scale settings PRF P Power b denotes diameter c Controllable by user H6 22 Accuracy of Values Specifications The Doppler parameters calcu lated and displayed in the Pioneer TC8080 and Companion HI systems are all based on the FFT spectral display The accuracy of the vertical and horizontal scales determine the accuracy of the parameter measurements The following pages explain these measurements and provide tables containing their accuracies Vertical Scale Accuracy
436. w scale size etc are all maintained until these are changed or a record is read in which has different settings S8 25 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Adjusting the Time Position for Continuous SoundTrak Playback The user can adjust the playback time position for the continuous SoundTrak data in a very similar way like using a DAT recorder The user is able to page the playback of the data forward by clicking on the page gt symbol In this case the data being heard and shown in the spectral win dows temporarily stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar is incremented by one full spectral sweep The system then clears out the spectral window and starts sweeping from the new time position If the spectral window is not sweeping when the page forward button is pressed it just increments the time counter by one full spectral sweep but does not automatically start sweeping again The user is able to page the playback of the data backward by clicking on the page lt symbol In this case the data being heard and shown in the spectral win dows temporarily stops and the time position in the Continuous SoundTrak Toolbar is decremented by one full spectral sweep The system then clears out the spectral window and starts sweeping from the new time position If the spectral window is not sweeping when the page backward button is pressed it just S8 26 decrements the time co
437. w the printing of a text report S3 11 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Summary Monitoring Acquisition Screen Control Buttons Print Spectral Window Same as the Doppler gt Print Spectral Window menu function Prints out a hard copy of the spectral window Save Spectral Snapshot Same as the Doppler gt Save Spectral Snapshot menu function Saves the running spectral window to the harddisk SoundTrak On Off Same as the Doppler gt SoundTrak menu function Allows audio Doppler data to be stored to the hard disk Ac Link Channels in MD Mode Same as the Noise Reduction Same as the Doppler gt Noise Reduction menu function Toggles the audio noise reduction circuitry Fs woten lenuiina dator sonb M A Doppler gt Link Channels in MD Mode menu function Links all channels related to each transducer so Doppler adjustments affect all channels Set Delta Mean Same as the Doppler gt Set Delta Mean menu function Sets the 100 reference value for the delta mean calculation Show Vessel Label List Same as the Doppler gt Vessel Labels menu function Activates the vessel label menu Curve Recording On Off Same as the Doppler gt Curve Recording menu function Lets you start and stop curve recordings BER Exam Pro icol View Doppler Ci nfiguratior Indir ators Report Wi dow Help Settings Manager Same as the Settings gt Settings
438. wer up H5 6 PowerPoint 812 13 pre amplifier pod H5 4 preamplifier pod H3 9 H4 9 Preventative maintenance H1 7 Previous Step S7 36 PRF S7 9 S16 10 PRF scale set S17 6 S17 8 Index 8 Print 12 3 Print Curves 812 4 Print Go Next S7 36 Print Layout tab 10 5 S10 12 S12 9 Print Screen 12 14 Print Spectral Window S 12 3 Print step in report 10 6 S10 10 Print the active spectral display load next step 7 36 Printer H5 3 printer H3 6 H4 6 H5 6 Printers H2 8 Printing a Graphics report w o defined positions 12 6 Printing a Graphics report with defined positions 12 6 Printing Screen Displays S12 1 Printing the Fast Curves window S12 4 Printing the Spectral window S12 3 Printing the Trend Curves window S 12 4 Probe S6 4 S10 8 probe H2 6 Probe key S6 4 S16 8 probes H3 9 H4 9 Protocol S10 3 Protocol List box S10 8 Protocol List window S6 18 Protocol Manager S6 3 6 17 S7 5 S7 35 S17 6 Psys S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 Pull down menu selections 2 6 Pulsatility Index 6 13 Pulsatility Index PI S5 12 S6 13 S7 27 pulse repetition frequency 7 9 S16 10 pulsed wave ultrasound H1 8 Q quadrature 17 3 quadrature signals 17 5 R R I Psys Edia Psys 7 27 R I Psys Edia Psys S5 18 Raising the filter S7 14 Range S7 28 raw audio data 8 31 RCA H2 7 RCA standard audio input connectors S 17 3 S17 9 RCA connectors 17 5 S17 11 Reaching the Maximum File Size 17 20 R
439. when the 2s sweep time is used This corresponds with a 4 ms column rate resulting in a sample rate of 250Hz The lowest sample rate is ob tained when the 40s sweep time is used This corresponds with a 80 ms column rate resulting in a sample rate of 12 5Hz Sample Rates Analog Inputs The sample rate for the external analog curve inputs is dependent on the number of analog input channels The highest rate is obtained when one input channel is used The lowest rate occurs when eight analog input channels are used Refer to the list below for the sample rates 1 Channel 98Hz 2 Channels 61Hz 3 Channels 54Hz 4 Channels 49Hz 5 Channels 40Hz 6 Channels 34Hz 7 Channels 37Hz 8 Channels 33Hz Creating Continuous SoundTrak Settings Files In order to record Continuous SoundTrak data special acquire mode settings need to be created There are no sample factory default settings since most likely users will want to convert their own customized settings to record the Continuous SoundTrak data Use the following steps to create Continuous SoundTrak settings 1 In the acquire mode load the settings file which you want to use or create a new settings file and set the system up the way you want it 2 Select the External Connec tions menu point out of the Configuration menu Figure 1 3 Click on the Digital Outputs tab to access the Continuous SoundTrak configuration facility Figure 2 U
440. wo sections as shown in Figure 2 The left half of the display is used for the spectral display windows The right half of the display is used for the SoundTrak data Both windows can display multiple channels by stacking them up the first channel on the top and the last channel on the bottom S8 30 SoundTrak 2200 2300 msec Save 1 manual CH 1A S1 2 Mhz PW MCA jems Save 1 manual CH 1B S1 2 Mhz PW MCA E Figure 2 Spectral Snapshot with SoundTrak Display Note If an M Mode display is also present in the data file the SoundTrak display will toggle the M Mode display and functionality off when the SoundTrak display is present If the SoundTrak display is turned back off the M Mode display and functionality returns The SoundTrak Display continued The SoundTrak window displays the raw audio data time domain Doppler data as curves For each Doppler spectral display there are two audio curves drawn These represent the quadrature Doppler signals versus time and are referred to as SIN and COS channels If no SoundTrak data is present the system just draws a display with no data curves When more than one spectral channel is present each pair of curves is drawn in its own section of the SoundTrak window and has its own scale The labeling of the curves corresponds with the spectral channels SINIA COS1A SINIB COS1B etc The SIN channel curves are displayed in green and the COS chann
441. ws the time this takes may vary depending on other software or peripherals added to the Pioneer TC8080 The Windows screen will be displayed when the unit is ready Please note that the exact number and type of icons shown on the screen may differ depending on the software or hardware installed Chapter H5 Care and Maintenance of the Equipment Cleaning the Equipment H5 3 This chapter provides information Keyboard H5 3 concerning the care and mainte Mouse H5 3 nance of the Pioneer TC8080 and SVGA Monitor H5 3 Companion III systems Printer H5 3 Pioneer TC8080 Base Unit H5 3 Companion HI Systen Box H5 4 Touch Screen Monitor H5 4 Cart System H5 4 Care of Transducers H5 4 Cleaning Standard Transducers H5 4 Cleaning the Microvascular Transducers H5 4 Cleaning the Microvascular Pods H5 4 Sterilizing 16 MHz and 20 MHz Probes H5 5 Durability of Probes H5 5 User Maintenance Companion III H5 6 If the Companion II system does not power up H5 6 If the pointing device mouse trackball does not work H5 6 If the keyboard does not work H5 6 If the printer does not work H5 6 If there is no sound from the loudspeakers H5 6 User Maintenance Pioneer TC8080 H5 6 If the Pioneer TC8080 system does not power up H5 6 If the monitor is blank with yellow Power Saving LED On H5 7 If the color on the screen is not uniform H5 7 If the picture is fuzzy H5 7 If the mouse does not work H5 7 If the keyboard does not work H5 7 l
442. x Gosling s Pulsatility Index P I is a measure of pulsatility and is display in the Doppler window as PI Itis calculated as follows P I Psys Edia Mean where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow RI Resistance Index The Pourcelot Resistance Index is a second measure of pulsatility and is displayed in the Doppler window as RI It is calculated as follows R I Psys Edia Psys where Psys Peak Systolic Flow Edia End Diastolic Flow H I T S The H LT S counter shows the occurrences of High Intensity Transient Signals and is displayed in the Doppler window labeled H LT S Method 1 1 Click on Configuration Figure 1 2 Click on Configure Trend 3 Click on Curve Configura tion 4 Go to the next page Method 2 1 Position the mouse pointer it will change to a crosshair inside the Trend window Figure 2 and then click the Right mouse button 2 Click on Curve Configuration Figure 3 3 Go to the next page Preparing the System for Monitoring Configuration Configure Event List Configure Fast Curves Configure Trend Intermittent Curve Recording Configure S Keys Configure Footswitch External Connections User Definable Items System Figure 1 Click on Configuration D Acquiring data for Jo Jax JExam Settings View Doppler Configuration Indicators Report Window Help rial Tie Pte S peal EET AR Event List
443. x changes otherwise the new record is loaded first Reading in Manually Saved Records For manually saved records the Zoom box is also 1 second wide and time centered in the spectral display If limits are encountered then the edge of the display is used for the start or stop time position Saving the Default Zoom Box Position for a Saved Record After adjusting the position of the Zoom box on a record the new size and position of the Zoom box can be saved to the record by using the Save function When the record is read in again the next time the new default positions will be used Note The default Zoom box position can only be saved for spectral records The default Zoom box positions for H I T S events are determined by the algorithm Reviewing Data 8 35 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Measuring Time Differences in the SoundTrak Data This section describes how to measure time delays in the SoundTrak data by setting a cursor in the SoundTrak display This functionality is typically used with multidepth H I T S record ings to measure the time delay of an event between channels Activating the General Cursor Mode The General Cursor Mode for the SoundTrak display Figure 1 can be switched on and off by 1 Right clicking in the SoundTrak display Figure 2 2 Clicking on the function General Cursors Figure 3 When the General Cursor Mode is active the mouse poi
444. xposure and optimize the results and efficiency of the equipment Always apply the ALARA principle use power levels that are As Low As Reasonably Achievable Refer to the section Display of the Thermal Index on the next page for more information on control ling the ultrasound exposure Note In the Multichannel Monitoring mode if the sum of the Ultrasound intensities goes above 100 then the Power Parameter Boxes will turn yellow to indicate this condition on systems in the United States Note When the Tx Rx Linkage function is On the Sample key will adjust the length of both the transmit and receive pulse lengths When the Tx Rx Linkage function is Off the transmit pulse length can only be adjusted by using the functions Inc Tx Pulse Width or Dec Tx Pulse Width Adjust ments made to the Rx Pulse Width will not change the power output See section S7 Display of the Thermal Index In addition to the acoustic power output expressed as a percentage value the system also provides a thermal index to help the operator use ALARA when the acoustic output has the potential to significantly increase the tissue temperature There are two types of thermal indexes used in the system e Cranial Bone Thermal Index TIC This Index which is based on a model where the bone is located close to the surface of the skin is displayed for the 1 6 MHz and 2 MHz transcranial transducers Soft Tissue Thermal Index
445. xt area usually enclosed with a box The pointer changes to a Text Cursor Figure 1 2 If the text area is empty click the Left mouse button and begin typing the new text 0r 3 If there is text already present in the text area a Move the Text Cursor to the beginning or ending of the text you want to edit Figure 2 b Hold down the Left mouse button and then drag the mouse left or right until all of the character s you want to edit are highlighted and then release the mouse button Figure 3 c Type in the new text or value Figure 4 Entering Commands This is the original text that you want edited x Figure 1 The mouse Pointer was moved inside the Text Area and it changed to a Text Cursor Text Cursor This is the original text that you want edited Figure 2 The Text Cursor was moved to the beginning of the word original Drag Mouse to Right This is the Etinrltext that you want edited Figure 3 The left mouse button was held down and the mouse was dragged to the right thus highlighting the word original Release the mouse button This is the NEW text that you want edited Figure 4 The word NEW was typed which replaced the word original S2 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Using the remote control The five softkeys S1 S5 on the Remote Control correspond to the five keys displayed on the bott
446. y Splitting the windows vertically Choose the Vessel Labels Choose the Doppler Parameter Box display Depth SV Sample Volume Length Gain Filter Ampl Amplitude Power TIC TIS Mean Mean Velocity Sys Systolic Dia Diastolic PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index D Mean Delta Mean Choose the Doppler colors Display the Toolbar Set the Copy Window Loading a Protocol The Protocol List window Step and Flow Direction Vessel label Transducer column Depth column Sample Volume S V column Power column Report Position column Saved column Comment column Cursor bar Active Step indicator Saving Doppler DSP changes to the active Protocol step S6 3 S6 4 S6 5 S6 6 S6 7 S6 8 S6 9 S6 9 S6 10 S6 11 S6 12 S6 12 S6 12 S6 12 S6 12 S6 12 S6 12 S6 13 S6 13 S6 13 S6 13 S6 13 S6 13 S6 14 S6 15 S6 16 S6 17 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 18 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 19 S6 20 TOC ix Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Chapter S7 Performing an Exam This chapter describes how to acquire data from your subject during an exam TOC x Connect the transducer s Load the channel settings Monitoring mode only Choose the Protocol Diagnostic mode only Set up the acquisition parameters Selecting and linking channels Choose the transducer mode PW CW Choose the flow velocity scale units Set the flow velocity scale Adjust the amplitude Adjust
447. y Options Go to Exam Begin Go to Exam End 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 6 Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Print Curves Figure 3 Click on Print Curves Curve Configuration Display Options Go to Trend Begin Go to Trend End 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 20 Seconds 30 Seconds Print Curves Figure 4 Click on Print Curves Printing a text report Use this procedure in either the acquisition or review modes to print the saved records from the exam 1 Click on Report Figure 1 and then on Text Report Or 1 If one of the softkeys was assigned the Text Report function either click on the displayed softkey or press the corresponding S key on the Remote Control Or 1 Click on the Text Report button 2 If you want to add a Footer Comment to your report click on checkmark the Footer Comment checkbox Figure 2 click inside the Footer Comment text entry box and then type in your comments 3 If you want to add a Conclu sion to your report click on checkmark the Conclusion checkbox Figure 2 click inside the Conclusion text entry box and then type in your conclusion 4 Click on Print Printing Exporting and Backing Up Files Text Report Graphics Report Export SoundTrak Figure 1 Click on Report and then on Text Report Text Report Configuration Comments v Footer Comment Conclusion
448. you want to exit the new protocol mode and save your changes Figure 2 Click on Yes to save the new protocol Enter new name x Doo OK Cancel Figure 3 Type in a name for the new Protocol and then click on OK S10 7 Pioneer TC8080 and Companion III User Manual Editing a Protocol The Protocol List window Figure 1 displays the steps which comprise the selected protocol You can edit the selected Protocol as necessary to fit your require ments Note The Protocol List window is always displayed on the screen unless the Spectral window is increased to its maximum height or the Event list is increased to its maximum width Note Each time a protocol step is edited be sure to save the changes to the step by using the function Save Step Settings 10 8 Selecting a different probe Use this procedure to select a different probe connected to your system Method A 1 Click on Doppler Figure 2 2 Click on Probe 3 Choose the new probe by clicking on the corresponding Socket Figure 3 Method B 1 Press the Probe button on the Remote Control Figure 4 2 Choose the new probe by clicking on the corresponding Socket Figure 3 Method C 1 Press the Probe button in the toolbar 2 Choose the new probe by clicking on the corresponding Socket Figure 3 ee EEL es Se Dall Vessaranei Prone popin ev Pomer Report Pos saved Comme
449. ys on the Footswitch can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window 1 Select the Configure Footswitch function out of the Configuration menu The Footswitch Configuration menu Figure 1 will appear 2 Click the Left mouse button on one of the three tabs to choose the window type 3 Click the Left mouse button on the selection arrow to the right of the function to change and choose the new function from the list of possible functions 4 Repeat until all nine footswitch functions have been assigned a specific function and click the mouse on the OK button to finish Note The remote control S keys can be configured by selecting the function Configure S keys out of the Configuration menu In the pop up dialog box Figure 2 a set of S keys can be defined for each of the three operation windows main window freeze window and review window S5 6 Footswitch Configuration Main Window Freeze Window Review Window r Left Switch Function Depth Up Middle Switch Function4 _ Depth Down v Right Switch Function Cancel Figure 1 The three footswitch keys on the Footswitch can be configured for the three different types of display windows Main Window Freeze Window and Review Window S Key Configuration Main Window Freeze Window Review Window 1 Function Curve S
450. ystem for an examination do not touch the interconnecting cable connec tors on the rear panel of the system or the non medical equipment and the patient simultaneously WARNING Whilst using the system for an examination it is recommended that no electrical connections be made to the system other than those specified in chapters H3 and H4 If this is unavoidable ensure that the extra connec tions conform to IEC 601 1 1 2000 To minimize risk of injury to patient and or operator use only EME Nicolet approved accessories with the system that are specified in this manual All nonmedical equipment connected to this device such as printers must comply with IEC 950 and or appropriate Euro pean Directives To guard against possible injury or damage to the system during installation make sure the system power switch is in the OFF position until otherwise instructed Do not switch on any system power until all cables have been properly connected and veri fied Safety Summary WARNING The casing of the system is under no circumstance to be removed by any unauthorized persons as there are live components within the system Customer service and mainte nance must be carried out exclusively by the manufactur ers See chapter H5 for more information No system repairs or mainte nance may be carried out while an examination is taking place When replacing mains fuses make sure that

WinTCD User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents